Skip to main content

Full text of "The North-west and North-east passages 1576-1611"

See other formats


CAMBRIDGE 
TRAVEL 
BOOKS 


CAMBRIDGE    TRAVEL    BOOKS 


THE 

NORTH-WEST    AND    NORTH-EAST 
PASSAGES,   1576-1611 


CAMBRIDGE   UNIVERSITY   PRESS 

C.  F.  CLAY,  MANAGER 

HonUon:  FETTER  LANE,  E.G. 

3EUmburgfj:  100  PRINCES  STREET 


$efo  iforfc:    G.  P.  PUTNAM'S  SONS 

ISombag,  Calcutta  anH  fflafcras:    MACMILLAN  AND  Co.,  LTD. 
^Toronto:   J.  M.  DENT  AND  SONS,   LTD. 
a:    THE  MARUZEN-KABUSHIKI-KAISHA 


All  rights  reserved 


Jg 


•5    g 


THE 

NORTH-WEST    AND 
NORTH-EAST   PASSAGES 

1576-161 i 


EDITED    BY 

PHILIP    F.    ALEXANDER,    M.A, 

HERTFORD    COLLEGE,    OXFORD 


Cambridge  : 
at  the  University  Press 

'9*5 


Catttirtftge : 

PRINTED   BY   JOHN    CLAY,    MA. 
AT   THE    UNIVERSITY    PRESS 


.  /A 


PREFACE 

rilHE  aim  of  the  present  series  is  to  illustrate  the 
history  of  geographical  discovery  by  means  of 
select  voyages  and  travels.  These  are  usually  written 
by  the  discoverer  himself,  or  by  an  eye-witness  who 
accompanied  him  on  his  journey.  Apart  from  the 
results  achieved,  they  are  full  of  interest,  since  they 
tell  the  story  of  man's  bravery  in  feeling  his  way  over 
an  unknown  world. 

The  English  voyages  of  the  sixteenth  century  (some 
of  which  will  be  given  in  this  series)  record,  moreover, 
the  deeds  of  the  seamen  who  laid  the  foundation  of 
Britain's  sea-power  and  of  her  Colonial  Empire. 

It  is  hoped  that  these  books  may  be  of  service  in 
schools,  used  either  as  Readers,  or  as  an  aid  to  the 
teaching  of  Geography.  Spelling  and  punctuation 
have  been  modernized  wherever  necessary,  though 
archaic  words  have  been  kept. 

P.  F.  A. 

WALBEBSWICK, 

May  1915. 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

INTRODUCTION .        .  xi 

SOME  IMPORTANT  DATES  IN  THE  HISTORY  OF  DISCOVERY  .  xyii 

THE  NORTH-WEST  PASSAGE: 

FROBISHER:  FIRST  VOYAGE  (1576)'   .        .        .        .        .  1 

FROBISHER:    SECOND  VOYAGE  (1577)        ,        .        .        .  10 

DAVIS:    FIRST  VOYAGE  (1585)  .        .                 ...  48 

DAVIS:    SECOND  VOYAGE  (1586)       .                 .        .        .  62 

DAVIS:    THIRD  VOYAGE  (1587) 78 

HUDSON:    LAST  VOYAGE  (1610) 88 

THE  NORTH-EAST  PASSAGE  : 

BARENTS:    THIRD  VOYAGE  (1596) 116 

APPENDIX  TO  THE  THIRD  VOYAGE  OF  BARENTS      .        .  199 

NOTES    ,  202 


MAPS  AND  ILLUSTRATIONS 

THE  EXACT  MANNER  OF  THE  HOUSE  WHEREIN  WE  WINTERED 

Frontispiece 
(This  and  the  other  illustrations  to  Barents  are  from 

De  Bry's  India  Orientalis,  1599.     They  are  copies  from 

the  original  edition  of  De  Veer — Amsterdam,  1598 — but 

are  better  finished.)  PAGE 

THE  ONLY  PASSAGE  (BERING  STRAIT)  AND  ITS  APPROACHES 

AS  KNOWN  NOW          .......          X 

SIR  MARTIN  FROBISHER    . xx 

(From  Holland's  Heroologia,  1620.) 
PART  OF  NORTH  AMERICA  AND  GREENLAND,  TO  ILLUSTRATE 

FROBISHER' s,  DAVIS' s  AND  HUDSON'S  VOYAGES  .  3 

HUDSON  BAY  AND  ITS  APPROACHES  .....        89 

WILLIAM  BARENTS   .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .115 

(From  de  Vries's  Oud-Holland.     Originally  a  vignette 

in  a  chart  published  in  Amsterdam  between  1613  and 

1615.) 

A  WONDER  IN  THE  HEAVENS,  AND  HOW  WE  CAUGHT  A  BEAR.       117 
PART   OF  HONDIUS'S  MAP   OF   1611,   SHOWING   BARENTS'S 

DISCOVERIES      .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .119 

HOW  A  BEAR  CAME  INTO  OUR  BOAT,  AND  WHAT  TOOK  PLACE 

WITH   HIM  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .          120 

NOVAYA  ZEMLYA,  SHOWING  ENTRANCES  TO  KARA  SEA        .       123 

HOW  OUR  SHIP  STUCK  FAST  IN  THE  ICE,  WHEREBY  THREE  OF 

US  WERE  NEARLY  LOST  .  .  .  .  .  .125 

HOW  THE  ICE  HEAVED  UP  THE  FORE  PART  OF  OUR  SHIP  .  .          126 

HOW  WE  BUILT  A  HOUSE  OF  WOOD,  WHEREIN  TO  KEEP  OUR- 
SELVES THROUGH  THE  WINTER  .  .  .  .  .131 

HOW  WE  SHOT  A  BEAR,  WHEREFROM  WE  GOT  A  GOOD  HUNDRED 

POUNDS'  WEIGHT  OF  GREASE  .....  147 

HOW  WE  MADE  READY  TO  SAIL  BACK  AGAIN  TO  HOLLAND       .          154 

HOW  WE  PREPARED  A  WAY  WHEREBY  WE  BROUGHT  OUR  BOATS 

AND  GOODS  TO  THE  SEA  ......  159 

TRUE  PORTRAITURE  OF  OUR  BOATS,  AND  HOW  WE  NEARLY  GOT 

INTO  TROUBLE  WITH  THE  SEA-HORSES         .         .         .       177 
SOME  OF  THE  RELICS  BROUGHT  FROM  THE  WINTER  HOUSE  IN 
NOVAYA  ZEMLYA,  AND  NOW  IN  THE  NATIONAL  MUSEUM 
AT  AMSTERDAM ,         ,  198 

a  5 


The  only  Passage  (Bering  Strait)  and  its  approaches  as  known  now 

(From  Dr  Bruce'a  Polar  Exploration,  by  kind  permission  of  Messrs 
Williams  and  Norgate) 


INTRODUCTION 

Venice,  the  seaport  closest  to  the  centre  of  Europe, 
had  gradually  pushed  her  trade  farther  and  farther 
across  the  Mediterranean,  until  in  the  fifteenth  century, 
after  the  crushing  defeat  of  Genoa — her  only  serious 
rival — she  was  not  only  mistress  of  the  Adriatic,  but 
the  commercial  capital  of  the  world.  Her  trade  routes 
extended  as  far  as  the  Sea  of  Azof,  along  the  coasts  of 
Asia  Minor  and  Syria,  and  to  Alexandria,  whence  her 
ships  brought  back  the  merchandise  that  had  travelled 
from  the  East  along  the  great  caravan  routes  that 
stretched  either  from  Suez  to  Alexandria,  or  from 
Ormuz  (at  the  entrance  of  the  Persian  Gulf),  to  Beyrout 
or  Aleppo.  With  this  merchandise  and  the  produce  of 
the  Mediterranean  she  traded  by  land  with  central 
Europe,  and  by  sea  to  the  west  as  far  as  England  and 
Flanders.  Her  splendour  is  thus  described  by  the  poet 
Petrarch  :  "  From  my  windows  on  the  Riva  degli 
Schiavoni,  I  see  vessels  as  large  as  my  house  with 
masts  taller  than  its  towers.  They  sail  to  all  parts 
of  the  world,  and  brave  a  thousand  dangers.  They 
carry  wine  to  England ;  honey  to  the  Scythians ; 
saffron,  oil,  linen  to  Assyria,  Armenia,  Persia  and 
Arabia  ;  wood  to  Egypt  and  Greece  ;  they  return  laden 
with  merchandise  to  be  distributed  all  over  Europe. 
Where  the  sea  ends,  their  sailors  quit  the  ships  and 
travel  on  to  trade  with  India  and  China  ;  they  cross 


xii  Introduction 

the  Caucasus  and  the  Ganges,  and  reach  the  Eastern 
Ocean1." 

From  early  in  the  fifteenth  century  Portuguese 
sailors,  inspired  by  their  Prince  Henry,  had  been  trying 
to  find  a  sea-route  to  India,  and  though  progress  was 
very  slow,  their  ships  gradually  crept  down  the  coast 
of  Africa,  until  in  1486  Bartholomew  Diaz  rounded  the 
Cape  of  Good  Hope.  This  was  a  deadly  blow  to 
Venetian  prosperity,  as  goods  could  be  brought  far 
more  cheaply  from  the  East  by  sea  than  by  land, 
especially  because  exorbitant  duties  were  exacted  from 
the  caravans  by  the  Mohammedan  rulers  of  Syria  and 
Egypt.  Ten  years  later  Vasco  da  Gama  sailed  round 
the  Cape,  and  reached  Calicut  on  the  west  coast  of  India. 
The  Portuguese  then  established  themselves  at  Goa  on 
the  same  coast,  seized  Ormuz  (one  of  the  centres  of 
the  trade  with  Venice),  and  in  1521  the  Moluccas  or 
Spice  Islands,  and  for  fifty  years  held  the  monopoly  of 
trade  with  the  East. 

Christopher  Columbus  and  his  brother  Bartholomew, 
natives  of  Genoa,  had  after  many  voyages  settled  in 
Portugal,  about  the  year  1470.  Ignorant  of  the 
existence  of  America  and  the  Pacific  Ocean,  Columbus 
was  convinced  that  a  much  nearer  route  to  China  and 
India  could  be  found  by  sailing  westwards.  As  the 
Portuguese  king  would  not  grant  him  the  assistance 
he  needed  for  the  voyage,  he  went  to  Spain  and  after 
years  of  waiting  obtained  all  he  asked  from  Ferdinand 
and  Isabella.  In  1492  he  set  sail  and  discovered 
islands  lying  as  he  supposed  off  the  coast  of  Asia,  and 
still  known  as  the  West  Indies  (the  Indies  reached  by 

1  Quoted  from  The  Venetian  Republic  by  Horatio  Brown  (J.  M. 
Dent  and  Co.). 


Introduction  xiii 

the  westward  route).  In  1493  the  Pope,  Alexander  VI, 
issued  a  Bull  which  practically  divided  all  the  world 
outside  Europe  between  Spain  and  Portugal,  and  then 
followed  the  gradual  discovery  of  the  American  con- 
tinent by  Spanish  and  Portuguese  fleets,  the  conquest 
of  Mexico  and  Peru  by  the  Spaniards,  and  the  voyage 
of  Magellan's  ship  the  Victoria  (the  first  voyage  round 
the  world)  across  the  Pacific,  by  way  of  South  America, 
proving  the  existence  of  another  great  ocean  besides 
the  Atlantic  which  lay  between  Europe  and  the  East. 

Other  nations  determined  to  obtain  a  share  of  the 
wealth  that  was  pouring  into  Spain  and  Portugal  from 
their  new  colonies.  The  French  established  themselves 
in  Canada,  and  the  English  and  Dutch  made  attempts 
to  discover  a  way  to  the  East,  either  by  rounding  the 
coast  of  North  America,  which  tapered,  it  was  believed, 
to  a  cape  like  Africa  and  South  America  (The  North- 
West  Passage),  or  by  sailing  round  Norway  and  along 
the  coasts  of  Russia  and  Siberia  (The  North-East 
Passage). 

In  the  reign  of  Henry  VII,  another  Genoese,  John 
Cabot,  who  had  settled  in  Bristol,  had  tried  the  north- 
west route,  and  had  re-discovered  Newfoundland  and 
explored  part  of  the  coast  of  North  America.  In  1553 
Sir  Hugh  Willoughby  was  lost  in  attempting  the 
North-East  Passage,  but  Richard  Chancellor,  his  pilot, 
reached  Archangel  in  another  ship,  and  travelled  over- 
land to  Moscow,  opening  a  trade  between  England  and 
Russia.  For  a  time,  owing  to  the  success  of  this  trade, 
no  further  attempt  was  made  towards  the  north-east, 
and  attention  was  again  directed  to  the  north-west. 

In  1576  Martin  Frobisher  started  on  his  first 
voyage,  and  discovered  the  passage  into  Baffin  Land, 


xiv  Introduction 

now  known  as  Frobisher  Bay.  In  his  two  subsequent 
voyages,  practically  nothing  was  done  in  the  way  of 
discovery.  They  were  indeed  scarcely  intended  for 
anything  more  than  a  mining  adventure. 

John  Davis,  a  Devonshire  man,  a  friend  of  the 
Gilberts  and  their  half-brother  Sir  Walter  Ralegh, 
and  one  of  the  most  capable  navigators  of  Queen 
Elizabeth's  reign,  accomplished  far  more  than  any  of 
his  predecessors  in  the  way  of  discovery  during  his 
three  voyages  of  1585-7.  But  his  failure  to  find  a 
passage  led  to  renewed  attempts  on  the  part  of  the 
Dutch  as  well  as  the  English  towards  the  north  and 
north-east,  though  already  one  important  expedition, 
under  Pet  and  Jackman,  had  been  sent  out  in  1580 
in  the  latter  direction  by  the  Russia  or  Muscovy 
Company,  and  had  been  driven  back  by  the  ice  in  the 
Kara  Sea,  with  the  loss  of  Jackman  and  his  ship  on 
the  return  journey. 

In  1594  the  Dutch,  who  had  before  made  several 
attempts  in  the  same  direction,  sent  out  three  ships 
accompanied  by  a  small  fishing  boat,  two  of  them 
to  follow  the  previous  route  by  the  south  of  Novaya 
Zemlya,  and  one,  of  which  Barents  was  commander, 
together  with  the  small  boat,  to  attempt  a  passage 
round  the  north  of  the  island.  After  reaching,  with 
enormous  difficulty,  the  Orange  Islands,  he  was  obliged 
to  turn  back,  falling  in  on  his  return  journey  with 
the  other  ships  which  had  been  unable  to  cross  the 
Kara  Sea.  The  following  year  a  larger  expedition,  with 
Barents  as  chief  pilot,  had  no  more  success.  In  spite 
of  this,  two  ships  again  set  out  next  year,  1596,  carrying 
Barents  as  pilot.  They  discovered  Spitzbergen,  and 
separated.  Barents's  ship  (commanded  by  Heemskerck) 


Introduction  xv 

then  sailed  for  Novaya  Zemlya,  and  after  rounding  the 
north  of  the  island,  was  ice-bound  on  the  east  coast. 
Here  the  crew  built  a  house  and  remained  for  ten 
months,  in  the  hope  that  the  ice  would  break  up. 
Summer  came,  and  as  the  ship  was  still  fast,  they 
embarked  in  two  open  boats,  and  after  a  voyage  of 
nearly  1700  miles  reached  Kola,  and  found  Dutch 
ships  there,  one  of  which  took  them  back  to  Holland. 
Barents  and  four  others  had  died,  but  twelve  out  of 
the  ship's  company  of  seventeen  reached  home  in 
safety. 

This  voyage,  told  in  vivid  detail  by  De  Veer,  who 
accompanied  Barents,  is  a  very  memorable  one.  For 
the  first  time  on  record  men  had  wintered  far  within 
the  Arctic  zone.  It  had  too  a  romantic  sequel,  when 
nearly  300  years  afterwards  the  relics  of  the  winter 
house  were  discovered.  Barents  is  "  perhaps  the  most 
hardy  and  capable  navigator  ever  produced  by  Hol- 
land1." 

To  return  to  English  attempts.  Hudson  in  1607 
tried  a  new  route  to  the  north  across  the  Polar  Sea, 
and  again  next  year  the  old  route  to  the  north-east 
by  Novaya  Zemlya.  In  1609  he  was  employed  by  the 
Dutch  East  India  Company,  and  after  a  vain  attempt 
to  pass  Novaya  Zemlya,  he  sailed  westwards  and 
explored  part  of  the  American  coast,  and  the  river 
which  now  bears  his  name,  and  on  which  New  York 
stands.  In  1610,  at  the  expense  of  some  London 
merchants,  he  set  out  on  his  last  voyage,  to  attempt 
the  North- West  Passage.  Sailing  up  the  strait  and  into 
the  bay,  which  are  now  named  after  him,  he  was 

1  Heawood,  A  History  of  Geographical  Discovery  in  the  17th  and 
18th  centuries  (Cambridge  University  Press). 


xvi  Introduction 

abandoned  by  his  mutinous  crew,  and  nothing  more 
was  ever  heard  of  him. 

In  1616,  after  several  previous  voyages,  Baffin  made 
considerable  discoveries  in  the  bay  which  bears  his 
name.  The  attention  of  both  English  and  Dutch  was, 
however,  turning  to  the  whale  fishery,  which  the  voyages 
of  Barents  and  Hudson  had  opened  up,  and  little  was 
done  in  the  way  of  exploration  for  many  years.  It 
was  not  until  1728,  when  Peter  the  Great  sent  out 
Bering  for  this  purpose,  thai>  it  was  actually  proved 
that  Asia  was  separated  from  America.  He  did  not, 
however,  attempt  the  North-East  Passage,  but  sailed 
north  from  Kamtchatka,  where  he  had  built  two  ships. 
In  a  subsequent  voyage  (1741)  he  proved  that  the  water 
that  separated  the  two  continents  was  a  narrow  strait. 
Early  voyages  had  been  mainly  for  commercial  reasons, 
but  Bering's  were  conducted  in  the  cause  of  science. 
Of  later  expeditions  in  the  same  cause,  the  most  famous 
are  those  of  Sir  John  Franklin  between  1819  and  1847, 
but  it  was  not  until  1850-54  that  M'Clure  accomplished 
the  North- West  Passage,  nor  until  1878-79  that  a 
Swedish  explorer,  Nordenskiold,  succeeded  in  the  North- 
East  Passage,  along  the  north  coast  of  Siberia. 

NOTE.  Frobisher's  and  Davis' s  Voyages  are  taken  from  Hak- 
luyt's  Principal  Navigations,  etc.  and  are  given  nearly  complete. 
Prickett's  Narrative  of  Hudson's  Last  Voyage  is  from  Purchas's 
Pilgrims,  omitting  the  earlier  and  less  interesting  portion.  Barents' s 
Third  Voyage  is  from  a  translation  by  W.  Phillip  published  in  1609. 
I  have  abridged  this  considerably,  and  have  used  for  the  purpose, 
with  the  kind  permission  of  the  Hakluyt  Society,  the  2nd  edition 
of  De  Veer  issued  by  them  in  1876.  This  contains  many  valuable 
corrections  to  Phillip's  translation,  a  few  of  which  I  have  incor- 
porated in  the  text,  while  others  will  be  found  in  the  notes.  The 
extracts  from  Carlsen's  log-book  are  from  the  same  source.  . 


SOME   IMPORTANT  DATES   IN  THE 
HISTORY  OF  DISCOVERY 

B.C. 

327.     Alexander  the  Great  reaches  India. 
55.     Julius  Caesar  visits  Britain. 
A.D. 

861.     The  Vikings  (under  Naddod)  discover  Iceland. 
877.     Gunnbiorn  discovers  Greenland,  which  is  colonised  a  few 

years  later  by  Eric  the  Red. 

1000.  Leif  Ericson  discovers  Labrador  (Helluland),  Newfoundland 
(Markland)  and  Nova  Scotia  (Vinland).  Colonies  are 
founded,  but  afterwards  abandoned. 

1260-1271.     Niccolo  and  Maffeo  Polo  (Marco  Polo's  father  and 

uncle)  go  on  a  trading  expedition  through  Asia  to  China. 

1271-1295.     Marco  Polo  goes  with  them  on  a  second  journey  to 

the  Court  of  Kublai  Khan,  and  thence  is  sent  as  an  envoy 

to  Cochin  China,  India,  etc. 

1418-1460.     Prince  Henry  of  Portugal   (Henry  the   Navigator) 

encourages  discovery. 
1420.     Zarco  discovers  Madeira. 

1455.     Cadamosto  reaches  the  Senegal  and  Cape  Verde. 
1484.     Diego  Cam  discovers  the  Congo. 
1486.     Bartholomew  Diaz  rounds  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope. 

1492.  Columbus  discovers  the  West  Indies. 

1493.  Columbus  (2nd  voyage)  discovers  Jamaica. 

1497.  Vasco  da  Gama  reaches  India  by  the  Cape.  On  the  way  he 
sees  Natal  (Christmas  Day),  and  Mozambique,  and  lands 
at  Zanzibar. 

1497.  John  Cabot  re-discovers  Newfoundland. 

1498.  Columbus  (3rd  voyage)  discovers  Trinidad  and  the  Orinoco. 

1499.  .  Amerigo  Vespucci  discovers  Venezuela  (though  great  doubt 

is  now  cast  on  the  accuracy  of  his  statements). 

1500.  Pedro  Cabral  discovers  Brazil. 


xviii  Important  Dates 

1511.  Serrano  reaches  the  Moluccas  (the  Spice  Islands). 

1513.  Balboa  crosses  the  Isthmus  of  Panama,  and  sees  the  Pacific. 

1519.  Cortez  conquers  Mexico. 

1519.  Magellan  starts  on  the  first  voyage  round  the  world. 

1520.  Magellan  sails  past  Monte  Video,  Patagonia,  and  Tierra  del 

Fuego,  through  his  strait,  and  across  the  Pacific. 

1521.  Magellan  discovers  the  Ladrones,   and  is  killed  on  the 

Philippines. 

1522.  Sebastian  del  Cano,  in  Magellan's  ship,  Victoria,  reaches 

Spain. 

1531.     Pizarro  conquers  Peru. 
1534.     Cartier  explores  the  St  Lawrence. 
1541.     Orellana  explores  the  Amazon. 

1553.  Sir  Hugh  Willoughby  attempts  the  North-East  Passage, 

and  sees  Novaya  Zemlya. 

1554.  Chancellor,    Willoughby's   pilot,   reaches   Archangel,    and 

travels  thence  to  Moscow. 

1558.     Jenkinson  travels  from  Moscow  to  Bokhara. 
1576.    Martin  Frobisher  discovers  his  bay. 
1577-1580.     Drake  sails  round  the  world — the  first  Englishman 

who  does  this. 

1586-88.     Cavendish  sails  round  the  world. 
1586.    Davis  sails  through  his  strait. 
1596.    Barents  discovers  Spitzbergen. 
1605.     Torres  discovers  his  strait. 
1608.     Champlain  discovers  Lake  Ontario. 
1610.    Hudson  sails  through  his  strait  into  his  bay. 

1615.  Lemaire  rounds  Cape  Horn  (Hoorn,  named  after  the  town 

to  which  his  ships  belonged). 

1616.  Baffin  discovers  his  bay. 

1642.     Tasman  discovers  Van  Diemen's  Land   (Tasmania)   and 

Staaten  Land  (New  Zealand). 
1699.     Dampier  discovers  his  strait. 
1768-71.     Cook  (1st  voyage)  discovers  New  Zealand  and  east  coast 

of  New  Holland  (Australia). 

1770.     Bruce  discovers  the  source  of  the  Blue  Nile. 
1776-79.     Cook  (3rd  voyage)  discovers  the  Sandwich  Islands. 
1785-88.     La  Perouse  explores  N.E.  coasts  of  Asia,  the  China  and 

Japan  Seas,  and  discovers  Saghalien. 


Important  Dates  xix 

1789-93.    Mackenzie  discovers  his  river  and  British  Columbia. 
1792.     Vancouver  explores  his  island. 

1796.  Mungo  Park  reaches  the  Niger. 

1797.  Bass  discovers  his  strait. 

1799-1804.     Humboldt  explores  South  America. 

1801-4.     Flinders  surveys  the  south  coast  of  Australia. 

181 9-22.    Franklin,  Back  and  Richardson  attempt  the  North- West 

Passage  by  land. 

1819.     Parry  discovers  Lancaster  Sound. 
1822.     Denham  and  Clapperton  discover  Lake  Tchad. 
1828-31.     Sturt  traces  the  Darling  and  Murray  Rivers. 
1829-33.     Ross  attempts  the  North- West  Passage,  and  discovers 

Boothia. 
1840-42.     Ross  explores  the  Antarctic,   and  discovers  Victoria 

Land,  and  the  volcanoes  Erebus  and  Terror  (named 

after  his  ships). 

1845-47.     Franklin's  last  voyage. 
1849-56.     Livingstone  explores  the  Zambesi,  and  discovers  the 

Victoria  Falls. 

1850-54.     M'Clure  succeeds  in  the  North- West  Passage. 
1858.     Burton  and  Speke  discover  Lake  Tanganyika,  and  Speke 

discovers  Victoria  Nyanza. 

1858-62.     Stuart  crosses  Australia  from  south  to  north. 
1858-64.     Livingstone  explores  Lake  Nyasa. 
1864.     Baker  discovers  Albert  Nyanza. 
1873.     Livingstone  discovers  Lake  Moero. 
1874-5.     Cameron  crosses  equatorial  Africa. 
1876-7.     Stanley  explores  the  Congo  River,  and  opens  up  Centra 

Africa. 

1878-79.     Nordenskiold  succeeds  in  the  North-East  Passage. 
1887-89.     Stanley's  expedition  to  rescue  Emin  Pasha.     He  dis- 
covers the  Pigmies,  and  the  Ruwenzori  (the  Mountains 

of  the  Moon). 
1893-97.     Nansen's  voyage  across  the  Arctic  Ocean  in  the  Fram. 

He  reaches  farthest  north  (86°  14'). 
1909.     Peary  reaches  the  North  Pole. 

1911.  Amundsen  reaches  the  South  Pole. 

1912.  Scott  reaches  the  South  Pole. 


Sir  Martin  Frobisher 


FROBISHER.     FIRST    VOYAGE    (1576) 
BY  GEORGE  BEST 

Our  General,  Captain  Frobisher,  being  persuaded  of 
a  new  and  nearer  passage  to  Cataya  than  by  Capo 
de  Buona  Speranga,  which  the  Portugals  yearly  use, 
began  first  with  himself  to  devise,  and  then  with  his 
friends  to  confer,  and  laid  a  plain  plot  unto  them  that 
that  voyage  was  not  only  possible  by  the  north-west, 
but  also  he  could  prove  easy  to  be  performed.  And 
further,  he  determined  and  resolved  with  himself  to  go 
make  full  proof  thereof,  and  to  accomplish  or  bring 
true  certificate  of  the  truth,  or  else  never  to  return 
again,  knowing  this  to  be  the  only  thing  of  the  world 
that  was  left  yet  undone,  whereby  a  notable  mind  might 
be  made  famous  and  fortunate.  But  although  his  will 
were  great  to  perform  this  notable  voyage,  whereof  he 
had  conceived  in  his  mind  a  great  hope  by  sundry  sure 
reasons  and  secret  intelligence,  which  here  for  sundry 
causes  I  leave  untouched ;  yet  he  wanted  altogether 
means  and  ability  to  set  forward,  and  perform  the 
same.  Long  time  he  conferred  with  his  private  friends 
of  these  secrets,  and  made  also  many  offers  for  the 
performing  of  the  same  in  effect  unto  sundry  merchants 
of  our  country,  above  fifteen  years  before  he  attempted 
the  same,  as  by  good  witness  shall  well  appear  (albeit 
some  evil  willers,  which  challenge  to  themselves  the  fruits 
of  other  men's  labours,  have  greatly  injured  him  in  the 

A.  p.  1 


2  Frobisher.    First  Voyage 

reports  of  the  same,  saying  that  they  have  been  the 
first  authors  of  that  action,  and  that  they  have  learned 
him  the  way,  which  themselves  as  yet  have,  never  gone). 
But  perceiving  that  hardly  he  was  hearkened  unto  of 
the  merchants,  which  never  regard  virtue  without  sure, 
certain,  and  present  gains,  he  repaired  to  the  Court 
(from  whence,  as  from  the  fountain  of  our  common 
wealth,  all  good  causes  have  their  chief  increase  and 
maintenance),  and  there  laid  open  to  many  great 
estates  and  learned  men  the  plot  and  sum  of  his  device. 
And  amongst  many  honourable  minds  which  favoured 
his  honest  and  commendable  enterprise,  he  was  specially 
bound  and  beholding  to  the  Right  Honourable  Ambrose 
Dudley,  Earl  of  Warwick,  whose  favourable  mind  and 
good  disposition  hath  always  been  ready  to  countenance 
and  advance  all  honest  actions  with  the  authors  and 
executers  of  the  same.  And  so  by  means  of  my  lord 
his  honourable  countenance  he  received  some  comfort 
of  his  cause,  and  by  little  and  little,  with  no  small  expense 
and  pain,  brought  his  cause  to  some  perfection,  and 
had  drawn  together  so  many  adventurers  and  such  sums 
of  money  as  might  well  defray  a  reasonable  charge  to 
furnish  himself  to  sea  withal. 

He  prepared  two  small  barks  of  twenty  and  five-and- 
twenty  ton  apiece,  wherein  he  intended  to  accomplish 
his  pretended  voyage.  Wherefore,  being  furnished  with 
the  foresaid  two  barks,  and  one  small  pinnace  of  ten  ton 
burthen,  having  therein  victuals  and  other  necessaries 
for  twelve  months'  provision,  he  departed  upon  the  said 
voyage  from  Blackwall,  the  15  of  June,  anno  Domini 
1576. 

One  of  the  barks  wherein  he  went  was  named 
the  Gabriel,  and  the  other  the  Michael ;  and  sailing 


Frobisher.     First  Voyage 


I 


1—2 


4  Frobisher.     First  Voyage 

north-west  from  England  upon  the  11  of  July  he  had 
sight  of  a  high  and  ragged  land,  which  he  judged  to 
be  Frisland  (whereof  some  authors  have  made  mention), 
but  durst  not  approach  the  same  by  reason  of  the  great 
store  of  ice  that  lay  alongst  the  coast,  and  the  great  mists 
that  troubled  them  not  a  little.  Not  far  from  thence 
he  lost  company  of  his  small  pinnace,  which  by  means 
of  the  great  storm  he  supposed  to  be  swallowed  up  of 
the  sea,  wherein  he  lost  only  four  men. 

Also  the  other  bark  named  the  Michael,  mistrusting 
the  matter,  conveyed  themselves  privily  away  from  him, 
and  returned  home,  with  great  report  that  he  was 
cast  away. 

The  worthy  captain,  notwithstanding  these  dis- 
comforts, although  his  mast  was  sprung,  and  his  top- 
mast blown  overboard  with  extreme  foul  weather, 
continued  his  course  towards  the  north-west,  knowing 
that  the  sea  at  length  must  needs  have  an  ending,  and 
that  some  land  should  have  a  beginning  that  way  ; 
and  determined,  therefore,  at  the  least  to  bring  true  proof 
what  land  and  sea  the  same  might  be  so  far  to  the 
north-westwards,  beyond  any  man  that  hath  heretofore 
discovered.  And  the  20  of  July  he  had  sight  of  a 
high  land  which  he  called  Queen  Elizabeth's  Foreland, 
after  her  Majesty's  name.  And  sailing  more  northerly 
alongst  that  coast,  he  descried  another  foreland  with 
a  great  gut,  bay,  or  passage,  dividing  as  it  were  two 
main  lands  or  continents  asunder.  There  he  met  with 
store  of  exceeding  great  ice  all  this  coast  along, 
and  coveting  still  to  continue  his  course  to  the  north- 
wards, was  always  by  contrary  wind  detained  over- 
thwart  these  straits,  and  could  not  get  beyond.  Within 
few  days  after,  he  perceived  the  ice  to  be  well  consumed 


Frobisher.     First  Voyage  5 

and  gone,  either  there  engulfed  in  by  some  swift  currents 
or  indrafts,  carried  more  to  the  southwards  of  the  same 
straits,  or  else  conveyed  some  other  way  :  wherefore 
he  determined  to  make  proof  of  this  place,  to  see  how 
far  that  gut  had  continuance,  and  whether  he  might 
carry  himself  through  the  same,  into  some  open  sea  on 
the  back  side,  whereof  he  conceived  no  small  hope,  and 
so  entered  the  same,  the  one  and  twentieth  of  July,  and 
passed  above  fifty  leagues  therein,  as  he  reported,  having 
upon  either  hand  a  great  main  or  continent.  And  that 
land  upon  his  right  hand  as  he  sailed  westward  he  judged 
to  be  the  continent  of  Asia,  and  there  to  be  divided 
from  the  firm  of  America,  which  lieth  upon  the  left 
hand  over  against  the  same.  . 

This  place  he  named  after  his  name,  Frobisher 's 
Straits,  like  as  Magellanus  at  the  south-west  end  of  the 
world,  having  discovered  the  passage  to  the  South  Sea, 
(where  America  is  divided  from  the  continent  of  that 
land,  which  lieth  under  the  South  Pole)  and  called  the 
same  straits,  Magellan's  Straits. 

After  he  had  passed  60  leagues  into  this  foresaid 
strait,  he  went  ashore,  and  found  signs  where  fire 
had  been  made. 

He  saw  mighty  deer  that  seemed  to  be  mankind, 
which  ran  at  him,  and  hardly  he  escaped  with  his  life 
in  a  narrow  way,  where  he  was  fain  to  use  defence 
and  policy  to  save  his  life. 

In  this  place  he  saw  and  perceived  sundry  tokens 
of  the  peoples  resorting  thither.  And  being  ashore  upon 
the  top  of  a  hill,  he  perceived  a  number  of  small  things 
fleeting  in  the  sea  afar  off,  which  he  supposed  to  be 
porpoises  or  seals,  or  some  kind  of  strange  fish  ;  but 
coming  nearer,  he  discovered  them  to  be  men  in  small 


6  Frobisher.     First  Voyage 

boats  made  of  leather.  And  before  he  could  descend 
down  from  the  hill,  certain  of  those  people  had  almost 
cut  off  his  boat  from  him,  having  stolen  secretly  behind 
the  rocks  for  that  purpose,  where  he  speedily  hasted 
to  his  boat,  and  bent  himself  to  his  halberd,  and 
narrowly  escaped  the  danger,  and  saved  his  boat. 
Afterwards  he  had  sundry  conferences  with  them,  and 
they  came  aboard  his  ship,  and  brought  him  salmon 
and  raw  flesh  and  fish,  and  greedily  devoured  the  same 
before  our  men's  faces.  And  to  shew  their  agility, 
they  tried  many  masteries  upon  the  ropes  of  the  ship, 
after  our  mariners'  fashion,  and  appeared  to  be  very 
strong  of  their  arms,  and  nimble  of  their  bodies.  They 
exchanged  coats  of  seals'  and  bears'  skins,  and  such  like, 
with  our  men  ;  and  received  bells,  looking-glasses,  and 
other  toys,  in  recompense  thereof  again.  After  great 
courtesy,  and  many  meetings,  our  mariners,  contrary 
to  their  captain's  direction,  began  more  easily  to  trust 
them  ;  and  five  of  our  men  going  ashore  were  by  them 
intercepted  with  their  boat,  and  were  never  since  heard 
of  to  this  day  again  ;  so  that  the  captain  being  destitute 
of  boat,  bark,  and  all  company,  had  scarcely  sufficient 
number  to  conduct  back  his  bark  again.  He  could  now 
neither  convey  himself  ashore  to  rescue  his  men  (if  he 
had  been  able)  for  want  of  a  boat ;  and  again  the  subtle 
traitors  were  so  wary,  as  they  would  after  that  never 
come  within  our  men's  danger.  The  captain,  notwith- 
standing, desirous  to  bring  some  token  from  thence  of 
his  being  there,  was  greatly  discontented  that  he  had 
not  before  apprehended  some  of  them  ;  and  therefore, 
to  deceive  the  deceivers,  he  wrought  a  pretty  policy. 
For  knowing  well  how  they  greatly  delighted  in  our  toys, 
and  specially  hi  bells,  he  rang  a  pretty  lowbell,  making 


Frobisher.     First  Voyage  7 

signs  that  he  would  give  him  the  same  that  would 
come  and  fetch  it.  And  because  they  would  not  come 
within  his  danger  for  fear,  he  flung  one  bell  unto  them, 
which  of  purpose  he  threw  short,  that  it  might  fall  into 
the  sea  and  be  lost.  And  to  make  them  more  greedy 
of  the  matter  he  rang  a  louder  bell,  so  that  in  the  end 
one  of  them  came  near  the  ship  side  to  receive  the 
bell.  Which  when  he  thought  to  take  at  the  captain's 
hand,  he  was  thereby  taken  himself ;  for  the  captain, 
being  readily  provided,  let  the  bell  fall,  and  caught  the 
man  fast,  and  plucked  him  with  main  force,  boat  and  all, 
into  his  bark  out  of  the  sea.  Whereupon,  when  he  found 
himself  in  captivity,  for  very  choler  and  disdain  he 
bit  his  tongue  in  twain  within  his  mouth  :  notwith- 
standing, he  died  not  thereof,  but  lived  until  he  came 
in  England,  and  then  he  died  of  cold  which  he  had  taken 
at  sea. 

Now  with  this  new  prey  (which  was  a  sufficient 
witness  of  the  captain's  far  and  tedious  travel  towards 
the  unknown  parts  of  the  world,  as  did  well  appear 
by  this  strange  infidel,  whose  like  was  never  seen,  read, 
nor  heard  of  before,  and  whose  language  was  neither 
known  nor  understood  of  any)  the  said  Captain  Fro- 
bisher returned  homeward,  and  arrived  in  England, 
in  Harwich,  the  2  of  October  following,  and  thence 
came  to  London  1576,  where  he  was  highly  com- 
mended of  all  men  for  his  great  and  notable  attempt, 
but  specially  famous  for  the  great  hope  he  brought 
of  the  passage  to  Cataya. 

And  it  is  especially  to  be  remembered  that  at  their 
first  arrival  in  those  parts  there  lay  so  great  store  of 
ice  all  the  coast  along,  so  thick  together,  that  hardly 
his  boat  could  pass  unto  the  shore.  At  length,  after 


8  Frobisher.     First  Voyage 

divers  attempts,  he  commanded  his  company,  if  by  any 
possible  means  they  could  get  ashore,  to  bring  him 
whatsoever  thing  they  could  first  find,  whether  it  were 
living  or  dead,  stock  or  stone,  in  token  of  Christian 
possession,  which  thereby  he  took  in  behalf  of  the 
Queen's  Most  Excellent  Majesty,  thinking  that  thereby 
he  might  justify  the  having  and  enjoying  of  the  same 
things  that  grew  in  these  unknown  parts. 

Some  of  his  company  brought  flowers,  some  green 
grass  ;  and  one  brought  a  piece  of  black  stone  much 
like  to  a  sea  coal  in  colour,  which  by  the  weight  seemed 
to  be  some  kind  of  metal  or  mineral.  This  was  a  thing 
of  no  account  in  the  judgment  of  the  captain  at  the 
first  sight ;  and  yet  for  novelty  it  was  kept  in  respect 
of  the  place  from  whence  it  came. 

After  his  arrival  in  London,  being  demanded  of 
sundry  his  friends  what  thing  he  had  brought  them  home 
out  of  that  country,  he  had  nothing  left  to  present  them 
withal,  but  a  piece  of  this  black  stone.  And  it  fortuned 
a  gentlewoman,  one  of  the  adventurers'  wives,  to  have 
a  piece  thereof,  which  by  chance  she  threw  and  burned 
in  the  fire,  so  long,  that  at  the  length  being  taken  forth, 
and  quenched  in  a  little  vinegar,  it  glistered  with  a 
bright  marquesite  of  gold.  Whereupon,  the  matter 
being  called  in  some  question,  it  was  brought  to  certain 
goldfiners  in  London,  to  make  assay  thereof,  who  gave 
out  that  it  held  gold,  and  that  very  richly  for  the 
quantity.  Afterwards  the  same  goldfiners  promised 
great  matters  thereof,  if  there  were  any  store  to  be  found, 
and  offered  themselves  to  adventure  for  the  searching 
of  those  parts  from  whence  the  same  was  brought. 
Some  that  had  great  hope  of  the  matter  sought  secretly 
to  have  a  lease  at  Her  Majesty's  hands  of  those  places, 


Frobisher.     First  Voyage  9 

whereby  to  enjoy  the  mass  of  so  great  a  public  profit 
unto  their  own  private  gains. 

In  conclusion,  the  hope  of  more  of  the  same  gold  ore 
to  be  found  kindled  a  greater  opinion  in  the  hearts  of 
many  to  advance  the  voyage  again.  Whereupon  pre- 
paration was  made  for  a  new  voyage  against  the  year 
following,  and  the  captain  more  specially  directed  by 
commission  for  the  searching  more  of  this  gold  ore  than 
for  the  searching  any  further  discovery  of  the  passage. 
And  being  well  accompanied  with  divers  resolute  and 
forward  gentlemen,  Her  Majesty  then  lying  at  the  Right 
Honourable  the  Lord  of  Warwick's  house  in  Essex,  he 
came  to  take  his  leave,  and  kissing  Her  Highness'  hands, 
with  gracious  countenance  and  comfortable  words 
departed  toward  his  charge. 


FROBISHER.     SECOND    VOYAGE 
BY  His  LIEUTENANT,  GEORGE  BEST 

A  true  report  of  such  things  as  happened  in  the 
second  voyage  of  Captain  Frobisher,  pretended  for 
the  discovery  of  a  new  passage  to  Cataya,  China, 
and  the  East  India,  by  the  north-west.  Ann.  Dom. 
1577. 

Being  furnished  with  one  tall  ship  of  Her  Majesty's, 
named  the  Aid,  of  200  ton,  and  two  other  small  barks, 
the  one  named  the  Gabriel,  the  other  the  Michael, 
about  30  ton  apiece,  being  fitly  appointed  with  men, 
munition,  victuals  and  all  things  necessary  for  the 
voyage,  the  said  Captain  Frobisher,  with  the  rest  of 
his  company,  came  aboard  his  ships  riding  at  Blackwall, 
intending  (with  God's  help)  to  take  the  first  wind  and 
tide  serving  him,  the  25  day  of  May,  in  the  year  of 
our  Lord  God  1577. 

The  names  of  such  gentlemen  as  attempted  this 
discovery,  and  the  number  of  soldiers  and  mariners  in 
each  ship,  as  followeth. 

Aboard  the  Aid,  being  Admiral,  were  the  number  of 
100  men  of  all  sorts,  whereof  30  or  more  were  gentlemen 
and  soldiers,  the  rest,  sufficient  and  tall  sailors. 

Aboard  the  Gabriel,  being  Vice-admiral,  were  in  all 
18  persons,  whereof  six  were  soldiers,  the  rest  mariners. 


Frobisher.     Second  Voyage 


11 


Aboard  the  Michael  were  16  persons,  whereof  five 
were  soldiers,  the  rest  mariners. 


Aboard  the 
Aid  was 


Aboard  the 
Aid  was 


f  General    of    the    whole    f 

company    for    her  -j  Martin  Frobisher 
Majesty 


His  Lieutenant 
His  Ensign 
Corporal  of  the  shot 


The  rest  of  the 
gentlemen 


fThe  Master 
I  The  Mate 
1  The  Pilot 
I  The  Master  Gunner 


Aboard  the      ( Captain 
Gabriel  was      ]  One  Gentleman 
I  The  Master 

Aboard  the     /"Captain 
Michael  was    -j  One  Gentleman 
I  The  Master 


George  Best 
Richard  Philpot 
Francis  Forder 

Henry  Carew 


Edmund  Stafford' 
John  Lee 
M.  Harvie 

<  Mathew  Kinersley 
Abraham  Lins 
Robert  Kinersley 
Francis  Brakenbury 

^William  Armshow 

[Christopher  Hall 
I  Charles  Jackman 
|  Andrew  Dyer 
[Richard  Cox 

f  Edward  Fenton 
J  William  -Tamfield 
[William  Smith 

(  Gilbert  Yorke 

-[  Thomas  Chamberlaine 

[  James  Beare 


On  Whitsunday,  being  the  26  of  May,  Anno  1577, 
early  in  the  morning,  we  weighed  anchor  at  Blackwall, 
and  fell  that  tide  down  to  Gravesend,  where  we  remained 
until  Monday  at  night. 

On  Monday  morning,  the  27  of  May,  aboard  the 
Aid,  we  received  all  the  communion  by  the  minister 
of  Gravesend,  and  prepared  us  as  good  Christians 
towards  God,  and  resolute  men  for  all  fortunes  ;  and 
towards  night  we  departed  to  Tilbury  Hope. 


12  Frobisher.     Second  Voyage 

Tuesday,  the  28  of  May,  about  nine  of  the  clock  at 
night,  we  arrived  at  Harwich,  in  Essex,  and  there  stayed 
for  the  taking  in  of  certain  victuals  until  Friday,  being 
the  30th  of  May,  during  which  time  came  letters  from 
the  Lords  of  the  Council,  straightly  commanding  our 
General  not  to  exceed  his  complement  and  number 
appointed  him,  which  was  one  hundred  and  twenty 
persons.  Whereupon  he  discharged  many  proper  men, 
which  with  unwilling  minds  departed. 

He  also  dismissed  all  his  condemned  men,  which  he 
thought  for  some  purposes  very  needful  for  the  voyage, 
and  towards  night  upon  Friday  the  one  and  thirtieth  of 
May  we  set  sail,  and  put  to  the  seas  again.  And  sailing 
northward  alongst  the  East  coasts  of  England  and 
Scotland,  the  7th  day  of  June  we  arrived  in  Saint 
Magnus  Sound,  in  Orkney  Islands,  called  in  Latin 
Orcades,  and  came  to  anchor  on  the  south  side  of  the 
bay  ;  and  this  place  is  reckoned  from  Blackwall,  where 
we  set  sail  first,  [cipher]  leagues. 

Here,  our  company  going  on  land,  the  inhabitants  of 
these  islands  began  to  flee  as  from  the  enemy.  Where- 
upon the  lieutenant  willed  every  man  to  stay  together, 
and  went  himself  unto  their  houses  to  declare  what 
we  were  and  the  cause  of  our  coming  thither.  Which 
being  understood,  after  their  poor  manner  they  friendly 
entreated  us,  and  brought  us  for  our  money  such  things 
as  they  had.  And  here  our  goldfiners  found  a  mine  of 
silver. 

Orkney  is  the  principal  of  the  Isles  of  the  Orcades, 
and  standeth  in  the  latitude  of  fifty-nine  degrees  and 
a  half.  The  country  is  much  subject  to  cold,  answer- 
able for  such  a  climate,  and  yet  yieldeth  some  fruits, 
and  sufficient  maintenance  for  the  people  contented  so 


Frobisher.     Second  Voyage  13 

poorly  to  live.  There  is  plenty  enough  of  poultry,  store 
of  eggs,  fish,  and  fowl.  For  their  bread  they  have  oaten 
cakes,  and  their  drink  is  ewes'  milk,  and  in  some  parts 
ale.  Their  houses  are  but  poor  without  and  sluttish 
enough  within,  and  the  people  in  nature  thereunto 
agreeable.  For  their  fire  they  burn  heath  and  turf,  the 
country  in  most  parts  being  void  of  wood.  They  have 
great  want  of  leather,  and  desire  our  old  shoes,  apparel, 
and  old  ropes  (before  money)  for  their  victuals,  and  yet 
are  they  not  ignorant  of  the  value  of  our  coin.  The 
chief  town  is  called  Kyrway.  In  this  island  hath  been 
sometime  an  abbey  or  a  religious  house,  called  Saint 
Magnus,  being  on  the  west  side  of  the  isle,  whereof  this 
sound  beareth  name,  through  which  we  passed.  Their 
governor  or  chief  lord  is  called  the  Lord  Robert  Steward, 
who  at  our  being  there,  as  we  understood,  was  in 
durance  at  Edinburgh,  by  the  Regent's  commandment 
of  Scotland. 

After  we  had  provided  us  here  of  matter  sufficient 
for  our  voyage,  the  8  of  June  we  set  sail  again,  and 
passing  through  Saint  Magnus  Sound,  having  a  merry 
wind  by  night,  came  clear  and  lost  sight  of  all  the  land, 
and  keeping  our  course  west -north- west  by  the  space 
of  two  days,  the  wind  shifted  upon  us,  so  that  we  lay 
in  traverse  on  the  seas,  with  contrary  winds,  making 
good  (as  near  as  we  could)  our  course  to  the  westward, 
and  sometime  to  the  northward,  as  the  wind  shifted. 
And  hereabout  we  met  with  three  sail  of  English 
fishermen  from  Iceland,  bound  homeward,  by  whom 
we  wrote  our  letters  unto  our  friends  in  England. 
We  traversed  these  seas  by  the  space  of  26  days 
without  sight  of  any  land,  and  met  with  much  drift- 
wood, and  whole  bodies  of  trees.  We  saw  many 


14  Frobisher.    Second  Voyage 

monstrous  fishes  and  strange  fowls,  which  seemed  to  live 
only  by  the  sea,  being  there  so  far  distant  from  any 
land.  At  length  God  favoured  us  with  more  prosperous 
winds,  and  after  we  had  sailed  four  days  with  good 
wind  in  the  poop,  the  4th  of  July,  the  Michael, 
being  foremost  ahead,  shot  off  a  piece  of  ordnance, 
and  struck  all  her  sails,  supposing  that  they  descried 
land,  which  by  reason  of  the  thick  mists  they  could 
not  make  perfect.  Howbeit,  as  well  our  account,  as 
also  the  great  alteration  of  the  water,  which  became 
more  black  and  smooth,  did  plainly  declare  we  were 
not  far  off  the  coast.  Our  General  sent  his  master 
aboard  the  Michael  (who  had  been  with  him  the  year 
before)  to  bear  in  with  the  place  to  make  proof  thereof  ; 
who  descried  not  the  land  perfect,  but  saw  sundry  huge 
islands  of  ice,  which  we  deemed  to  be  not  past  twelve 
leagues  from  the  shore,  for  about  ten  of  the  clock  at  night, 
being  the  fourth  of  July,  the  weather  being  more  clear, 
we  made  the  land  perfect,  and  knew  it  to  be  Frisland. 
And  the  height  being  taken  here,  we  found  ourselves 
to  be  in  the  latitude  of  sixty  degrees  and  a  half,  and 
were  fallen  with  the  southermost  part  of  this  land. 
Between  Orkney  and  Frisland  are  reckoned  [cipher] 
leagues. 

This  Frisland  sheweth  a  ragged  and  high  land, 
having  the  mountains  almost  covered  over  with  snow, 
alongst  the  coast  full  of  drift  ice,  and  seemeth  almost 
inaccessible ;  and  is  thought  to  be  an  island  in  bigness 
not  inferior  to  England,  and  is  called  of  some  authors, 
West  Frisland,  I  think  because  it  lieth  more  west  than 
any  part  of  Europe.  It  extendeth  in  latitude  to  the 
northward  very  far  as  seemed  to  us,  and  appeareth  by 
a  description  set  out  by  two  brethren  Venetians, 


Frobisher.     Second  Voyage  15 

Nicholas  and  Antonius  Zeni,  who,  being  driven  off  from 
Ireland  with  a  violent  tempest,  made  shipwreck  here, 
and  were  the  first  known  Christians  that  discovered  this 
land,  about  200  years  sithence ;  and  they  have  in  their 
sea-cards  set  out  every  part  thereof,  and  described  the 
condition  of  the  inhabitants,  declaring  them  to  be  as 
civil  and  religious  people  as  we.  And  for  so  much  of 
this  land  as  we  have  sailed  alongst,  comparing  their  card 
with  the  coast,  we  find  it  very  agreeable.  This  coast 
seemeth  to  have  good  fishing :  for  we,  lying  becalmed, 
let  fall  a  hook  without  any  bait,  and  presently  caught 
a  great  fish  called  a  halibut,  which  served  the  whole 
company  for  a  day's  meat,  and  is  dangerous  meat  for 
surfeiting.  And  sounding  about  five  leagues  off  from 
the  shore,  our  lead  brought  up  in  the  tallow  a  kind  of 
coral,  almost  white,  and  small  stones  as  bright  as 
crystal :  and  it  is  not  to  be  doubted  but  that  this  land 
may  be  found  very  rich  and  beneficial  if  it  were  tho- 
roughly discovered,  although  we  saw  no  creature  there 
but  little  birds.  It  is  a  marvellous  thing  to  behold  of 
what  great  bigness  and  depth  some  islands  of  ice  be 
here,  some  seventy,  some  eighty  fathom  under  water, 
besides  that  which  is  above,  seeming  islands  more  than 
half  a  mile  in  circuit.  All  these  ice  are  in  taste  fresh,  and 
seem  to  be  bred  in  the  sounds  thereabouts,  or  in  some 
land  near  the  pole,  and  with  the  wind  and  tides  are 
driven  alongst  the  coasts.  We  found  none  of  these 
islands  of  ice  salt  in  taste,  whereby  it  appeareth  that 
they  were  not  congealed  of  the  ocean  sea-water,  which 
is  always  salt,  but  of  some  standing  or  little -moving 
lakes,  or  great  fresh  waters  near  the  shore,  caused 
either  by  melted  snow  from  tops  of  mountains,  or  by 
continual  access  of  fresh  rivers  from  the  land ;  and 


16  Frobisher.    Second  Voyage 

intermingling  with  the  sea- water,  bearing  yet  the 
dominion,  by  the  force  of  extreme  frost  may  cause 
some  part  of  salt  water  to  freeze  so  with  it,  and  so  seem 
a  little  brackish ;  but  otherwise  the  main  sea  freezeth 
not,  and  therefore  there  is  no  Mare  Glaciale,  or  Frozen 
Sea,  as  the  opinion  hitherto  hath  been.  Our  General 
proved  landing  here  twice,  but  by  the  sudden  fall  of  mists 
(whereunto  this  coast  is  much  subject)  he  was  like  to 
lose  sight  of  his  ships,  and  being  greatly  endangered 
with  the  driving  ice  alongst  the  coast,  was  forced  aboard, 
and  fain  to  surcease  his  pretence  till  a  better  opportunity 
might  serve.  And  having  spent  four  days  and  nights 
sailing  alongst  this  land,  finding  the  coast  subject  to 
such  bitter  cold  and  continual  mists,  he  determined 
to  spend  no  more  time  therein,  but  to  bear  out  his 
course  towards  the  straits  called  Frobisher's  Straits, 
after  the  General's  name,  who  being  the  first  that  ever 
passed  beyond  58  degrees  to  the  northwards,  for  any- 
thing that  hath  been  yet  known  of  certainty,  of  New- 
foundland, otherwise  called  the  continent  or  firm  land  of 
America,  discovered  the  said  Straits  this  last  year  1576. 
Between  Frisland  and  the  Straits  we  had  one  great 
storm,  wherein  the  Michael  was  somewhat  in  danger, 
having  her  steerage  broken,  and  her  top -masts  blown 
overboard ;  and  being  not  past  50  leagues  short  of  the 
Straits  by  our  account,  we  struck  sail  and  lay  ahull, 
fearing  the  continuance  of  the  storm,  the  wind  being 
at  the  north-east,  and  having  lost  company  of  the  barks 
in  that  flaw  of  wind,  we  happily  met  again  the  17th  day 
of  July,  having  the  evening  before  seen  divers  islands 
of  fleeting  ice,  which  gave  an  argument  that  we  were 
not  far  from  land.  Our  General,  in  the  morning,  from 
the  maintop  (the  weather  being  reasonable  clear) 


Frobisher.     Second  Voyage  17 

descried  land ;  but  to  be  better  assured  he  sent  the  two 
barks  two  contrary  courses,  whereby  they  might  descry 
either  the  south  or  north  foreland,  the  Aid  lying  off 
and  on  at  sea,  with  a  small  sail,  by  an  island  of  ice, 
which  was  the  mark  for  us  to  meet  together  again. 
And  about  noon,  the  weather  being  more  clear,  we 
made  the  north  foreland  perfect,  which  otherwise  is 
called  Hall's  Island,  and  also  the  small  island  bearing 
the  name  of  the  said  Hall,  whence  the  ore  was  taken 
up  which  was  brought  into  England  this  last  year  1576, 
the  said  Hall  being  present  at  the  finding  and  taking 
up  thereof,  who  was  then  master  in  the  Gabriel  with 
Captain  Frobisher.  At  our  arrival  here,  all  the  seas 
about  this  coast  were  so  covered  over  with  huge 
quantity  of  great  ice,  that  we  thought  these  places 
might  only  deserve  the  name  of  Mare  Glaciale,  and  be 
called  the  Icy  Sea. 

This  north  foreland  is  thought  to  be  divided  from 
the  continent  of  the  northerland,  by  a  little  sound  called 
Hall's  Sound,  which  maketh  it  an  island,  and  is  thought 
little  less  than  the  Isle  of  Wight,  and  is  the  first  entrance 
of  the  straits  upon  the  norther  side,  and  standeth  in  the 
latitude  of  sixty-two  degrees  and  fifty  minutes,  and  is 
reckoned  from  Frisland  [cipher]  leagues.  God  having 
blessed  us  with  so  happy  a  land-fall,  we  bare  into  the 
straits,  which  run  in  next  hand,  and  somewhat  further 
up  to  the  northward,  and  came  as  near  the  shore  as  we 
might  for  the  ice;  and  upon  the  18th  day  of  July,  our 
General,  taking  the  goldfiners  with  him,  attempted  to 
go  on  shore  with  a  small  rowing  pinnace,  upon  the 
small  island  where  the  ore  was  taken  up,  to  prove 
whether  there  were  any  store  thereof  to  be  found, 
but  he  could  not  get  in  all  that  island  a  piece  so  big 


A.  p. 


18  Frobisher.     Second  Voyage 

as  a  walnut,  where  the  first  was  found.  But  our 
men,  which  sought  the  other  islands  thereabouts,  found 
them  all  to  have  good  store  of  the  ore  :  whereupon  our 
General  with  these  good  tidings  returned  aboard  about 
ten  of  the  clock  at  night,  and  was  joyfully  welcomed 
of  the  company  with  a  volley  of  shot.  He  brought 
eggs,  fowls,  and  a  young  seal  aboard,  which  the  company 
had  killed  ashore ;  and  having  found  upon  those  islands 
gins  set  to  catch  fowl,  and  sticks  new  cut,  with  other 
things,  he  well  perceived  that  not  long  before  some  of 
the  country  people  had  resorted  thither. 

Haying  therefore  found  those  tokens  of  the  people's 
access  in  those  parts,  and  being  in  his  first  voyage 
well  acquainted  with  their  subtle  and  cruel  disposition, 
he  provided  well  for  his  better  safety;  and  on  Friday 
the  19th  of  July,  in  the  morning  early,  with  his  best 
company  of  gentlemen  and  soldiers,  to  the  number  of 
forty  persons,  went  on  shore,  as  well  to  discover  the  in- 
land and  habitation  of  the  people,  as  also  to  find  out  some 
fit  harbour  for  our  ships.  And  passing  towards  the 
shore  with  no  small  difficulty  by  reason  of  the  abun- 
dance of  ice,  which  lay  alongst  the  coast  so  thick 
together  that  hardly  any  passage  through  them  might 
be  discovered,  we  arrived  at  length  upon  the  main  of 
Hall's  greater  island,  and  found  there  also,  as  well  as 
in  the  other  small  islands,  good  store  of  the  ore.  And 
leaving  his  boats  here  with  sufficient  guard,  we  passed 
up  into  the  country  about  two  English  miles,  and 
recovered  the  top  of  a  high  hill;  on  the  top  whereof 
our  men  made  a  column  or  cross  of  stones  heaped  up 
of  a  good  height  together  in  good  sort,  and  solemnly 
sounded  a  trumpet,  and  said  certain  prayers  kneeling 
about  the  ensign,  and  honoured  the  place  by  the  name 


Frobisher.     Second  Voyage  19 

of  Mount  Warwick,  in  remembrance  of  the  Right 
Honourable  the  Lord  Ambrose  Dudley,  Earl  of  Warwick, 
whose  noble  mind  and  good  countenance  in  this,  as  in  all 
other  good  actions,  gave  great  encouragement  and  good 
furtherance.  This  done,  we  retired  our  companies,  not 
seeing  anything  here  worth  further  discovery,  the 
country  seeming  barren  and  full  of  ragged  mountains, 
and  in  most  parts  covered  with  snow. 

And  thus  marching  towards  our  boats,  we  espied 
certain  of  the  country  people  on  the  top  of  Mount 
Warwick  with  a  flag  wafting  us  back  again  and  making 
great  noise,  with  cries  like  the  mowing  of  bulls,  seeming 
greatly  desirous  of  conference  with  us.    Whereupon  the 
General,  being  therewith  better  acquainted,  answered 
them  again  with  the  like  cries,  whereat,  and  with  the 
noise  of  our  trumpets,  they  seemed  greatly  to  rejoice, 
skipping,  laughing  and  dancing  for  joy.     And  hereupon 
we  made  signs  unto  them,   holding  up  two  fingers, 
commanding  two  of  our  men  to  go  apart  from  our 
companies,  whereby  they  might  do  the  like.     So  that 
forthwith  two  of  our  men  and  two  of  theirs  met  together 
a   good   space   from   company,  neither   party   having 
their  weapons  about  them.     Our  men  gave  them  pins 
and  points  and  such  trifles  as  they  had.     And  they 
likewise  bestowed  on  our  men  two  bow  cases  and  such 
things  as  they  had.     They  earnestly  desired  our  men 
to  go  up  into  their  country,  and  our  men  offered  them 
like  kindness  aboard  our  ships,  but  neither  part  (as  it 
seemed)    admitted    or   trusted    the    other's    courtesy. 
Their  manner  of  traffic  is  thus  :  they  do  use  to  lay  down 
of  their  merchandise  upon  the  ground,  so  much  as  they 
mean   to  part  withal,  and  so  looking  that  the  other 
party  with  whom  they  make  trade  should  do  the  like, 

2—2 


20  Frobisher.     Second  Voyage 

they  themselves  do  depart.  And  then,  if  they  do  like 
of  their  mart,  they  come  again,  and  take  in  exchange 
the  other's  merchandise  :  otherwise,  if  they  like  not,  they 
take  their  own  and  depart.  The  day  being  thus  well 
near  spent,  in  haste  we  retired  our  companies  into  our 
boats  again,  minding  forthwith  to  search  alongst  the 
coast  for  some  harbour  fit  for  our  ships.  For  the  present 
necessity  thereof  was  much,  considering  that  all  this 
while  they  lay  off  and  on  between  the  two  lands,  being 
continually  subject  as  well  to  great  danger  of  fleeting 
ice,  which  environed  them,  as  to  the  sudden  flaws  which 
the  coast  seemeth  much  subject  unto.  But  when  the 
people  perceived  our  departure,  with  great  tokens  of 
affection  they  earnestly  called  us  back  again,  following 
us  almost  to  our  boats.  Whereupon  our  General,  taking 
his  master  with  him,  who  was  best  acquainted  with  their 
manners,  went  apart  unto  two  of  them,  meaning,  if  they 
could  lay  sure  hold  upon  them,  forcibly  to  bring  them 
aboard,  with  intent  to  bestow  certain  toys  and  apparel 
upon  the  one,  and  so  to  dismiss  him  with  all  arguments 
of  courtesy,  and  retain  the  other  for  an  interpreter. 
The  General  and  his  master  being  met  with  their  two 
companions  together,  after  they  had  exchanged  certain 
things  the  one  with  the  other,  one  of  the  savages,  for 
lack  of  better  merchandise,  cut  off  the  tail  of  his  coat 
(which  is  a  chief  ornament  among  them)  and  gave  it 
unto  our  General  for  a  present.  But  he  presently,  upon 
a  watchword  given  with  his  master,  suddenly  laid  hold 
upon  the  two  savages.  But  the  ground  underfoot  being 
slippery  with  the  snow  on  the  side  of  the  hill,  their 
handfast  failed,  and  their  prey  escaping  ran  away  and 
lightly  recovered  their  bow  and  arrows,  which  they  had 
hid  not  far  from  them  behind  the  rocks.  And  being 


Frobisher.     Second  Voyage  21 

only  two  savages  in  sight,  they  so  fiercely,  desperately, 
and  with  such  fury  assaulted  and  pursued  our  General 
and  his  master,  being  altogether  unarmed,  and  not 
mistrusting  their  subtlety,  that  they  chased  them  to 
their  boats,  and  hurt  the  General  in  the  buttock  with  an 
arrow ;  who  the  rather  speedily  fled  back,  because  they 
suspected  a  greater  number  behind  the  rocks.  Our 
soldiers  (which  were  commanded  before  to  keep  their 
boats)  perceiving  the  danger,  and  hearing  our  men 
calling  for  shot,  came  speedily  to  rescue,  thinking  there 
had  been  a  greater  number.  But  when  the  savages 
heard  the  shot  of  one  of  our  calivers  (and  yet  having 
first  bestowed  their  arrows)  they  ran  away,  our  men 
speedily  following  them.  But  a  servant  of  my  Lord  of 
Warwick,  called  Nicholas  Conger,  a  good  footman,  and 
uncumbered  with  any  furniture,  having  only  a  dagger 
at  his  back,  overtook  one  of  them,  and  being  a  Cornish- 
man  and  a  good  wrestler,  showed  his  companion  such 
a  Cornish  trick,  that  he  made  his  sides  ache  against  the 
ground  for  a  month  after.  And  so  being  stayed,  he 
was  taken  alive  and  brought  away,  but  the  other 
escaped.  Thus  with  their  strange  and  new  prey  our 
men  repaired  to  their  boats,  and  passed  from  the  main 
to  a  small  island  of  a  mile  compass,  where  they  resolved 
to  tarry  all  night ;  for  even  now  a  sudden  storm  was 
grown  so  great  at  sea,  that  by  no  means  they  could 
recover  their  ships.  And  here  every  man  refreshed 
himself  with  a  small  portion  of  victuals,  which  was  laid 
into  the  boats  for  their  dinners,  having  neither  eat  nor 
drunk  all  the  day  before.  But  because  they  knew  not 
how  long  the  storm  might  last,  nor  how  far  off  the  ships 
might  be  put  to  sea,  nor  whether  they  should  ever 
recover  them  again  or  not,  they  made  great  spare  of 


22  Frobisher.     Second  Voyage 

their  victuals,  as  it  greatly  behoved  them.  For  they 
knew  full  well  that  the  best  cheer  the  country  could 
yield  them  was  rocks  and  stones,  a  hard  food  to  live 
withal,  and  the  people  more  ready  to  eat  them  than 
to  give  them  wherewithal  to  eat.  And  thus  keeping 
very  good  watch  and  ward,  they  lay  there  all  night 
upon  hard  cliffs  of  snow  and  ice,  both  wet,  cold,  and 
comfortless. 

These  things  thus  happening  with  the  company  on 
land,  the  danger  of  the  ships  at  sea  was  no  less  perilous. 
For  within  one  hour  after  the  General's  departing  in 
the  morning,  by  negligence  of  the  cook  in  over-heating, 
and  the  workman  in  making  the  chimney,  the  Aid  was 
set  on  fire,  and  had  been  the  confusion  of  the  whole  if, 
by  chance  a  boy  espying  it,  it  had  not  been  speedily 
with  great  labour  and  God's  help  well  extinguished. 

This  day  also  were  divers  storms  and  flaws,  and 
by  nine  of  the  clock  at  night  the  storm  was  grown 
so  great,  and  continued  such  until  the  morning,  that  it 
put  our  ships  at  sea  in  no  small  peril.  But  God  being 
our  best  steersman,  and  by  the  industry  of  Charles 
Jackman  and  Andrew  Dyer,  the  master's  mates,  both 
very  expert  mariners,  and  Richard  Cox,  the  master 
gunner,  with  other  very  careful  sailors,  then  within 
board,  and  also  by  the  help  of  the  clear  nights,  which 
are  without  darkness,  we  did  happily  avoid  those  pre- 
sent dangers.  Whereat  since  we  have  more  marvelled 
than  in  the  present  danger  feared ;  for  that  every  man 
within  board,  both  better  and  worse,  had  enough  to 
do  with  his  hands  to  haul  ropes,  and  with  his  eyes 
to  look  out  for  danger.  But  the  next  morning,  being 
the  20  of  July5  as  God  would,  the  storm  ceased; 
and  the  General,  espying  the  ships,  with  his  new  captive 


Frobisher.     Second  Voyage  23 

and  whole  company  came  happily  aboard,  and  reported 
what  had  passed  on  shore.  Whereupon  all  together 
upon  our  knees  we  gave  God  humble  and  hearty  thanks, 
for  that  it  had  pleased  Him  from  so  speedy  peril 
to  send  us  such  speedy  deliverance.  And  so  from  this 
northern  shore  we  struck  over  towards  the  souther- 
land. 

The  one  and  twentieth  of  July,  we  discovered  a 
bay  which  ran  into  the  land,  that  seemed  a  likely 
harbour  for  our  ships.  Wherefore  our  General  rowed 
thither  with  his  boats,  to  make  proof  thereof,  and 
with  his  goldfmers  to  search  for  ore,  having  never 
assayed  anything  on  the  south  shore  as  yet.  And 
the  first  small  island,  which  we  landed  upon,  here 
all  the  sands  and  clifts  did  so  glister  and  had  so  bright 
a  marquesite,  that  it  seemed  all  to  be  gold ;  but  upon 
trial  made,  it  proved  no  better  than  blacklead,  and 
verified  the  proverb  :  All  is  not  gold  that  glistereth. 

Upon  the  two  and  twentieth  of  July  we  bare  into 
the  said  sound,  and  came  to  anchor  a  reasonable  breadth 
off  the  shore.  And  this  was  named  Jackman's  Sound, 
after  the  name  of  the  master's  mate,  who  had  first 
liking  unto  the  place. 

Upon  a  small  island,  within  this  sound,  called 
Smith's  Island  (because  he  first  set  up  his  forge  there) 
was  found  a  mine  of  silver,  but  was  not  won  out  of 
the  rocks  without  great  labour.  Here  our  goldfiners 
made  say  of  such  ore  as  they  found  upon  the  norther- 
land,  and  found  four  sorts  thereof  to  hold  gold  in  good 
quantity.  Upon  another  small  island  here  was  also 
found  a  great  dead  fish,  which,  as  it  should  seem, 
had  been  embayed  with  ice,  and  was  in  proportion 
round  like  to  a  porpoise,  being  about  twelve  foot  long, 


24  Frobisher.     Second  Voyage 

and  in  bigness  answerable,  having  a  horn  of  two  yards 
long  growing  out  of  the  snout  or  nostrils.  This  horn 
is  wreathed  and  straight,  like  in  fashion  to  a  taper 
made  of  wax,  and  may  truly  be  thought  to  be  the 
sea-unicorn.  This  horn  is  to  be  seen  and  reserved  as 
a  jewel  by  the  Queen's  Majesty's  commandment, 
in  her  wardrobe  of  robes. 

Tuesday,  the  three  and  twentieth  of  July,  our 
General  with  his  best  company  of  gentlemen,  soldiers 
and  sailors,  to  the  number  of  seventy  persons  in 
all,  marched  with  ensign  displayed  upon  the  continent 
of  the  southerland  (the  supposed  continent  of  America). 
Where,  commanding  a  trumpet  to  sound  a  call  for 
every  man  to  repair  to  the  ensign,  he  declared  to  the 
whole  company  how  much  the  cause  imported  for 
the  service  of  Her  Majesty,  our  country,  our  credits, 
and  the  safety  of  our  own  lives,  and  therefore  required 
every  man  to  be  conformable  to  order,  and  to  be 
directed  by  those  he  should  assign.  And  he  appointed 
for  leaders,  Captain  Fenton,  Captain  Yorke,  and 
his  Lieutenant,  George  Best.  Which  done,  we  cast 
ourselves  into  a  ring,  and  all  together  upon  our  knees, 
gave  God  humble  thanks  for  that  it  had  pleased 
Him  of  His  great  goodness  to  preserve  us  from  such 
imminent  dangers ;  beseeching  likewise  the  assistance 
of  His  Holy  Spirit,  so  to  deliver  us  in  safety  into  our 
country,  whereby  the  light  and  truth  of  these  secrets 
being  known,  it  might  redound  to  the  more  honour 
of  His  Holy  Name,  and  consequently  to  the  advance- 
ment of  our  common  wealth.  And  so,  in  as  good  sort 
as  the  place  suffered,  we  marched  towards  the  tops  of 
the  mountains,  which  were  no  less  painful  in  climbing 
than  dangerous  in  descending,  by  reason  of  their 


Frobisher.     Second  Voyage  25 

steepness  and  ice.  And  having  passed  about  five  miles, 
by  such  unwieldy  ways,  we  returned  unto  our  ships 
without  sight  of  any  people,  or  likelihood  of  habitation. 
Here  divers  of  the  gentlemen  desired  our  General  to 
suffer  them,  to  the  number  of  twenty  or  thirty  persons, 
to  march  up  thirty  or  forty  leagues  in  the  country, 
to  the  end  they  might  discover  the  inland,  and  do 
some  acceptable  service  for  their  country.  But  he, 
not  contented  with  the  matter  he  sought  for,  and 
well  considering  the  short  time  he  had  in  hand,  and 
the  greedy  desire  our  country  hath  to  a  present  savour 
and  return  of  gain,  bent  his  whole  endeavour  only 
to  find  a  mine  to  freight  his  ships,  and  to  leave  the 
rest  (by  God's  help)  hereafter  to  be  well  accomplished. 
And  therefore  the  twenty-six  of  July  he  departed 
over  to  the  northland,  with  the  two  barks,  leaving  the 
Aid  riding  in  Jackman's  Sound,  and  meant  (after 
he  had  found  convenient  harbour,  and  freight  there 
for  his  ships)  to  discover  further  for  the  passage. 
The  barks  came  the  same  night  to  anchor  in  a  sound 
upon  the  northerland,  where  the  tides  did  run  so 
swift,  and  the  place  was  so  subject  to  indrafts  of  ice, 
that  by  reason  thereof  they  were  greatly  endangered ; 
and  having  found  a  very  rich  mine,  as  they  supposed, 
and  got  almost  twenty  ton  of  ore  together,  upon  the 
28  of  July  the  ice  came  driving  into  the  sound  where 
the  barks  rode,  in  such  sort  that  they  were  there- 
with greatly  distressed.  And  the  Gabriel,  riding  astern 
the  Michael,  had  her  cable  galled  asunder  in  the  hawse 
with  a  piece  of  driving  ice,  .and  lost  another  anchor ; 
and  having  but  one  cable  and  anchor  left,  for  she 
had  lost  two  before,  and  the  ice  still  driving  upon  her, 
she  was  (by  God's  help)  well  fenced  from  the  danger 


26  Frobisher.     Second  Voyage 

of  the  rest,  by  one  great  island  of  ice,  which  came 
aground  hard  ahead  of  her.  Which  if  it  had  not  so 
chanced,  I  think  surely  she  had  been  cast  upon  the 
rocks  with  the  ice.  The  Michael  moored  anchor 
upon  this  great  ice,  and  rode  under  the  lee  thereof  : 
but  about  midnight,  by  the  weight  of  itself,  and 
the  setting  of  the  tides,  the  ice  brake  within  half  the 
bark's  length,  and  made  unto  the  company  within 
board  a  sudden  and  fearful  noise.  The  next  flood 
toward  the  morning  we  weighed  anchor,  and  went 
further  up  the  straits ;  and  leaving  our  ore  behind 
us  which  we  had  digged,  for  haste,  left  the  place,  by  the 
name  of  Beare's  Sound,  after  the  master's  name  of 
the  Michael,  and  named  the  island  Leicester's  Island. 
In  one  of  the  small  islands  here  we  found  a  tomb, 
wherein  the  bones  of  a  dead  man  lay  together,  and 
our  savage  captive  being  with  us,  and  being  demanded 
by  signs  whether  his  countrymen  had  not  slain  this 
man  and  eat  his  flesh  so  from  the  bones,  he  made 
signs  to  the  contrary,  and  that  he  was  slain  with  wolves 
and  wild  beasts.  Here  also  was  found  hid  under 
stones  good  store  of  fish,  and  sundry  other  things 
of  the  inhabitants  ;  >as  sleds,  bridles,  kettles  of  fish 
skins,  knives  of  bone,  and  such  other  like.  And  our 
savage  declared  unto  us  the  use  of  all  those  things. 
And  taking  in  his  hand  one  of  those  country  bridles, 
he  caught  one  of  our  dogs  and  hampered  him  handsomely 
therein,  as  we  do  our  horses,  and  with  a  whip  in  his  hand, 
he  taught  the  dog  to  draw  in  a  sled  as  we  do  horses 
in  a  coach,  setting  himself  thereupon  like  a  guide  : 
so  that  we  might  see  they  use  dogs  for  that  purpose 
that  we  do  our  horses.  And  we  found  since  by  ex- 
perience, that  the  lesser  sort  of  dogs  they  feed  fat, 


Frobisher.     Second  Voyage  27 

and  keep  them  as  domestical  cattle  in  their  tents 
for  their  eating,  and  the  greater  sort  serve  for  the 
use  of  drawing  their  sleds. 

The  twenty-ninth  of  July,  about  five  leagues 
from  Beare's  Sound,  we  discovered  a  bay  which,  being 
fenced  on  each  side  with  small  islands  lying  off  the 
main,  which  break  the  force  of  the  tides,  and  make 
the  place  free  from  any  indrafts  of  ice,  did  prove  a 
very  fit  harbour  for  our  ships;  where  we  came  to 
anchor  under  a  small  island,  which  now  together 
with  the  sound  is  called  by  the  name  of  that  right 
honourable  and  virtuous  lady,  Anne  Countess  of 
Warwick.  And  this  is  the  furthest  place  that  this 
year  we  have  entered  up  within  the  straits,  and  is 
reckoned  from  the  Cape  of  the  Queen's  Foreland, 
which  is  the  entrance  of  the  straits,  not  above  30 
leagues.  Upon  this  island  was  found  good  store  of 
the  ore,  which  in  the  washing  held  gold  to  our  thinking 
plainly  to  be  seen  :  whereupon  it  was  thought  best 
rather  to  load  here,  where  there  was  store  and  indifferent 
good,  than  to  seek  further  for  better,  and  spend  time 
with  jeopardy.  '  And  therefore  our  General  setting 
the  miners  to  work,  and  shewing  first  a  good  precedent 
of  a  painful  labourer  and  a  good  captain  in  himself, 
gave  good  examples  for  others  to  follow  him  :  where- 
upon every  man,  both  better  and  worse,  with  their 
best  endeavours  willingly  laid  to  their  helping  hands. 
And  the  next  day,  being  the  thirtieth  of  July,  the 
Michael  was  sent  over  to  Jackman's  Sound,  for  the 
Aid  -and  the  whole  company  to  come  thither.  Upon 
the  mainland,  over  against  the  Countess's  Island, 
we  discovered  and  beheld  to  our  great  marvel  the 
poor  caves  and  houses  of  those  country  people,  which 


28  Frobisher.     Second  Voyage 

serve  them  (as  it  should  seem)  for  their  winter  dwellings, 
and  are  made  two  fathom  under  ground,  in  compass 
round,  like  to  an  oven,  being  joined  fast  one  by  another, 
having  holes  like  to  a  fox  or  cony  bury,  to  keep 
and  come  together.  They  under-trenched  these  places 
with  gutters,  so  that  the  water,  falling  from  the  hills 
above  them,  may  slide  away  without  their  annoyance  : 
and  are  seated  commonly  in  the  foot  of  a  hill,  to 
shield  them  better  from  the  cold  winds,  having  their 
door  and  entrance  ever  open  towards  the  south.  From 
the  ground  upward  they  build  with  whales'  bones, 
for  lack  of  timber,  which  bending  one  over  another, 
are  handsomely  compacted  in  the  top  together,  and 
are  covered  over  with  sealskins,  which,  instead  of 
tiles,  fence  them  from  the  rain.  In  which  house 
they  have  only  one  room,  having  the  one  half  of  the 
floor  raised  with  broad  stones  a  foot  higher  than  the 
other,  whereon  strawing  moss,  they  make  their  nests 
to  sleep  in.  They  defile  these  dens  most  filthily  with 
their  beastly  feeding,  and  dwell  so  long  in  a  place 
(as  we  think)  until  their  sluttishness  loathing  them, 
they  are  forced  to  seek  a  sweeter  air,  and  a  new  seat ; 
and  are  (no  doubt)  a  dispersed  and  wandering  nation, 
as  the  Tartarians,  and  live  in  hoards  and  troops, 
without  any  certain  abode,  as  may  appear  by  sundry 
circumstances  of  our  experience. 

Here  our  captive  being  ashore  with  us,  to  declare 
the  use  of  such  things  as  we  saw,  stayed  himself 
alone  behind  the  company,  and  did  set  up  five  small 
sticks  round  in  a  circle  one  by  another,  with*  one 
small  bone  placed  just  in  the  midst  of  all  :  which 
thing  when  one  of  our  men  perceived,  he  called  us 
back  to  behold  the  matter,  thinking  that  he  had  meant 


Frobisher.     Second  Voyage  29 

some  charm  or  witchcraft  therein.  But  the  best 
conjecture  we  could  make  thereof  was,  that  he  would 
thereby  his  countrymen  should  understand,  that  for 
our  five  men  which  they  betrayed  the  last  year  (whom 
he  signified  by  the  five  sticks)  he  was  taken  and  kept 
prisoner,  which  he  signified  by  the  bone  in  the  midst. 
For  afterwards  when  we  shewed  him  the  picture 
of  his  countryman,  which  the  last  year  was  brought 
into  England  (whose  counterfeit  we  had  drawn,  with 
boat  and  other  furniture,  both  as  he  was  in  his  own, 
and  also  in  English  apparel),  he  was  upon  the  sudden 
much  amazed  thereat;  and  beholding  advisedly  the 
same  with  silence  a  good  while,  as  though  he  would 
strain  courtesy  whether  should  begin  the  speech 
(for  he  thought  him  no  doubt  a  lively  creature)  at 
length  began  to  question  with  him,  as  with  his  com- 
panion ;  and  finding  him  dumb  and  mute,  seemed 
to  suspect  him,  as  one  disdainful,  and  would  with 
a  little  help  have  grown  into  choler  at  the  matter, 
until  at  last,  by  feeling  and  handling,  he  found  him 
but  a  deceiving  picture.  And  then  with  great  noise 
and  cries,  ceased  not  wondering,  thinking  that  we 
could  make  men  live  or  die  at  our  pleasure.  And 
thereupon  calling  the  matter  to  his  remembrance, 
he  gave  us  plainly  to  understand  by  signs,  that 
he  had  knowledge  of  the  taking  of  our  five  men  the 
last  year,  and  confessing  the  manner  of  each  thing, 
numbered  the  five  men  upon  his  five  fingers,  and  pointed 
unto  a  boat  in  our  ship,  which  was  like  unto  that 
wherein  our  men  were  betrayed  :  and  when  we  made 
him  signs,  that  they  were  slain  and  eaten,  he  earnestly 
denied,  and  made  signs  to  the  contrary. 

The  last  of  July  the  Michael  returned  with  the 


30  Frobisher.     Second  Voyage 

Aid  to  us  from  the  southerland,  and  came  to  anchor 
by  us  in  the  Countess  of  Warwick's  Sound,  and  reported 
that  since  we  departed  from  Jackman's  Sound  there 
happened  nothing  among  them  there  greatly  worth 
the  remembrance,  until  the  thirtieth  of  July,  when 
certain  of  our  company  being  ashore  upon  a  small 
island  within  the  said  Jackman's  Sound,  near  the 
place  where  the  Aid  rode,  did  espy  a  long  boat  with 
divers  of  the  country  people  therein,  to  the  number 
of  eighteen  or  twenty  persons.  Whom  so  soon  as  our 
men  perceived,  they  returned  speedily  aboard,  to 
give  notice  thereof  unto  our  company.  They  might 
perceive  these  people  climbing  up  to  the  top  of  a  hill, 
where,  with  a  flag,  they  wafted  unto  our  ship,  and 
made  great  outcries  and  noises,  like  so  many  bulls. 
Hereupon  our  men  did  presently  man  forth  a  small 
skiff,  having  not  above  six  or  seven  persons  therein, 
which  rowed  near  the  place  where  those  people 
were,  to  prove  if  they  could  have  any  conference  with 
them.  But  after  this  small  boat  was  sent  a  greater, 
being  well  appointed  for  their  rescue,  if  need  required. 
As  soon  as  they  espied  our  company  coming  near 
them,  they  took  their  boats  and  hasted  away,  either  for 
fear,  or  else  for  policy,  to  draw  our  men  from  rescue 
further  within  their  danger :  wherefore  our  men 
construing  that  their  coming  thither  was  but  to  seek 
advantage,  followed  speedily  after  them.  But  they 
rowed  so  swiftly  away  that  our  men  could  come  nothing 
near  them.  Howbeit  they  failed  not  of  their  best 
endeavour  in  rowing,  and  having  chased  them  above 
two  miles  into  the  sea,  returned  into  their  ships  again. 

The  morning  following,  being  the  first  of  August, 
Captain  Yorke  with  the  Michael  came  into  Jackman's 


Frobisher.     Second  Voyage  31 

Sound,  and  declared  unto  the  company  there,  that 
the  last  night  past  he  came  to  anchor  in  a  certain 
bay  (which  sithence  was  named  Yorke's  Sound)  about 
four  leagues  distant  from  Jackman's  Sound,  being 
put  to  leeward  of  that  place  for  lack  of  wind,  where 
he  discovered  certain  tents  of  the  country  people ; 
where  going  with  his  company  ashore,  he  entered 
into  them,  but  found  the  people  departed,  as  it  should 
seem,  for  fear  of  their  coming.  But  amongst  sundry 
strange  things  which  in  these  tents  they  found,  there 
was  raw  and  new  killed  flesh  of  unknown  sorts,  with 
dead  carcasses  and  bones  of  dogs,  and  I  know  not  what. 
They  also  beheld  (to  their  greatest  marvel)  a  doublet 
of  canvas  made  after  the  English  fashion,  a  shirt, 
a  girdle,  three  shoes  for  contrary  feet,  and  of  unequal 
bigness,  which  they  well  conjectured  to  be  the  apparel 
of  our  five  poor  countrymen,  which  were  intercepted 
the  last  year  by  these  country  people,  about  fifty 
leagues  from  this  place,  further  within  the  straits. 
Whereupon  our  men  being  in  good  hope  that  some 
of  them  might  be  here,  and  yet  living,  the  captain, 
devising  for  the  best,  left  his  mind  behind  him  in  writing, 
with  pen,  ink,  and  paper  also,  whereby  our  poor  captive 
countrymen,  if  it  might  come  to  their  hands,  might 
know  their  friends'  minds,  and  of  their  arrival,  and 
likewise  return  their  answer.  And  so  without,  taking 
anything  away  in  their  tents,  leaving  there  also  looking- 
glasses,  points,  and  other  of  our  toys  (the  better  to 
allure  them  by  such  friendly  means)  departed  aboard 
his  bark,  with  intent  to  make  haste  to  the  Aid, 
to  give  notice  unto  the  company  of  all  such  things 
as  he  had  there  discovered  :  and  so  meant  to  return 
to  these  tents  again,  hoping  that  he  might  by  force 


32  Frobisher.     Second  Voyage 

or  policy  entrap  or  entice  the  people  to  some  friendly 
conference.  Which  things  when  he  had  delivered 
to  the  whole  company  there,  they  determined  forthwith 
to  go  in  hand  with  the  matter.  Hereupon  Captain 
Yorke  with  the  master  of  the  Aid,  and  his  mate  (who 
the  night  before  had  been  at  the  tents,  and  came 
over  from  the  other  side  in  the  Michael  with  him), 
being  accompanied  with  the  gentlemen  and  soldiers 
to  the  number  of  thirty  or  forty  persons,  in  two  small 
rowing  pinnaces  made  towards  the  place,  where  the 
night  before  they  discovered  the  tents  of  those  people, 
and  setting  Charles  Jackman,  being  the  master's 
mate,  ashore  with  a  convenient  number,  for  that 
he  could  best  guide  them  to  the  place,  they  marched 
over  land,  meaning  to  compass  them  on  the  one  side, 
whilst  the  captain  with  his  boats  might  entrap  them 
on  the  other  side.  But  landing  at  last  at  the  place 
where  the  night  before  they  left  them,  they  found 
them  with  their  tents  removed.  Notwithstanding, 
our  men  which  marched  up  into  the  country,  passing 
over  two  or  three  mountains,  by  chance  espied  certain 
tents  in  a  valley  underneath  them  near  unto  a  creek 
by  the  seaside;  which  because  it  was  not  the  place 
where  the  guide  had  been  the  night  before,  they 
judged  them  to  be  another  company,  and  besetting 
them  about,  determined  to  take  them  if  they  could. 
But  they,  having  quickly  descried  our  company, 
launched  one  great  and  another  small  boat,  being 
about  sixteen  or  eighteen  persons,  and  very  narrowly 
escaping,  put  themselves  to  sea.  Whereupon  our 
soldiers  discharged  their  calivers,  and  followed  them, 
thinking  the  noise  thereof  being  heard  to  our  boats 
at  sea,  our  men  there  would  make  what  speed  they 


Frobisher.     Second  Voyage  33 

might  to  that  place.  And  thereupon  indeed  our 
men  which  were  in  the  boats  (crossing  upon  them 
in  the  mouth  of  the  sound,  whereby  their  passage 
was  let  from  getting  sea  room,  wherein  it  had  been 
impossible  for  us  to  overtake  them  by  rowing,)  forced 
them  to  put  themselves  ashore  upon  a  point  of  land 
within  the  said  sound  (which  upon  the  occasion  of 
the  slaughter  there,  was  since  named  The  Bloody 
Point).  Whereunto  our  men  so  speedily  followed,  that 
they  had  little  leisure  left  them  to  make  any  escape. 
But  so  soon  as  they  landed,  each  of  them  brake  his 
oar,  thinking  by  that  means  to  prevent  us  in  carrying 
away  their  boats,  for  want  of  oars.  And  desperately 
returning  upon  our  men,  resisted  them  manfully 
in  their  landing,  so  long  as  their  arrows  and  darts 
lasted ;  and  after  gathering  up  those  arrows  which 
our  men  shot  at  them,  yea,  and  plucking  our  arrows 
out  of  their  bodies,  encountered  afresh  again,  and 
maintained  their  cause  until  both  weapons  and  life 
failed  them.  And  when  they  found  they  were  mortally 
wounded,  being  ignorant  what  mercy  meaneth,  with 
deadly  fury  they  cast  themselves  headlong  from  off 
the  rocks  into  the  sea,  lest  perhaps  their  enemies 
should  receive  glory  or  prey  of  their  dead  carcasses, 
for  they  supposed  us  belike  to  be  cannibals  or  eaters 
of  man's  flesh.  In  this  conflict  one  of  our  men  was 
dangerously  hurt  in  the  belly  with  one  of  their  arrows, 
and  of  them  were  slain  five  or  six,  the  rest  by  flight 
escaping  among  the  rocks ;  saving  two  women,  whereof 
the  one  being  old  and  ugly,  our  men  thought  she 
had  been  a  devil  or  some  witch,  and  therefore  let  her 
go.  The  other,  being  young  and  cumbered  with  a 
sucking  child  at  her  back,  hiding  herself  behind  the 
A.  p.  3 


34  Frobisher.     Second  Voyage 

rocks,  was  espied  by  one  of  our  men,  who  supposing 
she  had  been  a  man,  shot  through  the  hair  of  her  head, 
and  pierced  through  the  child's  arm.  Whereupon 
she  cried  out;  and  our  surgeon  meaning  to  heal  her 
child's  arm,  applied  salves  thereunto.  But  she,  not 
acquainted  with  such  kind  of  surgery,  plucked  those 
salves  away ;  and  by  continual  licking  with  her  own 
tongue,  not  much  unlike  our  dogs,  healed  up  the 
child's  arm.  And  because  the  day  was  well  near  spent, 
our  men  made  haste  unto  the  rest  of  our  company, 
which  on  the  other  side  of  the  water  remained  at 
the  tents;  where  they  found  by  the  apparel,  letter, 
and  other  English  furniture,  that  they  were  the  same 
company  which  Captain  Yorke  discovered  the  night 
before,  having  removed  themselves  from  the  place 
where  he  left  them. 

And  now,  considering  their  sudden  flying  from  our 
men,  and  their  desperate  manner  of  fighting,  we  began 
to  suspect  that  we  had  heard  the  last  news  of  our 
men,  which  the  last  year  were  betrayed  of  these  people. 
And  considering  also  their  ravenous  and  bloody 
disposition  in  eating  any  kind  of  raw  flesh  or  carrion, 
howsoever  stinking,  it  is  to  be  thought  that  they  had 
slain  and  devoured  our  men  :  for  the  doublet  which 
was  found  in  their  tents  had  many  holes  therein, 
being  made  with  their  arrows  and  darts. 

But  now  the  night  being  at  hand,  our  men,  with 
their  captives  and  such  poor  stuff  as  they  found  in 
their  tents,  returned  towards  their  ships.  When,  being 
at  sea,  there  arose  a  sudden  flaw  of  wind,  which  was 
not  a  little  dangerous  for  their  small  boats;  but,  as 
God  would,  they  came  all  safely  aboard.  And  with 
these  good  news  they  returned  (as  before  mentioned) 


Frobisher.     Second  Voyage  35 

into  the  Countess  of  Warwick's  Sound  unto  us.  And 
between  Jackman's  Sound,  from  whence  they  came, 
and  the  Countess  of  Warwick's  Sound,  between  land 
and  land,  being  thought  the  narrowest  place  of  the 
straits,  were  judged  nine  leagues  over  at  the  least : 
and  Jackman's  Sound,  being  upon  the  southerland, 
lieth  directly  almost  over  against  the  Countess's 
Sound,  as  is  reckoned  scarce  thirty  leagues  within 
the  straits  from  the  Queen's  Cape,  which  is  the 
entrance  of  the  straits  of  the  southerland.  This  cape 
being  named  Queen  Elizabeth's  Cape,  standeth  in  the 
latitude  of  62  degrees  and  a  half  to  the  northwards 
of  Newfoundland,  and  upon  the  same  continent,  for 
anything  that  is  yet  known  to  the  contrary. 

Having  now  got  a  woman  captive  for  the  comfort 
of  our  man,  we  brought  them  both  together,  and  every 
man  with  silence  desired  to  behold  the  manner  of 
their  meeting  and  entertainment,  the  which  was 
more  worth  the  beholding  than  can  be  well  expressed 
by  writing.  At  their  first  encountering  they  beheld 
each  the  other  very  wistly  a  good  space,  without  speech 
or  word  uttered,  with  great  change  of  colour  and 
countenance,  as  though  it  seemed  the  grief  and  disdain 
of  their  captivity  had  taken  away  the  use  of  their 
tongues  and  utterance.  The  woman  at  the  first  very 
suddenly,  as  though  she  disdained  or  regarded  not 
the  man,  turned  away  and  began  to  sing,  as  though 
she  minded  another  matter  :  but  being  again  brought 
together,  the  man  brake  up  the  silence  first,  and  with 
stern  and  staid  countenance,  began  to  tell  a  long 
solemn  tale  to  the  woman.  Whereunto  she  gave  good 
hearing,  and  interrupted  him  nothing,  till  he  had 
finished;  and  afterwards,  being  grown  into  more 

3—2 


36  Frobisher.     Second   Voyage 

familiar  acquaintance  by  speech,  they  were  turned 
together,  so  that  (I  think)  the  one  would  hardly  have 
lived  without  the  comfort  of  the  other. 

On  Monday,  the  sixth  of  August,  the  lieutenant 
with  all  the  soldiers,  for  the  better  guard  of  the  miners 
and  the  other  things  ashore,  pitched  their  tents  in 
the  Countess's  Island,  and  fortified  the  place  for  their 
better  defence  as  well  as  they  could,  and  were  to  the 
number  of  forty  persons,  when,  being  all  at  labour, 
they  might  perceive  upon  the  top  of  a  hill  over  against 
them  a  number  of  the  country  people  wafting  with 
a  flag,  and  making  great  outcries  unto  them,  and  were 
of  the  same  company  which  had  encountered  lately 
our  men  upon  the  other  shore,  being  come  to  complain 
their  late  losses,  and  to  entreat  (as  it  seemed)  for 
restitution  of  the  woman  and  child,  which  our  men 
in  the  late  conflict  had  taken  and  brought  away. 
Whereupon  the  General,  taking  the  savage  captive 
with  him,  and  setting  the  woman  where  they  might 
best  perceive  her,  in  the  highest  place  of  the  island, 
went  over  to  talk  with  them.  This  captive,  at  his 
first  encounter  of  his  friends,  fell  so  out  into  tears 
that  he  could  not  speak  a  word  in  a  great  space;  but 
after  a  while,  overcoming  his  kindness,  he  talked 
at  full  with  his  companions,  and  bestowed  friendly 
upon  them  such  toys  and  trifles  as  we  had  given  him : 
whereby  we  noted,  that  they  are  very  kind  one  to 
another,  and  greatly  sorrowful  for  the  loss  of  their 
friends.  Our  General,  by  signs,  required  his  five  men 
which  they  took  captive  the  last  year,  and  promised 
them,  not  only  to  release  those  which  he  had  taken, 
but  also  to  reward  them  with  great  gifts  and  friendship. 
Our  savage  made  signs  in  answer  from  them  that 


Frobisher.     Second  Voyage  37 

our  men  should  be  delivered  us,  and  were  yet  living, 
and  made  signs  likewise  unto  us  that  we  should  write 
our  letters  unto  them.  For  they  knew  very  well  the 
use  we  have  of  writing,  and  received  knowledge  thereof, 
either  of  our  poor  captive  countrymen  which  they 
betrayed,  or  else  by  this  our  new  captive,  who  hath 
seen  us  daily  write  and  repeat  again  such  words 
of  his  language  as  we  desired  to  learn.  But  they 
for  this  night,  because  it  was  late,  departed  without 
any  letter,  although  they  called  earnestly  in  haste 
for  the  same.  And  the  next  morning  early,  being 
the  seventh  of  August,  they  called  again  for  the  letter ; 
which  being  delivered  unto  them,  they  speedily  departed, 
making  signs  with  three  fingers,  and  pointing  to  the 
sun,  that  they  meant  to  return  within  three  days; 
until  which  time  we  heard  no  more  of  them ;  and  about 
the  time  appointed  they  returned,  in  such  sort  as  you 
shall  afterwards  hear. 

This  night,  because  the  people  were  very  near 
unto  us,  the  lieutenant  caused  the  trumpet  to  sound 
a  call,  and  every  man  in  the  island  repairing  to  the 
ensign,  he  put  them  in  mind  of  the  place,  so  far  from 
their  country  wherein  they  lived,  and  the  danger 
of  a  great  multitude,  which  they  were  subject  unto, 
if  good  watch  and  ward  were  not  kept.  For  at  every 
low  water  the  enemy  might  come  almost  dryf oot 
from  the  main  unto  us;  wherefore  he  willed  every 
man  to  prepare  him  in  good  readiness  upon  all  sudden 
occasions.  And  so,  giving  the  watch  their  charge,  the 
company  departed  to  rest. 

I  thought  the  captain's  letter  well  worth  the 
remembering,  not  for  the  circumstance  of  curious  indit- 
ing, but  for  the  substance  and  good  meaning  therein 


38  Frobisher.     Second   Voyage 

contained,  and  therefore  have  repeated  here  the  same, 
as  by  himself  it  was  hastily  written. 

The  form  of  Master  Martin  Frobisher's  letter  to  the 
English  captives. 

'  IN  the  name  of  God,  in  whom  we  all  believe, 
who  (I  trust)  hath  preserved  your  bodies  and  souls 
among  these  infidels,  I  commend  me  unto  you.  I 
will  be  glad  to  seek  by  all  means  you  can  devise  for 
your  deliverance,  either  with  force,  or  with  any  com- 
modities within  my  ships,  which  I  will  not  spare  for 
your  sakes,  or  anything  else  I  can  do  for  you.  I 
have  aboard,  of  theirs,  a  man,  a  woman,  and  a  child, 
which  I  am  contented  to  deliver  for  you,  but  the  man 
which  I  carried  away  from  hence  the  last  year  is  dead 
in  England.  Moreover,  you  may  declare  unto  them, 
that  if  they  deliver  you  not,  I  will  not  leave  a  man 
alive  in  their  country.  And  thus,  if  one  of  you  can 
come  to  speak  with  me,  they  shall  have  either  the 
man,  woman,  or  child  in  pawn  for  you.  And  thus 
unto  God,  whom  I  trust  you  do  serve,  in  haste  I  leave 
you,  and  to  Him  we  will  daily  pray  for  you.  This 
Tuesday  morning,  the  seventh  of  August,  Anno  1577. 

Yours  to  the  uttermost  of  my  power 

MARTIN  FROBISHER. 

I  have  sent  you  by  these  bearers,  pen,  ink,  and 
paper,  to  write  back  unto  me  again,  if  personally 
you  cannot  come  to  certify  me  of  your  estate.' 

Now  had  the  General  altered  his  determination 
for  going  any  further  into  the  straits  at  this  time, 


Frobisher.     Second  Voyage  39 

for  any  further  discovery  of  the  passage,  having  taken 
a  man  and  a  woman  of  that  country,  which  he  thought 
sufficient  for  the  use  of  language;  and  having  also 
met  with  these  people  here,  which  intercepted  his 
men  the  last  year,  (as  the  apparel  and  English  furniture, 
which  was  found  in  their  tents,  very  well  declared) 
he  knew  it  was  but  a  labour  lost  to  seek  them  further 
off,  when  he  had  found  them  there  at  hand.  And 
considering  also  the  short  time  he  had  in  hand,  he 
thought  it  best  to  bend  his  whole  endeavour  for  the 
getting  of  mine,  and  to  leave  the  passage  further  to  be 
discovered  hereafter.  For  his  commission  directed  him 
in  this  voyage,  only  for  the  searching  of  the  ore,  and 
to  defer  the  further  discovery  of  the  passage  until 
another  time. 

On  Thursday,  the  ninth  of  August,  we  began  to  make 
a  small  fort  for  our  defence  in  the  Countess's  Island, 
and  entrenched  a  corner  of  a  cliff,  which  on  three 
parts,  like  a  wall  of  good  height,  was  compassed  and 
well  fenced  with  the  sea. 

Saturday,  the  eleventh  of  August,  the  people  shewed 
themselves  again,  and  called  unto  us  from  the  side 
of  a  hill  over  against  us.  The  General  (with  good 
hope  to  hear  of  his  men,  and  to  have  answer  of  his 
letter)  went  over  unto  them,  where  they  presented 
themselves  not  above  three  in  sight,  but  were  hidden 
indeed  in  greater  numbers  behind  the  rocks  ;  and  making 
signs  of  delay  with  us,  to  entrap  some  of  us  to  redeem 
their  own,  did  only  seek  advantage  to  train  our  boat 
about  a  point  of  land  from  sight  of  our  company. 
Whereupon  our  men,  justly  suspecting  them,  kept 
aloof  without  their  danger,  and  yet  set  one  of  our 
company  ashore,  which  took  up  a  great  bladder  which 


40  Frobisher.     Second  Voyage 

one  of  them  offered  us,  and  leaving  a  looking-glass 
in  the  place,  came  into  the  boat  again.  In  the  mean- 
while, our  men  which  stood  in  the  Countess's  Island 
to  behold,  who  might  better  discern  them,  than  those 
of  the  boat,  by  reason  they  were  on  higher  ground, 
made  a  great  outcry  unto  our  men  in  the  boat,  for 
that  they  saw  divers  of  the  savages  creeping  behind 
the  rocks  towards  our  men ;  whereupon  the  General 
presently  returned  without  tidings  of  his  men. 

Concerning  this  bladder  which  we  received,  our 
captive  made  signs  that  it  was  given  him  to  keep 
water  and  drink  in ;  but  we  suspected  rather  it  was 
given  him  to  swim  and  shift  away  withal,  for  he  and 
the  woman  sought  divers  times  to  escape,  having 
loosed  our  boats  from  astern  our  ships,  and  we  never 
a  boat  left  to  pursue  them  withal,  and  had  prevailed 
very  far,  had  they  not  been  very  timely  espied  and 
prevented  therein. 

After  our  General's  coming  away  from  them  they 
mustered  themselves  in  our  sight,  upon  the  top  of 
a  hill,  to  the  number  of  twenty  in  a  rank,  all  holding 
hands  over  their  heads,  and  dancing  with  great  noise 
and  songs  together.  We  supposed  they  made  this 
dance  and  shew  for  us  to  understand,  that  we  might 
take  view  of  their  whole  companies  and  force,  meaning 
belike  that  we  should  do  the  same.  And  thus  they 
continued  upon  the  hill  tops  until  night,  when  hearing 
a  piece  of  our  great  ordnance,  which  thundered  in  the 
hollo wness  of  the  high  hills,  it  made  unto  them  so 
fearful  a  noise,  that  they  had  no  great  will  to  tarry 
long  after.  And  this  was  done  more  to  make  them 
know  our  force  than  to  do  them  any  hurt  at  all. 

On   Sunday,    the    12   of   August,   Captain   Fenton 


Frobisher.     Second  Voyage  41 

trained  the  company,  and  made  the  soldiers  maintain 
skirmish  among  themselves,  as  well  for  their  exercise, 
as  for  the  country  people  to  behold  in  what  readiness 
our  men  were  always  to  be  found;  for  it  was  to  be 
thought,  that  they  lay  hid  in  the  hills  thereabout, 
and  observed  all  the  manner  of  our  proceedings. 

On  Wednesday,  the  fourteenth  of  August,  our 
General  with  two  small  boats  well  appointed,  for 
that  he  suspected  the  country  people  to  lie  lurking 
thereabout,  went  up  a  certain  bay  within  the  Countess's 
Sound,  to  search  for  ore,  and  met  again  with  the  country 
people  ;  who  so  soon  as  they  saw  our  men  made  great- 
outcries,  and  with  a  white  flag  made  of  bladders 
sewed  together  with  the  guts  and  sinews  of  beasts, 
wafted  us  amain  unto  them,  but  shewed  not  above 
three  of  their  company.  But  when  we  came  near 
them,  we  might  perceive  a  great  multitude  creeping 
behind  the  rocks,  which  gave  us  good  cause  to  suspect 
their  traitorous  meaning  :  whereupon  we  made  them 
signs,  that  if  they  would  lay  their  weapons  aside, 
and  come  forth,  we  would  deal  friendly  with  them, 
although  their  intent  was  manifested  unto  us.  But 
for  all  the  signs  of  friendship  we  could  make  them, 
they  came  still  creeping  towards  us  behind  the  rocks 
to  get  more  advantage  of  us,  as  though  we  had  no  eyes 
to  see  them,  thinking  belike  that  our  single  wits  could 
not  discover  so  bare  devices  and  simple  drifts  of  theirs. 
Their  spokesman  earnestly  persuaded  us  with  many 
enticing  shews,  to  come  eat  and  sleep  ashore,  with 
great  arguments  of  courtesy ;  and  clapping  his  bare 
hands  over  his  head  in  token  of  peace  and  innocency, 
willed  us  to  do  the  like.  But  the  better  to  allure  our 
hungry  stomachs,  he  brought  us  a  trim  bait  of  raw 


42  Frobisher.     Second  Voyage 

flesh,  which  for  fashion  sake  with  a  boat-hook  we 
caught  into  our  boat :  but  when  the  cunning  cater 
perceived  his  first  cold  morsel  could  nothing  sharpen 
our  stomachs,  he  cast  about  for  a  new  train  of  warm 
flesh  to  procure  our  appetites.  Wherefore  he  caused 
one  of  his  fellows,  in  halting  manner,  to  come  forth 
as  a  lame  man  from  behind  the  rocks ;  and  the  better 
to  declare  his  kindness  in  carving,  he  hoised  him  upon 
his  shoulders,  and  bringing  him  hard  to  the  water 
side  where  we  were,  left  him  there  limping  as  an  easy 
prey  to  be  taken  of  us.  His  hope  was  that  we  would 
bite  at  this  bait,  and  speedily  leap  ashore  within 
their  danger ;  whereby  they  might  have  apprehended 
some  of  us,  to  ransom  their  friends  home  again,  which 
before  we  had  taken.  The  gentlemen  and  soldiers  had 
great  will  to  encounter  them  ashore,  but  the  General 
more  careful  by  process  of  time  to  win  them,  than 
wilfully  at  the  first  to  spoil  them,  would  in  no  wise 
admit  that  any  man  should  put  himself  in  hazard 
ashore,  considering  the  matter  he  now  intended  was 
for  the  ore,  and  not  for  the  conquest.  Notwithstanding, 
to  prove  this  cripple's  footmanship,  he  gave  liberty 
for  one  to  shoot.  Whereupon  the  cripple,  having  a 
parting  blow,  lightly  recovered  a  rock,  and  went  away 
a  true  and  no  feigned  cripple,  and  hath  learned  his 
lesson,  for  ever  halting  afore  such  cripples  again.  But 
his  fellows  which  lay  hid  before,  full  quickly  then 
appeared  in  their  likeness,  and  maintained  the  skirmish 
with  their  slings,  bows  and  arrows  very  fiercely, 
and  came  as  near  as  the  water  suffered  them  :  and 
with  as  desperate  mind  as  hath  been  seen  in  any  men, 
without  fear  of  shot  or  anything,  followed  us  all  along 
the  coast ;  but  all  their  shot  fell  short  of  us,  and  are 


Frobisher.     Second  Voyage  43 

of  little  danger.  They  had  belayed  all  the  coast 
along  for  us,  and  being  dispersed  so,  were  not  well 
to  be  numbered,  but  we  might  discern  of  them  above 
an  hundred  persons,  and  had  cause  to  suspect  a  greater 
number.  And  thus  without  loss  or  hurt  we  returned 
to  our  ships  again. 

Now  our  work  growing  to  an  end,  and  having, 
only  with  five  poor  miners,  and  the  help  of  a  few  gentle- 
men and  soldiers,  brought  aboard  almost  two  hundred 
ton  of  ore  in  the  space  of  twenty  days,  every  man 
therewithal  well  comforted,  determined  lustily  to 
work  afresh  for  a  boon  voyage,  to  bring  our  labour 
to  a  speedy  and  happy  end. 

And  upon  Wednesday  at  night,  being  the  one  and 
twentieth  of  August,  we  fully  finished  the  whole 
work.  And  it  was  now  good  time  to  leave,  for  as  the 
men  were  well  wearied,  so  their  shoes  and  clothes 
were  well  worn,  their  baskets'  bottoms  torn  out,  their 
tools  broken,  and  the  ships  reasonably  well  filled. 
Some  with  over-straining  themselves  received  hurts 
not  a  little  dangerous.  And  about  this  time  the  ice 
began  to  congeal  and  freeze  about  our  ships'  sides 
a-night,  which  gave  us  a  good  argument  of  the  sun's 
declining  southward,  and  put  us  in  mind  to  make  more 
haste  homeward. 

Thursday,  the  22  of  August,  we  plucked  down  our 
tents  and  every  man  hasted  homeward,  and  making 
bonfires  upon  the  top  of  the  highest  mount  of  the 
island,  and  marching  with  ensign  displayed  round 
about  the  island,  we  gave  a  volley  of  shot  for  a  farewell, 
in  honour  of  the  Right  Honourable  Lady  Anne,  Countess 
of  Warwick,  whose  name  it  beareth  :  and  so  departed 
aboard. 


44  Frobisher.     Second  Voyage 

The  23  of  August,  having  the  wind  large  at  west, 
we  set  sail  from  out  of  the  Countess's  Sound  homeward  ; 
but  the  wind  calming  we  came  to  anchor  within  the 
point  of  the  same  sound  again. 

The  24  of  August  about  three  of  the  clock  in  the 
morning,  having  the  wind  large  at  west,  we  set  sail 
again,  and  by  nine  of  the  clock  at  night  we  left  the 
Queen's  Foreland  astern  of  us,  and  being  clear  of  the 
straits,  we  bare  further  into  the  main  ocean,  keeping 
our  course  more  southerly,  to  bring  ourselves  the 
sooner  under  the  latitude  of  our  own  climate.  The 
wind  was  very  great  at  sea,  so  that  we  lay  a-hull  all 
night,  and  had  snow  half  a  foot  deep  on  the  hatches. 

From  the  24  until  the  28  we  had  very  much 
wind,  but  large,  keeping  our  course  south-south-east, 
and  had  like  to  have  lost  the  barks,  but  by  good  hap 
we  met  again.  The  height  being  taken,  we  were 
in  [cipher]  degrees  and  a  half. 

The  29  of  August  the  wind  blew  much  at  north- 
east, so  that  we  could  bear  but  only  a  bunt  of  our 
foresail,  and  the  barks  were  not  able  to  carry  any  sail 
at  all.  The  Michael  lost  company  of  us,  and  shaped 
her  course  towards  Orkney,  because  that  way  was  better 
known  unto  them,  and  arrived  at  Yarmouth. 

The  30  of  August,  with  the  force  of  the  wind, 
and  a  surge  of  the  sea,  the  master  of  the  Gabriel  and 
the  boatswain  were  stricken  both  overboard,  and 
hardly  was  the  boatswain  recovered,  having  hold 
on  a  rope  hanging  overboard  in  the  sea ;  and  yet  the 
bark  was  laced  fore  and  after  with  ropes  a  breast  high 
within  board.  This  master  was  called  William  Smith, 
being  but  a  young  man  and  a  very  sufficient  mariner. 
Who  being  all  the  morning  before  exceeding  pleasant, 


Frobisher.     Second  Voyage  45 

told  his  captain  he  dreamed  that  he  was  cast  overboard, 
and  that  the  boatswain  had  him  by  the  hand,  and 
could  not  save  him.  And  so,  immediately  upon  the 
end  of  his  tale,  his  dream  came  right  evilly  to  pass : 
and  indeed  the  boatswain  in  like  sort  held  him  by  one 
hand,  having  hold  on  a  rope  with  the  other,  until 
his  force  failed,  and  the  master  drowned.  The  height 
being  taken  we  found  ourselves  to  be  in  the  latitude 
of  [cipher]  degrees  and  a  half,  and  reckoned  ourselves 
from  the  Queen's  Cape  homeward  about  two  hundred 
leagues. 

The  last  of  August,  about  midnight,  we  had  two 
or  three  great  and  sudden  flaws  or  storms. 

The  first  of  September  the  storm  was  grown  very 
great,  and  continued  almost  the  whole  day  and  night, 
and  lying  a-hull  to  tarry  for  the  barks  our  ship  was 
much  beaten  with  the  seas,  every  sea  almost  over- 
taking our  poop,  so  that  we  were  constrained  with 
a  bunt  of  our  sail  to  try  it  out,  and  ease  the  rolling 
of  our  ship.  And  so  the  Gabriel  not  able  to  bear 
any  sail  to  keep -company  with  us,  and  our  ship  being 
higher  in  the  poop,  and  a  tall  ship,  whereon  the  wind 
had  more  force  to  drive,  went  so  fast  away  that  we 
lost  sight  of  them,  and  left  them  to  God  and  their 
good  fortune  of  sea.  The  second  day  of  September 
in  the  morning, 'it  pleased  God  of  his  goodness  to  send 
us  a  calm,  whereby  we  perceived  the  rudder  of  our 
ship  torn  in  twain,  and  almost  ready  to  fall  away. 
Wherefore,  taking  the  benefit  of  the  time,  we  flung 
half-a-dozen  couple  of  our  best  men  overboard,  who 
taking  great  pains  under  water,  driving  planks,  and 
binding  with  ropes,  did  well  strengthen  and  mend 
the  matter  who  returned  the  most  part  more  than 


46  Frobisher.     Second  Voyage 

half-dead  out  of  the  water,  and  as  God's  pleasure 
was,  the  sea  was  calm  until  the  work  was  finished. 

The  seventeenth  of  September  we  sounded,  and  had 
forty  fathom,  and  were  not  far  off  the  Land's-End, 
finding  branded  sand  with  small  worms  and  cockle- 
shells, and  were  shot  between  Scilly  and  the  Land's-End ; 
and  being  within  the  bay,  we  were  not  able  to  double 
the  point  with  a  south- and-by-east  way,  but  were 
fain  to  make  another  board,  the  wind  being  at  south- 
west and  by  west,  and  yet  could  not  double  the  point 
to  come  clear  of  the  Land's-End,  to  bear  along  the 
Channel:  and  the  weather  cleared  up  when  we  were 
hard  aboard  the  shore,  and  we  made  the  Land's-End 
perfect,  and  so  put  up  along  Saint  George's  Channel. 
And  the  weather  being  very  foul  at  sea,  we  coveted 
some  harbour,  because  our  steerage  was  broken, 
and  so  came  to  anchor  in  Padstow  Road,  in  Cornwall. 
But  riding  there  a  very  dangerous  road,  we  were 
advised  by  the  country  to  put  to  sea  again,  and  of  the 
two  evils,  to  choose  the  less,  for  there  was  nothing 
but  present  peril  where  we  rode.  Whereupon  we  plied 
along  the  Channel  to  get  to  Lundy,  from  whence  we 
were  again  driven,  being  but  an  open  road,  where 
our  anchor  came  home ;  and  with  force  of  weather 
put  to  seas  again,  and  about  the  three  and  twentieth  of 
September  arrived  at  Milford  Haven,  in  Wales,  which 
being  a  very  good  harbour,  made  us  happy  men,  that 
we  had  received  such  long-desired  safety. 

About  one  month  after  our  arrival  here,  by  order 
from  the  Lords  of  the  Council,  the  ship  came  up  to 
Bristow,  where  the  ore  was  committed  to  keeping 
in  the  castle  there.  Here  we  found  the  Gabriel,  one 
of  the  barks,  arrived  in  good  safety,  who  having 


Frobisher.     Second  Voyage  47 

never  a  man  within  board  very  sufficient  to  bring 
home  the  ship,  after  the  master  was  lost,  by  good 
fortune,  when  she  came  upon  the  coast,  met  with  a 
ship  of  Bristow  at  sea,  who  conducted  her  in  safety 
thither. 

Here  we  heard  good  tidings  also  of  the  arrival  of 
the  other  bark  called  the  Michael,  in  the  north  parts, 
which  was  not  a  little  joyful  unto  us,  that  it  pleased 
God  so  to  bring  us  to  a  safe  meeting  again;  and  we 
lost  in  all  the  voyage  only  one  man,  besides  one  that 
died  at  sea,  which  was  sick  before  he  came  aboard, 
and  was  so  desirous  to  follow  this  enterprise  that 
he  rather  chose  to  die  therein  than  not  to  be  one 
to  attempt  so  notable  a  voyage. 


DAVIS.     FIRST  VOYAGE 

The  first  voyage  of  Master  John  Davis,  undertaken 
in  June  1585,  for  the  discovery  of  the  North-west 
passage.  Written  by  Master  John  Jane,  merchant, 
sometime  servant  to  the  worshipful  Master  William 
Sanderson. 

Certain  honourable  personages  and  worthy  gentle- 
men of  the  court  and  country,  with  divers  worshipful 
merchants  of  London  and  of  the  west  country,  moved 
with  desire  to  advance  God's  glory  and  to  seek  the 
good  of  their  native  country,  consulting  together 
of  the  likelihood  of  the  discovery  of  the  North-west 
passage,  which  heretofore  had  been  attempted,  but 
unhappily  given  over  by  accidents  unlocked  for, 
which  turned  the  enterprisers  from  their  principal 
purpose,  resolved  after  good  deliberation,  to  put  down 
their  adventures  to  provide  for  necessary  shipping, 
and  a  fit  man  to  be  chief  conductor  of  this  so  hard 
an  enterprise.  The  setting  forth  of  this  action  was 
committed  by  the  adventurers  especially  to  the  care 
of  Master  William  Sanderson,  merchant  of  London, 
who  was  so  forward  therein,  that  besides  his  travail, 
which  was  not  small,  he  became  the  greatest  adventurer 
with  his  purse ;  and  commended  unto  the  rest  of  the 
company  one  Master  John  Davis,  a  man  very  well 
grounded  in  the  principles  of  the  art  of  navigation  for 
captain  and  chief  pilot  of  this  exploit. 


Davis.     First  Voyage  49 

Thus  therefore  all  things  being  put  in  a  readiness, 
we  departed  from  Dartmouth  the  seventh  of  June, 
towards  the  discovery  of  the  aforesaid  north-west 
passage,  with  two  barks,  the  one  being  of  50  tons, 
named  the  Sunshine  of  London,  and  the  other  being 
35  tons,  named  the  Moonshine  of  Dartmouth.  In 
the  Sunshine  we  had  23  persons,  whose  names  are 
these  following  :  Master  John  Davis,  captain,  William 
Eston,  master,  Richard  Pope,  master's  mate,  John 
Jane,  merchant,  Henry  Davy,  gunner,  William  Crosse, 
boatswain,  John  Bagge,  Walter  Arthur,  Luke  Adams, 
Robert  Coxworthy,  John  Ellis,  John  Kelley,  Edward 
Helman,  William  Dicke,  Andrew  Maddocke,  Thomas 
Hill,  Robert  Watts,  carpenter,  William  Russell,  Christo- 
pher Gorney,  boy  :  James  Cole,  Francis  Ridley,  John 
Russell,  Robert  Cornish,  musicians. 

The  Moonshine  had  19  persons:  William  Bruton, 
captain,  John  Ellis,  master,  the  rest,  mariners. 

The  first  of  July  we  saw  a  great  store  of  porpoises. 
The  master  called  for  an  harping  iron,  and  shot  twice 
or  thrice  :  sometimes  he  missed,  and  at  last  shot 
one  and  struck  him  in  the  side,  and  wound  him  into 
the  ship.  When  we  had  him  aboard,  the  master  said 
it  was  a  darlyhead. 

The  2  we  had  some  of  the  fish  sodden,  and  it  did 
eat  as  sweet  as  any  mutton. 

The  3  we  had  more  in  sight,  and  the  master 
went  to  shoot  at  them,  but  they  were  so  great  that 
they  burst  our  irons,  and  we  lost  both  fish,  irons, 
pastime,  and  all.  Yet  nevertheless  the  master  shot 
at  them  with  a  pike,  and  had  well  nigh  gotten  one, 
but  he  was  so  strong  that  he  burst  off  the  bars  of  the 
pike  and  went  away.  Then  he  took  the  boat-hook  and 


A.    P. 


50  Davis.     First  Voyage 

hit  one  with  that,  but  all  would  not  prevail,  so  at 
length  we  let  them  alone. 

The  6  we  saw  a  very  great  whale,  and  every  day 
we  saw  whales  continually. 

The  16,  17,  and  18,  we  saw  great  store  of 
whales. 

The  19  of  July  we  fell  into  a  great  whirling 
and  brustling  of  a  tide,  setting  to  the  northwards  ; 
and  sailing  about  half  a  league,  we  came  into  a  very 
calm  sea,  which  bent  to  the  south-south-west.  Here 
we  heard  a  mighty  great  roaring  of  the  sea,  as  if  it 
had  been  the  breach  of  some  shore,  the  air  being  so 
foggy  and  full  of  thick  mist,  that  we  could  not  see 
the  one  ship  from  the  other,  being  a  very  small  distance 
asunder.  So  the  captain  and  the  master,  being  in 
distrust  how  the  tide  might  set  them,  caused  the 
Moonshine  to  hoise  out  her  boat  and  to  sound ;  but 
they  could  not  find  ground  in  300  fathoms  and  better. 
Then  the  captain,  master,  and  I  went  towards  the 
breach  to  see  what  it  should  be,  giving  charge  to  our 
gunners  that  at  every  glass  they  should  shoot  off 
a  musket-shot,  to  the  intent  we  might  keep  ourselves 
from  losing  them.  Then,  coming  near  to  the  breach, 
we  met  many  islands  of  ice  floating,  which  had  quickly 
compassed  us  about.  Then  we  went  upon  some  of 
them,  and  did  perceive  that  all  the  roaring  which 
we  heard,  was  caused  only  by  the  rolling  of  this  ice 
together.  Our  company,  seeing  us  not  to  return  accord- 
ing to  our  appointment,  left  off  shooting  muskets 
and  began  to  shoot  falconets;  for  they  feared  some 
mishap  had  befallen  us.  But  before  night  we  came 
aboard  again  with  our  boat  laden  with  ice,  which 
made  very  good  fresh .  water.  Then  we  bent  our 


Davis.    First  Voyage  51 

course  toward  the  north,  hoping  by  that  means  to 
double  the  land. 

The  20,  as  we  sailed  along  the  coast,  the  fog 
broke  up,  and  we  discovered  the  land,  which  was 
the  most  deformed,  rocky,  and  mountainous  land 
that  ever  we  saw.  The  first  sight  whereof  did  shew 
as  if  it  had  been  in  form  of  a  sugar-loaf,  standing  to 
our  sight  above  the  clouds ;  for  that  it  did  shew  over 
the  fog  like  a  white  list  in  the  sky,  the  tops  altogether 
covered  with  snow,  and  the  shore  beset  with  ice  a 
league  off  into  the  sea,  making  such  irksome  noise, 
as  that  it  seemed  to  be  the  true  pattern  of  desolation ; 
and  after  the  same  our  captain  named  it,  The  Land  of 
Desolation. 

Upon  Thursday,  being  the  22  of  this  month, 
about  three  of  the  clock  in  the  morning,  we  hoised 
out  our  boat,  and  the  captain  with  six  sailors  went 
towards  the  shore,  thinking  to  find  a  landing  place ; 
for  the  night  before  we  did  perceive  the  coast  to  be 
void  of  ice  to  our  judgment,  and  the  same  night  we 
were  all  persuaded  that  we  had  seen  a  canoa  rowing 
along  the  shore ;  but  afterwards  we  fell  in  some  doubt 
of  it,  but  we  had  no  great  reason  so  to  do.  The  captain 
rowing  towards  the  shore,  willed  the  master  to  bear 
in  with  the  land  after  him,  and  before  he  came  near 
the  shore  by  the  space  of  a  league,  or  about  two  miles, 
he  found  so  much  ice  that  he.  could  not  get  to  land 
by  any  means.  Here  our  mariners  put  to  their  lines 
to  see  if  they  could  get  any  fish,  because  there  were 
so  many  seals  upon  the  coast,  and  the  birds  did  beat 
upon  the  water ;  but  all  was  in  vain.  The  water  about 
this  place  was  very  black  and  thick,  like  to  a  filthy 
standing  pool.  We  sounded  and  had  ground  in  120 

4—2 


52  Davis.     First  Voyage 

fathoms.  While  the  captain  was  rowing  to  the  shore, 
our  men  saw  woods  upon  the  rocks,  like  to  the  rocks 
of  Newfoundland ;  but  I  could  not  discern  them.  Yet 
it  might  be  so  very  well :  for  we  had  wood  floating 
upon  the  coast  every  day,  and  the  Moonshine  took 
up  a  tree  at  sea,  not  far  from  the  coast,  being  sixty 
foot  of  length  and  fourteen  handfuls  about,  having 
the  root  upon  it.  After  this  the  captain  came  aboard, 
the  weather  being  very  calm  and  fair  we  bent  our 
course  toward  the  south,  with  intent  to  double  the 
land. 

The  23  we  coasted  the  land,  which  did  lie 
east-north-east  and  west-south-west. 

The  247  the  wind  being  very  fair  at  east,  we 
coasted  the  land,  which  did  lie  east  and  west,  not 
being  able  to  come  near  the  shore  by  reason  of  the 
great  quantity  of  ice.  At  this  place,  because  the 
weather  was  somewhat  cold  by  reason  of  the  ice, 
and  the  better  to  encourage  our  men,  their  allowance 
was  increased.  The  captain  and  the  master  took  order 
that  every  mess,  being  five  persons,  should  have 
half  a  pound  of  bread  and  a  can  of  beer  every  morning 
to  breakfast.  The  weather  was  not  very  cold,  but 
the  air  was  moderate  like  to  our  April  weather  in 
England.  When  the  wind  came  from  the  land,  or  the 
ice,  it  was  somewhat  cold ;  but  when  it  came  off  the 
sea,  it  was  very  hot. 

The  25  of  this  month  we  departed  from  sight  of 
this  land  at  six  of  the  clock  in  the  morning,  directing 
our  course  to  the  north-westward,  hoping  in  God's 
mercy  to  find  our  desired  passage ;  and  so  continued 
above  four  days. 

The  29  of  July  we  discovered  land  in  64  degrees 


Davis.     First  Voyage  53 

15  minutes  of  latitude,  bearing  north-east  from  us. 
The  wind  being  contrary  to  go  to  the  north-westwards, 
we  bare  in  with  this  land  to  take  some  view  of  it, 
being  utterly  void  of  the  pester  of  ice  and  very  temperate. 
Coming  near  the  coast,  we  found  many  fair  sounds  and 
good  roads  for  shipping,  and  many  great  inlets  into 
the  land,  whereby  we  judged  this  land  to  be  a  great 
number  of  islands  standing  together.  Here  having 
moored  our  bark  in  good  order,  we  went  on  shore 
upon  a  small  island  to  seek  for  water  and  wood.  Upon 
this  island  we  did  perceive  that  there  had  been  people  : 
for  we  found  a  small  shoe  and  pieces  of  leather  sewed 
with  sinews,  and  a  piece  of  fur,  and  wool  like  to  beaver. 
Then  we  went  upon  another  island  on  the  other  side 
of  our  ships  ;  and  the  captain,  the  master,  and  I,  being 
got  up  to  the  top  of  an  high  rock,  the  people  of  the 
country  having  espied  us,  made  a  lamentable  noise, 
as  we  thought,  with  great  outcries  and  screechings. 
We,  hearing  them,  thought  it  had  been  the  howling 
of  wolves.  At  last  I  halloaed  again,  and  they  likewise 
cried.  Then,  we  perceiving  where  they  stood,  some 
on  the  shore,  and  one  rowing  in  a  canoa  about  a  small 
island  fast  by  them,  we  made  a  great  noise,  partly 
to  allure  them  to  us,  and  partly  to  warn  our  company 
of  them.  Whereupon  Master  Bruton  and  the  master 
of  his  ship,  with  others  of  their  company,  made  great 
haste  towards  us,  and  brought  our  musicians  with 
them  from  our  ship,  purposing  either  by  force  to  rescue 
us,  if  need  should  so  require,  or  with  courtesy  to  allure 
the  people.  When  they  came  unto  us,  we  caused  our 
musicians  to  play,  ourselves  dancing,  and  making 
many  signs  of  friendship.  At  length  there  came 
ten  canoas  from  the  other  islands,  and  two  of  them 


54  Davis.     First  Voyage 

came  so  near  the  shore  where  we  were,  that  they 
talked  with  us,  the  others  being  in  their  boats  a 
pretty  way  off.  Their  pronunciation  was  very  hollow 
through  the  throat,  and  their  speech  such  as  we  could 
not  understand  :  only  we  allured  them  by  friendly 
embracings  and  signs  of  courtesy.  At  length  one  of 
them,  pointing  up  to  the  sun  with  his  hand,  would 
presently  strike  his  breast  so  hard  that  we  might 
hear  the  blow.  This  he  did  many  times  before  he 
would  any  way  trust  us.  Then  John  Ellis,  the  master 
of  the  Moonshine,  was  appointed  to  use  his  best  policy 
to  gain  their  friendship  ;  who  struck  his  breast,  and 
pointed  to  the  sun  after  their  order.  Which  when 
he  had  divers  times  done,  they  began  to  trust  him, 
and  one  of  them  came  on  shore,  to  whom  we  threw 
our  caps,  stockings,  and  gloves,  and  such  other  things 
as  then  we  had  about  us,  playing  with  our  music, 
and  making  signs  of  joy,  and  dancing.  So  the  night 
coming,  we  bade  them  farewell,  and  went  aboard  our 
barks. 

The  next  morning,  being  the  30  of  July,  there  came 
thirty-seven  canoas  rowing  by  our  ships,  calling  to  us 
to  come  on  shore.  We  not  making  any  great  haste 
unto  them,  one  of  them  went  up  to  the  top  of  the 
rock,  and  leapt  and  danced  as  they  had  done  the  day 
before,  shewing  us  a  seal's  skin,  and  another  thing 
made  like  a  timbrel,  which  he  did  beat  upon  with 
a  stick,  making  a  noise  like  a  small  drum.  Whereupon 
we  manned  our  boats  and  came  to  them,  they  all 
staying  in  their  canoas  :  we  came  to  the  water  side 
where  they  were,  and  after  we  had  sworn  by  the  sun 
after  their  fashion,  they  did  trust  us.  So  I  shook 
hands  with  one  of  them,  and  he  kissed  my  hand, 


Davis.    First  Voyage  55 

and  we  were  very  familiar  with  them.  We  were 
in  so  great  credit  with  them  upon  this  single  acquaint- 
ance, that  we  could  have  anything  they  had.  We 
bought  five  canoas  of  them  :  we  bought  their  clothes 
from  their  backs,  which  were  all  made  of  seals'  skins 
and  birds'  skins  ;  their  buskins,  their  hose,  their  gloves, 
all  being  commonly  sewed  and  well  dressed  :  so  that 
we  were  fully  persuaded  that  they  have  divers  artificers 
among  them.  We  had  a  pair  of  buskins  of  them  full 
of  fine  wool  like  beaver.  Their  apparel  for  heat  was 
made  of  birds'  skins  with  their  feathers  on  them. 
We  saw  among  them  leather  dressed  like  glover's 
leather,  and  thick  thongs  like  white  leather  of  a  good 
length.  We  had  of  their  darts  and  oars,  and  found 
in  them  that  they  would  by  no  means  displease  us, 
but  would  give  us  whatsoever  we  asked  of  them, 
and  would  be  satisfied  with  whatsoever  we  gave  them. 
They  took  great  care  one  of  another :  for  when  we 
had  bought  their  boats,  then  two  other  would  come 
and  carry  him  away  between  them  that  had  sold  us 
his.  They  are  very  tractable  people,  void  of  craft 
or  double  dealing,  and  easy  to  be  brought  to  any 
civility  or  good  order  :  but  we  judge  them  to  be 
idolaters  and  to  worship  the  sun. 

During  the  time  of  our  abode  among  these  islands 
we  found  reasonable  quantity  of  wood,  both  fir,  spruce, 
and  juniper ;  which,  whether  it  came  floating  any 
great  distance  to  these  places  where  we  found  it, 
or  whether  it  grew  in  some  great  islands  near  the 
same  place  by  us  not  yet  discovered,  we  know  not ; 
but  we  judge  that  it  groweth  there  further  into  the 
land  than  we  were,  because  the  people  had  great  store 
of  darts  and  oars  which  they  made  none  account  of, 


56  Davis.    First  Voyage 

but  gave  them  to  us  for  small  trifles,  as  points  and  pieces 
of  paper.  We  saw  about  this  coast  marvellous  great 
abundance  of  seals  sculling  together  like  sculls  of  small 
fish.  We  found  no  fresh  water  among  these  islands, 
"but  only  snow-water,  whereof  we  found  great  pools. 
The  cliffs  were  all  of  such  ore  as  Master  Frobisher 
brought  from  Meta  Incognita.  We  had  divers  shows 
of  study,  or  Muscovy  glass,  shining  not  altogether 
unlike  to  crystal.  We  found  an  herb  growing  upon 
the  rocks,  whose  fruit  was  sweet,  full  of  red  juice, 
and  the  ripe  ones  were  like  corinths.  We  found  also 
birch  and  willow  growing  like  shrubs  low  to  the  ground. 
These  people  have  great  store  of  furs,  as  we  judge. 
They  made  shows  unto  us  the  30  of  this  present 
(which  was  the  second  time  of  our  being  with  them), 
after  they  perceived  we  would  have  skins  and  furs, 
that  they  would  go  into  the  country  and  come  again 
the  next  day  with  such  things  as  they  had.  But  this 
night  the  wind  coming  fair,  the  captain  and  the  master 
would  by  no  means  detract  the  purpose  of  our  discovery. 
And  so  the  last  of  this  month  about  four  of  the  clock 
in  the  morning  in  God's  Name  we  set  sail,  and  were 
all  that  day  becalmed  upon  the  coast. 

The  first  of  August  we  had  a  fair  wind,  and  so  pro- 
ceeded towards  the  north-west  for  our  discovery. 

The  sixth  of  August  we  discovered  land  in  66 
degrees  40  minutes  of  latitude,  altogether  void  from 
the  pester  of  ice  :  we  anchored  in  a  very  fair  road  under 
a  brave  mount,  the  cliffs  whereof  were  as  orient  as 
gold.  This  mount  was  named  Mount  Raleigh.  The 
road  where  our  ships  lay  at  anchor  was  called  Totnes 
Road.  The  sound  which  did  compass  the  mount 
was  named  Exeter  Sound.  The  foreland  towards  the 


Davis.     First  Voyage  57 

north  was  called  Dyer's  Cape.  The  foreland  towards 
the  south  was  named  Cape  Walsingham.  So  soon 
as  we  were  come  to  an  anchor  in  Totnes  Road  under 
Mount  Raleigh,  we  espied  four  white  bears  at  the 
foot  of  the  mount.  We  supposing  them  to  be  goats 
or  wolves,  manned  our  boats  and  went  towards  them ; 
but  when  we  came  near  the  shore,  we  found  them  to 
be  white  bears  of  a  monstrous  bigness.  We  being 
desirous  of  fresh  victuals  and  the  sport,  began  to 
assault  them,  and  I  being  on  land,  one  of  them  came 
down  the  hill  right  against  me.  My  piece  was  charged 
with  hailshot  and  a  bullet :  '  I  discharged  my  piece 
and  shot  him  in  the  neck  ;  he  roared  a  little,  and  took 
the  water  straight,  making  small  account  of  his  hurt. 
Then  we  followed  him  with  our  boat,  and  killed  him 
with  boar-spears,  and  two  more  that  night. 

The  7  we  went  on  shore  to  another  bear  which 
lay  all  night  upon  the  top  of  an  island  under  Mount 
Raleigh,  and  when  we  came  up  to  him  he  lay  fast 
asleep.  I  levelled  at  his  head,  and  the  stone  of  my 
piece  gave  no  fire :  with  that  he  looked  up,  and  laid 
down  his  head  again.  Then  I  shot,  being  charged 
with  two  bullets,  and  struck  him  in  the  head:  he 
being  but  amazed  fell  backwards.  Whereupon  we 
ran  all  upon  him  with  boar-spears,  and  thrust  him 
in  the  body  :  yet  for  all  that  he  gript  away  our  boar- 
spears,  and  went  towards  the  water;  and  as  he  was 
going  down,  he  came  back  again.  Then  our  master 
shot  his  boar-spear,  and  struck  him  in  the  head, 
and  made  him  to  take  the  water,  and  swim  into  a 
cove  fast  by,,  where  we  killed  him,  and  brought  him 
aboard.  The  breadth  of  his  forefoot  from  one  side 
to  the  other  was  fourteen  inches  over.  They  were 


58  Davis.    First  Voyage 

very  fat,  so  as  we  were  constrained  to  cast  the  fat 
away.  We  saw  a  raven  upon  Mount  Raleigh.  We 
found  withies  also  growing  like  low  shrubs,  and  flowers 
like  primroses  in  the  said  place.  The  coast  is  very 
mountainous,  altogether  without  wood,  grass,  or  earth, 
and  is  only  huge  mountains  of  stone  ;  but  the  bravest 
stone  that  ever  we  saw.  The  air  was  very  moderate 
in  this  country. 

The  8  we  departed  from  Mount  Raleigh,  coasting 
along  the  shore,  which  lieth  south-south-west,  and 
east-north-east. 

The  9  our  men  fell  in  dislike  of  their  allowance, 
because  it  was  too  small  as  they  thought.  Whereupon 
we  made  a  new  proportion :  every  mess,  being  five 
to  a  mess,  should  have  four  pound  of  bread  a  day, 
twelve  wine  quarts  of  beer,  six  Newland  fishes  ;  and 
the  flesh  days  a  gill  of  pease  more.  So  we  restrained 
them  from  their  butter  and  cheese. 

The  11  we  came  to  the  most  southerly  cape 
of  this  land,  which  we  named  The  Cape  of  God's 
Mercy,  as  being  the  place  of  our  first  entrance  for 
the  discovery.  The  weather  being  very  foggy  we 
coasted  this  north  land.  At  length  when  it  brake 
up,  we  perceived  that  we  were  shot  into  a  very  fair 
entrance  or  passage,  being  in  some  places  twenty 
leagues  broad,  and  in  some  thirty,  altogether  void 
of  any  pester  of  ice,  the  weather  very  tolerable,  and 
the  water  of  the  very  colour,  nature,  and  quality  of 
the  main  ocean,  which  gave  us  the  greater  hope  of 
our  passage.  Having  sailed  north-west  sixty  leagues 
in  this  entrance,  we  discovered  certain  islands  standing 
in  the  midst  thereof,  having  open  passage  on  both 
sides.  Whereupon  our  ships  divided  themselves,  the 


Davis.    First  Voyage  59 

one  sailing  on  the  north  side,  the  other  on  the  south 
side  of  the  said  isles,  where  we  stayed  five  days,  having 
the  wind  at  south-east,  very  foggy  and  foul  weather. 

The  14  we  went  on  shore  and  found  signs  of  people, 
for  we  found  stones  laid  up  together  like  a. wall,  and 
saw  the  skull  of  a  man  or  a  woman. 

The  15  we  heard  dogs  howl  on  the  shore,  which 
we  thought  had  been  wolves,  and  therefore  we  went 
on  shore  to  kill  them.  When  we  came  on  land  the 
dogs  came  presently  to  our  boat  very  gently,  yet  we 
thought  they  came  to  prey  upon  us,  and  therefore  we 
shot  at  them,  and  killed  two :  and  about  the  neck  of 
one  of  them  we  found  a  leather  collar,  whereupon  we 
thought  them  to  be  tame  dogs.  Then  we  went  farther, 
and  found  two  sleds  made  like  ours  in  England :  the 
one  was  made  of  fir,  spruce,  and  oaken  boards  sawn 
like  inch  boards :  the  other  was  made  all  of  whale- 
bone, and  there  hung  on  the  tops  of  the  sleds  three 
heads  of  beasts  which  they  had  killed.  We  saw  here 
larks,  ravens,  and  partridges. 

The  17  we  went  on  shore,  and  in  a  little  thing  made 
like  an  oven  with  stones  I  found  many  small  trifles,  as 
a  small  canoa  made  of  wood,  a  piece  of  wood  made 
like  an  image,  a  bird  made  of  bone,  beads  having 
small  holes  in  one  end  of  them  to  hang  about  their 
necks,  and  other  small  things.  The  coast  was  very 
barren  without  wood  or  grass :  the  rocks  were  very 
fair  like  marble,  full  of  veins  of  divers  colours.  We 
found  a  seal  which  was  killed  not  long  before,  being 
flean,  and  hid  under  stones. 

Our  captain  and  master  searched  still  for  probabilities 
of  the  passage  ;  and  first,  found  that  this  place  was 
all  islands,  with  great  sounds  passing  between  them. 


60  Davis.    First  Voyage 

Secondly,  the  water  remained  of  one  colour  with 
the  main  ocean  without  altering. 

Thirdly,  we  saw  to  the  west  of  those  isles  three 
or  four  whales  in  a  scull,  which  they  judged  to  come 
from  a  westerly  sea,  because  to  the  eastward  we 
saw  not  any  whale. 

Also,  as  we  were  rowing  into  a  very  great  sound 
lying  south-west,  from  whence  these  whales  came,  upon 
the  sudden  there  came  a  violent  counter-check  of 
a  tide  from  the  south-west  against  the  flood  which 
we  came  with,  not  knowing  from  whence  it  was  main- 
tained. 

Fifthly,  in  sailing  twenty  leagues  within  the  mouth 
of  this  entrance  we  had  sounding  in  90  fathoms,  fair 
grey  oozy  sand,  and  the  further  we  ran  into  the  west- 
wards the  deeper  was  the  water ;  so  that  hard  aboard 
the  shore  among  these  isles  we  could  not  have  ground 
in  330  fathoms. 

Lastly,  it  did  ebb  and  flow  six  or  seven  fathom 
up  and  down,  the  flood  coming  from  divers  parts, 
so  as  we  could  not  perceive  the  chief  maintenance 
thereof. 

The  18  and  19  our  captain  and  master  determined 
what  was  best  to  do,  both  for  the  safeguard  of  their 
credits,  and  satisfying  of  the  adventurers,  and  resolved, 
if  the  weather  brake  up,  to  make  further  search. 

The  20  the  wind  came  directly  against  us  :  so  they 
altered  their  purpose,  and  reasoned  both  for  proceed- 
ing and  returning. 

The  21,  the  wind  being  north-west,  we  departed 
from  these  islands ;  and  as  we  coasted  the  south  shore 
we  saw  many  fair  sounds,  whereby  we  were  persuaded 
that  it  was  no  firm  land  but  islands. 


Davis.    First  Voyage  61 

The  23  of  this  month  the  wind  came  south-east, 
with  very  stormy  and  foul  weather  :  so  we  were  con- 
strained to  seek  harbour  upon  the  south  coast  of 
this  entrance,  where  we  fell  into  a  very  fair  sound, 
and  anchored  in  25  fathoms  green  oozy  sand.  Here 
we  went  on  shore,  where  we  had  manifest  signs  of 
people,  where  they  had  made  their  fire,  and  laid  stones 
like  a  wall.  In  this  place  we  saw  four  very  fair  falcons  ; 
and  Master  Bruton  took  from  one  of  them  his  prey, 
which  we  judged  by  the  wings  and  legs  to  be  a  snite, 
for  the  head  was  eaten  off. 

The  24  in  the  afternoon,  the  wind  coming  some- 
what fair,  we  departed  from  this  road,  purposing  by 
God's  grace  to  return  for  England. 

The  26  we  departed  from  sight  of  the  north  land 
of  this  entrance,  directing  our  course  homewards  until 
the  tenth  of  the  next  month. 

The  10  of  September  we  fell  with  The  Land  of 
Desolation,  thinking  to  go  on  shore,  but  we  could 
get  never  a  good  harbour.  That  night  we  put  to 
sea  again,  thinking  to  search  it  the  next  day ;  but 
this  night  arose  a  very  great  storm,  and  separated 
our  ships,  so  that  we  lost  the  sight  of  the  Moonshine. 

The  13  about  noon  (having  tried  all  the  night 
before  with  a  goose  wing)  we  set  sail,  and  within  two 
hours  after,  we  had  sight  of  the  Moonshine  again.  This 
day  we  departed  from  this  land. 

The  27  of  this  month  we  fell  with  sight  of  England. 
This  night  we  had  a  marvellous  storm  and  lost  the 
Moonshine. 

The  30  of  September  we  came  into  Dartmouth, 
where  we  found  the  Moonshine,  being  come  in  not 
two  hours  before. 


DAVIS.     SECOND  VOYAGE 
(By  HIMSELF) 

The  second  voyage  attempted  by  Master  John  Davis 
with  others,  for  the  discovery  of  the  North-west 
passage,  in  Anno  1586. 

The  7  day  of  May  I  departed  from  the  port  of 
Dartmouth  for  the  discovery  of  the  North-west  pas- 
sage, with  a  ship  of  an  hundred-and- twenty  tons  named 
the  Mermaid,  a  bark  of  60  tons  named  the  Sunshine, 
a  bark  of  35  tons  named  the  Moonshine,  and  a  pinnace 
of  10  tons  named  the  North  Star. 

And  the  15  of  June  I  discovered  land  in  the  lati- 
tude of  60  degrees,  and  in  longitude  from  the  meridian 
of  London  westward  47  degrees,  mightily  pestered 
with  ice  and  snow,  so  that  there  was  no  hope  of 
landing.  The  ice  lay  in  some  places  ten  leagues,  in 
some  twenty,  and  in  some  fifty  leagues  off  the  shore, 
so  that  we  were  constrained  to  bear  into  57  degrees 
to  double  the  same,  and  to  recover  a  free  sea,  which 
through  God's  favourable  mercy  we  at  length  obtained. 

The  29  of  June  after  many  tempestuous  storms  we 
again  discovered  land,  in  longitude  from  the  meridian 
of  London  58  degrees  30  minutes,  and  in  latitude  64, 
being  east  from  us.  Into  which  course,  sith  it  please 
God  by  contrary  winds  to  force  us,  I  thought  it  very 


Davis.     Second  Voyage  63 

necessary  to  bear  in  with  it,  and  there  to  set  up  our 
pinnace,  provided  in  the  Mermaid  to  be  our  scout 
for  this  discovery ;  and  so  much  the  rather,  because 
the  year  before  I  had  been  in  the  same  place,  and 
found  it  very  convenient  for  such  a  purpose,  well 
stored  with  float-wood,  and  possessed  by  a  people 
of  tractable  conversation  :  so  that  the  29  of  this  month 
we  arrived  within  the  isles  which  lay  before  this 
land,  lying  north-north-west,  and  south-south-east, 
we  know  not  how  far.  This  land  is  very  high  and 
mountainous,  having  before  it  on  the  west  side  a 
mighty  company  of  isles  full  of  fair  sounds,  and  harbours. 
This  land  was  very  little  troubled  with  snow,  and 
the  sea  altogether  void  of  ice. 

The  ships  being  within  the  sounds,  we  sent  our 
boats  to  search  for  shoal-water,  where  we  might 
anchor,  which  in  this  place  is  very  hard  to  find  ;  and 
as  the  boat  went  sounding  and  searching,  the  people 
of  the  country  having  espied  them,  came  in  their 
canoas  towards  them  with  many  shouts  and  cries. 
But  after  they  had  espied  in  the  boat  some  of  our 
company  that  were  the  year  before  here  with  us, 
they  presently  rowed  to  the  boat,  and  took  hold  on 
the  oar,  and  hung  about  the  boat  with  such  comfortable 
joy,  as  would  require  a  long  discourse  to  be  uttered. 
They  came  with  the  boats  to  our  ships,  making  signs 
that  they  knew  all  those  that  the  year  before  had  been 
with  them.  After  I  perceived  their  joy  and  small 
fear  of  us,  myself  with  the  merchants  and  others 
of  the  company  went  ashore,  bearing  with  me  twenty 
knives.  I  had  no  sooner  landed,  but  they  leapt  out 
of  their  canoas  and  came  running  to  me  and  the  rest, 
and  embraced  us  with  many  signs  of  hearty  welcome,. 


64  Davis.    Second  Voyage 

At  this  present  there  were  eighteen  of  them,  and 
to  each  of  them  I  gave  a  knife.  They  offered  skins 
to  me  for  reward,  but  I  made  signs  that  they  were 
not  sold,  but  given  them  of  courtesy  ;  and  so  dismissed 
them  for  that  time,  with  signs  that  they  should  return 
again  after  certain  hours. 

The  next  day  with  all  possible  speed  the  pinnace 
was  landed  upon  an  isle,  there  to  be  finished  to  serve 
our  purpose  for  the  discovery.  Which  isle  was  so  con- 
venient for  that  purpose,  as  that  we  were  very  well 
able  to  defend  ourselves  against  many  enemies.  During 
the  time  that  the  pinnace  was  there  setting  up,  the 
people  came  continually  unto  us,  sometime  an  hundred 
canoas  at  a  time,  sometime  forty,  fifty,  more  and  less, 
as  occasion  served.  They  brought  with  them  seal 
skins,  stag  skins,  white  hares,  seal  fish,  salmon  peel, 
small  cod,  dry  capelin,  with  other  fish,  and  birds  such 
as  the  country  did  yield. 

Myself  still  desirous  to  have  a  further  search 
of  this  place,  sent  one  of  the  ship-boats  to  one  part  of 
the  land,  and  myself  went  to  another  part  to  search 
for  the  habitation  of  this  people,  with  straight  command- 
ment that  there  should  be  no  injury  offered  to  any 
of  the  people,  neither  any  gun  shot. 

The  boats  that  went  from  me  found  the  tents 
of  the  people  made  with  seal  skins  set  up  upon  timber, 
wherein  they  found  great  store  of  dried  capelin,  being 
a  little  fish  no  bigger  than  a  pilchard  :  they  found 
bags  of  train  oil,  many  little  images  cut  in  wood, 
seal  skins  in  tan-tubs,  with  many  other  such  trifles, 
whereof  they  diminished  nothing. 

They  also  found  ten  miles  within  the  snowy  moun- 
tains a  plain  champaign  country,  with  earth  and  grass, 


Davis.    Second   Voyage  65 

such  as  our  moory  and  waste  grounds  of  England 
are.  They  went  up  into  a  river  (which  in  the  narrowest 
place  is  two  leagues  broad)  about  ten  leagues,  finding 
it  still  to  continue  they  knew  not  how  far.  But  I 
with  my  company  took  another  river,  which  although 
at  the  first  it  offered  a  large  inlet,  yet  it  proved  but 
a  deep  bay,  the  end  whereof  in  four  hours  I  attained ; 
and  there  leaving  the  boat  well  manned,  went  with 
the  rest  of  my  company  three  or  four  miles  into  the 
country,  but  found  nothing,  nor  saw  anything,  save 
only  gripes,  ravens,  and  small  birds,  as  larks  and 
linnets. 

The  third  of  July  I  manned  my  boat,  and  went 
with  fifty  canoas  attending  upon  me  up  into  another 
sound,  where  the  people  by  signs  willed  me  to  go, 
hoping  to  find  their  habitation.  At  length  they  made 
signs  that  I  should  go  into  a  warm  place  to  sleep. 
At  which  place  I  went  on  shore,  and  ascended  the  top 
of  a  high  hill  to  see  into  the  country,  but  perceiving 
my  labour  vain,  I  returned  again  to  my  boat,  the 
people  still  following  me  and  my  company,  very  diligent 
to  attend  us,  and  to  help  us  up  the  rocks,  and  likewise 
down.  At  length  I  was  desirous  to  have  our  men 
leap  with  them,  which  was  done,  but  our  men  did 
overleap  them  :  from  leaping  they  went  to  wrestling. 
We  found  them  strong  and  nimble,  and  to  have  skill 
in  wrestling,  for  they  cast  some  of  our  men  that  were 
good  wrestlers. 

The  fourth  of  July  we  launched  our  pinnace,  and 
had  forty  of  the  people  to  help  us,  which  they  did 
very  willingly.  At  this  time  our  men  again  wrestled 
with  them,  and  found  them  as  before,  strong  and 
skilf ul,  This  fourth  of  July  the  master  of  the  Mermaid 

A.  P.  5 


66  Davis.    Second  Voyage 

went  to  certain  islands  to  store  himself  with  wood, 
where  he  found  a  grave  with  divers  buried  in  it,  only 
covered  with  seal  skins,  having  a  cross  laid  over  them. 
The  people  are  of  good  stature,  well  in  body  proportioned, 
with  small  slender  hands  and  feet,  with  broad  visages, 
and  small  eyes,  wide  mouths,  the  most  part  unbearded, 
great  lips,  and  close  toothed.  Their  custom  is,  as 
often  as  they  go  from  us,  still  at  their  return  to  make 
a  new  truce,  in  this  sort.  Holding  his  hand  up  to  the 
sun,  with  a  loud  voice  he  crieth  "  Iliaout,"  and  striketh 
his  breast :  with  like  signs  being  promised  safety, 
he  giveth  credit.  These  people  are  much  given  to 
bleed,  and  therefore  stop  their  noses  with  deer's  hair, 
or  the  hair  of  an  elan.  They  are  idolaters  and  have 
images  great  store,  which  they  wear  about  them, 
and  in  their  boats,  which  we  suppose  they  worship. 
They  are  witches,  and  have  many  lands  of  enchant- 
ments, which  they  often  used ;  but  to  small  purpose, 
thanks  be  to  God. 

Being  among  them  at  shore  the  fourth  of  July, 
one  of  them,  making  a  long  oration,  began  to  kindle 
a  fire  in  this  manner.  He  took  a  piece  of  a  board 
wherein  was  a  hole  half  through :  into  that  hole 
he  puts  the  end  of  a  round  stick  like  unto  a  bedstaff, 
wetting  the  end  thereof  in  train,  and  in  fashion  of 
a  turner  with  a  piece  of  leather,  by  his  violent  motion 
doth  very  speedily  produce  fire.  Which  done,  with 
turfs  he  made  a  fire,  into  which  with  many  words 
and  strange  gestures  he  put  divers  things,  which 
we  supposed  to  be  a  sacrifice.  Myself  and  divers 
of  my  company  standing  by,  they  were  desirous  to 
have  me  go  into  the  smoke.  I  willed  them  likewise 
to  stand  in  the  smoke,  which  they  by  no  means  would 


Davis.    Second  Voyage  67 

do.  I  then  took  one  of  them,  and  thrust  him  into 
.  the  smoke,  and  willed  one  of  my  company  to  tread  out 
the  fire,  and  to  spurn  it  into  the  sea,  which  was  done 
to  show  them  that  we  did  contemn  their  sorcery. 
These  people  are  very  simple  in  all  their  conversation, 
but  marvellous  thievish,  especially  for  iron,  which 
they  have  in  great  account.  They  began  through 
our  lenity  to  show  their  vile  nature.  They  began  to 
cut  our  cables :  they  cut  away  the  Moonshine's  boat 
from  her  stern :  they  cut  our  cloth  where  it  lay  to 
air,  though  we  did  carefully  look  unto  it :  they  stole 
our  oars,  a  caliver,  a  boar-spear,  a  sword,  with  divers 
other  things.  Whereat  the  company  and  masters  being 
grieved,  for  our  better  security  desired  me  to  dis- 
solve this  new  friendship,  and  to  leave  the  company 
of  these  thievish  miscreants.  Whereupon  there  was 
a  caliver  shot  among  them,  and  immediately  upon 
the  same  a  falcon,  which  strange  noise  did  sore 
amaze  them,  so  that  with  speed  they  departed.  Not- 
withstanding, their  simplicity  is  such,  that  within 
ten  hours  after  they  came  again  to  us  to  entreat  peace  ; 
which  being  promised,  we  again  felLinto  a  great  league. 
They  brought  us  seal  skins,  and  salmon  peel ;  but 
seeing  iron,  they  could  in  no  wise  forbear  stealing. 
Which  when  I  perceived,  it  did  but  minister  unto  me 
an  occasion  of  laughter,  to  see  their  simplicity,  and 
I  willed  that  in  no  case  they  should  be  any  more  hardly 
used,  but  that  our  own  company  should  be  the  more 
vigilant  to  keep  their  things,  supposing  it  to  be  very 
hard  in  so  short  time  to  make  them  know  their  evils. 
They  eat  all  their  meat  raw:  they  live  most  upon 
fish :  they  drink  salt  water,  and  eat  grass  and  ice 
with  delight.  They  are  never  out  of  the  water,  but 

5-2 


68  Davis.    Second  Voyage 

live  in  the  nature  of  fishes,  save  only  when  dead  sleep 
taketh  them,  and  then  under  a  warm  rock  laying  his 
boat  upon  the  land,  he  lieth  down  to  sleep.  Their 
weapons  are  all  darts,  but  some  of  them  have  bow 
and  arrows  and  slings.  They  make  nets  to  take  their 
fish,  of  the  fin  of  a  whale.  They  do  all  their  things 
very  artificially  :  and  it  should  seem  that  these  simple 
thievish  islanders  have  war  with  those  of  the  main, 
for  many  of  them  are  sore  wounded,  which  wounds 
they  received  upon  the  mainland,  as  by  signs  they 
gave  us  to  understand.  We  had  among  them  copper 
ore,  black  copper,  and  red  copper.  They  pronounce 
their  language  very  hollow,  and  deep  in  the  throat. 

The  seventh  of  July,  being  very  desirous  to  search 
the  habitation  of  this  country.  I  went  myself  with 
our  new  pinnace  into  the  body  of  the  land,  thinking 
it  to  be  a  firm  continent ;  and  passing  up  a  very  large 
river,  a  great  flaw  of  wind  took  me,  whereby  we  were 
constrained  to  seek  succour  for  that  night.  Which 
being  had,  I  landed  with  the  most  part  of  my  company, 
and  went  to  the  top  of  a  high  mountain,  hoping  from 
thence  to  see  into,  the  country  :  but  the  mountains 
were  so  many  and  so  mighty  as  that  my  purpose  pre- 
vailed not.  Whereupon  I  again  returned  to  my  pinnace, 
and  willing  divers  of  my  company  to  gather  mussels 
for  my  supper,  whereof  in  this  place  there  was  great 
store,  myself  having  espied  a  very  strange  sight, 
especially  to  me  that  never  before  saw  the  like,  which 
was  a  mighty  whirlwind  taking  up  the  water  in  very 
great  quantity,  furiously  mounting  it  into  the  air. 
Which  whirlwind  was  not  for  a  puff  or  blast,  but 
continual,  for  the  space  of  three  hours,  with  very  little 
intermission.  Which  sith  it  was  in  the  course  that  I 


Davis.     Second  Voyage  69 

should  pass,  we  were  constrained  that  night  to  take 
up  our  lodging  under  the  rocks. 

The  next  morning  the  storm  being  broken  up, 
we  went  forward  in  our  attempt,  and  sailed  into  a 
mighty  great  river  directly  into  the  body  of  the  land ; 
and  in  brief,  found  it  to  be  no  firm  land,  but  huge, 
waste,  and  desert  isles  with  mighty  sounds,  and  inlets 
passing  between  sea  and  sea.  Whereupon  we  returned 
towards  our  ships,  and  landing  to  stop  a  flood,  we 
found  the  burial  of  these  miscreants.  We  found  of 
their  fish  in  bags,  plaice  and  capelin  dried,  of  which 
we  took  only  one  bag  and  departed.  The  ninth  of 
this  month  we  came  to  our  ships,  where  we  found 
the  people  desirous,  in  their  fashion,  of  friendship 
and  barter.  Our  mariners  complained  heavily  against 
the  people,  and  said  that  my  lenity  and  friendly 
using  of  them  gave  them  stomach  to  mischief  :  "  For 
they  have  stolen  an  anchor  from  us  :  they  have  cut  our 
cable  very  dangerously  :  they  have  cut  our  boats  from 
our  stern ;  and  now,  since  your  departure,  with  slings 
they  spare  us  not  with  stones  of  half  a  pound  weight : 
and  will  you  still  endure  these  injuries  ?  It  is  a  shame 
to  bear  them."  I  desired  them  to  be  content,  and 
said,  I  doubted  not  but  that  all  should  be  well.  The 
10  of  this  month  I  went  to  the  shore,  the  people 
following  me  in  their  canoas.  I  tolled  them  on  shore, 
and  used  them  with  much  courtesy,  and  then  departed 
aboard,  they  following  me  and  my  company.  I  gave 
some  of  them  bracelets,  and  caused  seven  or  eight 
of  them  to  come  aboard,  which  they  did  willingly, 
and  some  of  them  went  into  the  top  of  the  ship  ; 
and  thus  courteously  using  them,  I  let  them  depart. 
The  sun  was  no  sooner  down,  but  they  began  to  practise 


70  Davis.    Second  Voyage 

their  devilish  nature,  and  with  slings  threw  stones 
very  fiercely  into  the  Moonshine,  and  struck  one  of 
her  men  then  boatswain,  that  he  overthrew  withal. 
Whereat  being  moved,  I  changed  my  courtesy,  and 
grew  to  hatred.  Myself  in  my  own  boat  well  manned 
with  shot,  and  the  bark's  boat  likewise,  pursued  them, 
and  gave  them  divers  shot,  but  to  small  purpose,  by 
reason  of  their  swift  rowing  :  so  smally  content  we 
returned. 

The  11  of  this  month  there  came  five  of  them 
to  make  a  new  truce.  The  master  of  the  Admiral 
came  to  me  to  show  me  of  their  coming,  and  desired 
to  have  them  taken  and  kept  as  prisoners  until  we 
had  his  anchor  again.  But  when  he  saw  that  the  chief 
ringleader  and  master  of  mischief  was  one  of  the 
five,  he  then  was  vehement  to  execute  his  purpose, 
so  it  was  determined  to  take  him.  He  came  crying 
"  Iliaout,"  and  striking  his  breast  offered  a  pair  of 
gloves  to  sell :  the  master  offered  him  a  knife  for  them. 
So  two  of  them  came  to  us :  the  one  was  not  touched, 
but  the  other  was  soon  captive  among  us.  Then  we 
pointed  to  him  and  his  fellows  for  our  anchor,  which 
being  had,  we  made  signs  that  he  should  be  set  at 
liberty.  Within  one  hour  after  he  came  aboard  the 
wind  came  fair,  whereupon  we  weighed  and  set  sail, 
and  so  brought  the  fellow  with  us  :  one  of  his  fellows 
still  following  our  ship  close  aboard,  talked  with 
him  and  made  a  kind  of  lamentation,  we  still  using 
him  well  with  "  Iliaout,"  which  was  the  common 
course  of  courtesy.  At  length  this  fellow  aboard 
us  spake  four  or  five  words  unto  the  other  and  clapped 
his  two  hands  upon  his  face,  whereupon  the  other 
doing  the  like,  departed  as  we  suppose  with  heavy 


Davis.     Second  Voyage  71 

cheer.  We  judged  the  covering  of  his  face  with  his 
hands  and  bowing  of  his  body  down,  signified  his 
death.  At  length  he  became  a  pleasant  companion 
among  us.  I  gave  him  a  new  suit  of  frieze  after 
the  English  fashion,  because  I  saw  he  could  not  endure 
the  cold,  of  which  he  was  very  joyful.  He  trimmed 
up  his  darts,  and  all  his  fishing  tools,  and  would  make 
oakum,  and  set  his  hand  to  a  rope's  end  upon  occasion. 
He  lived  with  the  dry  capelin  that  I  took  when  I  was 
searching  in  the  pinnace,  and  did  'eat  dry  Newland 
fish. 

All  this  while,  God  be  thanked,  our  people  were 
in  very  good  health,  only  one  young  man  excepted, 
who  died  at  sea  the  fourteenth  of  this  month,  and  the 
fifteenth,  according  to  the  order  of  the  sea,  with  praise 
given  to  God  by  service,  was  cast  overboard. 

The  17  of  this  month  being  in  the  latitude  of 
63  degrees  8  minutes,  we  fell  upon  a  most  mighty 
and  strange  quantity  of  ice  in  one  entire  mass,  so 
big  as  that  we  knew  not  the  limits  thereof,  and  being 
withal  so  very  high  in  form  of  a  land,  with  bays  and 
capes  and  like  high  cliff-land,  as  that  we  supposed 
it  to  be  land,  and  therefore  sent  our  pinnace  off  to 
discover  it :  but  at  her  return  we  were  certainly 
informed  that  it  was  only  ice,  which  bred  great  admira- 
tion to  us  all  considering  the  huge  quantity  thereof, 
incredible  to  be  reported  in  truth  as  it  was,  and  there- 
fore I  omit  to  speak  any  further  thereof.  This  only 
I  think,  that  the  like  before  was  never  seen  :  and  in 
this  place  we  had  very  stickle  and  strong  currents. 

We  coasted  this  mighty  mass  of  ice  until  the 
30  of  July,  finding  it  a  mighty  bar  to  our  purpose. 
The  air  in  this  time  was  so  contagious  and  the  sea 


72  Davis.     Second  Voyage 

so  pestered  with  ice,  as  that  all  hope  was  banished 
of  proceeding  ;  for  the  24  of  July  all  our  shrouds, 
ropes,  and  sails  were  so  frozen,  and  compassed  with 
ice,  only  by  a  gross  fog,  as  seemed  to  me  more  than 
strange,  sith  the  last  year  I  found  this  sea  free  and 
navigable,  without  impediments. 

Our  men  through  this  extremity  began  to  grow 
sick  and  feeble,  and  withal  hopeless  of  good  success : 
whereupon  very  orderly,  with  good  discretion  they 
entreated  me  to  •  regard  the  state  of  this  business, 
and  withal  advised  me,  that  in  conscience  I  ought 
to  regard  the  safety  of  mine  own  life  with  the  preserva- 
tion of  theirs,  and  that  I  should  not  through  my  over- 
boldness  leave  their  widows  and  fatherless  children 
to  give  me  bitter  curses.  This  matter  in  conscience 
did  greatly  move  me  to  regard  their  estates  :  yet 
considering  the  excellency  of  the  business,  if  it  might 
be  attained,  the  great  hope  of  certainty  by  the  last 
year's  discovery,  and  that  there  was  yet  a  third  way 
not  put  in  practice,  I  thought  it  would  grow  to  my 
great  disgrace,  if  this  action  by  my  negligence  should 
grow  into  discredit.  Whereupon,  seeking  help  from 
God,  the  fountain  of  all  mercies,  it  pleased  His  divine 
Majesty  to  move  my  heart  to  prosecute  that  which 
I  hope  shall  be  to  His  glory,  and  to  the  contentation 
of  every  Christian  mind.  Whereupon,  falling  into 
consideration  that  the  Mermaid,  albeit  a  very  strong 
and  sufficient  ship,  yet  by  reason  of  her  burthen 
was  not  so  convenient  and  nimble  as  a  smaller  bark, 
especially  in  such  desperate  hazards :  further,  having 
in  account  her  great  charge  to  the  adventurers,  being 
at  £100  the  month,  and  that  in  doubtful  service  : 
all  the  premises  considered  with  divers  other  things, 


Davis.     Second  Voyage  73 

I  determined  to  furnish  the  Moonshine  with  revictualling 
and  sufficient  men,  and  to  proceed  in  this  action  as 
God  should  direct  me.  Whereupon  I  altered  our 
course  from  the  ice,  and  bare  east-south-east  to  recover 
the  next  shore  where  this  thing  might  be  performed. 
So  with  favourable  wind  it  pleased  God  that  the  first 
of  August  we  discovered  the  land  in  latitude  66  degrees 
33  minutes,  and  in  longitude  from  the  meridian  of 
London  70  degrees,  void  of  trouble,  without  snow 
or  ice. 

The  second  of  August  we  harboured  ourselves 
in  a  very  excellent  good  road,  where  with  all  speed 
we  graved  the  Moonshine,  and  re  victualled  her.  We 
searched  this  country  with  our  pinnace  while  the  bark 
was  trimming,  which  William  Eston  did.  He  found 
all  this  land  to  be  only  islands,  with  a  sea  on  the  east, 
a  sea  on  the  west,  and  a  sea  on  the  north.  In  this 
place  we  found  it  very  hot,  and  we  were  very  much 
troubled  with  a  fly  which  is  called  mosquito,  for  they 
did  sting  grievously.  The  people  of  this  place  at 
our  first  coming  in  caught  a  seal,  and  with  bladders 
fast  tied  to  him  sent  him  unto  us  with  the  flood,  so 
as  he  came  right  with  our  ships,  which  we  took  as 
a  friendly  present  from  them. 

The  fifth  of  August  I  went  with  the  two  masters 
and  others  to  the  top  of  a  hill,  and  by  the  way  William 
Eston  espied  three  canoas  lying  under  a  rock,  and 
went  unto  them.  There  were  in  them  skins,  darts, 
with  divers  superstitious  toys,  whereof  we  diminished 
nothing,  but  left  upon  every  boat  a  silk  point,  a  bullet 
of  lead,  and  a  pin.  The  next  day,  being  the  sixth 
of  August,  the  people  came  unto  us  without  fear, 
and  did  barter  with  us  for  skins,  as  the  other  people 


74  Davis.     Second  Voyage 

did.  They  differ  not  from  the  other,  neither  in  their 
canoas  nor  apparel,  yet  is  their  pronunciation  more 
plain  than  the  others,  and  nothing  hollow  in  the  throat. 
Our  savage  aboard  us  kept  himself  close,  and  made 
show  that  he  would  fain  have  another  companion. 
Thus  being  provided,  I  departed  from  this  land  the 
twelfth  of  August  at  six  of  the  clock  in  the  morning, 
where  I  left  the  Mermaid  at  an  anchor.  The  fourteenth, 
sailing  west  about  fifty  leagues,  we  discovered  land, 
being  in  latitude  66  degrees  19  minutes :  this  land 
is  70  leagues  from  the  other  from  whence  we  came. 
This  fourteenth  day  from  nine  o'clock  at  night  till 
three  o'clock  in  the  morning,  we  anchored  by  an 
island  of  ice,  twelve  leagues  off  the  shore,  being  moored 
to  the  ice. 

The  fifteenth  day  at  three  o'clock  in  the  morning 
we  departed  from  this  land  to  the  south,  and  the 
eighteenth  of  August  we  discovered  land  north-west 
from  us  in  the  morning,  being  a  very  fair  promontory, 
in  latitude  65  degrees,  having  no  land  on  the  south. 
Here  we  had  great  hope  of  a  through  passage. 

This  day  at  three  o'clock  in  the  afternoon  we  again 
discovered  land  south-west  and  by  south  from  us, 
where  at  night  we  were  becalmed.  The  nineteenth 
of  this  month  at  noon,  by  observation,  we  were  in 
64  degrees  20  minutes.  From  the  eighteenth  day  at 
noon  unto  the  nineteenth  at  noon,  by  precise  ordinary 
care,  we  had  sailed  15  leagues  south  and  by  west, 
yet  by  art  and  more  exact  observation,  we  found  our 
course  to  be  south-west,  so  that  we  plainly  perceived 
a  great  current  striking  to  the  west. 

This  land  is  nothing  in  sight  but  isles,  which  in- 
creaseth  our  hope.  This  nineteenth  of  August  at 


Davis.     Second  Voyage  75 

six  o'clock  in  the  afternoon,  it  began  to  snow,  and 
so  continued  all  night  with  foul  weather,  and  much 
wind,  so  that  we  were  constrained  to  lie  at  hull  all 
night  five  leagues  off  the  shore.  In  the  morning  being 
the  twentieth  of  August,  the  fog  and  storm  breaking 
up,  we  bare  in  with  the  land,  and  at  nine  o'clock 
in  the  morning  we  anchored  in  a  very  fair  and  safe 
road  and  locked  for  all  weathers.  At  ten  of  the  clock 
I  went  on  shore  to  the  top  of  a  very  high  hill,  where  I 
perceived  that  this  land  was  islands :  at  four  of  the 
clock  in  the  afternoon  we  weighed  anchor,  having  a 
fair  north-north-east  wind,  with  very  fair  weather :  at 
six  of  the  clock  we  were  clear  without  the  land,  and  so 
shaped  our  course  to  the  south,  to  discover  the  coast, 
whereby  the  passage  may  be  through  God's  mercy  found. 
We  coasted  this  land  till  the  eight  and  twentieth 
of  August,  finding  it  still  to  continue  towards  the  south, 
from  the  latitude  of  67  to  57  degrees.  We  found 
marvellous  great  store  of  birds,  gulls  and  mews, 
incredible  to  be  reported.  Whereupon  being  calm 
weather,  we  lay  one  glass  upon  the  lee,  to  prove  for 
fish,  in  which  space  we  caught  100  of  cod,  although 
we  were  but  badly  provided  for  fishing,  not  being 
our  purpose.  This  eight  and  twentieth  having  great 
distrust  of  the  weather,  we  arrived  in  a  very  fair  harbour 
in  the  latitude  of  56  degrees,  and  sailed  10  leagues 
into  the  same,  being  two  leagues  broad,  with  very 
fair  woods  on  both  sides  :  in  this  place  we  continued 
until  the  first  of  September,  in  which  time  we  had 
two  very  great  storms.  I  landed,  and  went  six  miles 
by  guess  into  the  country,  and  found  that  the  woods 
were  fir,  pine,  apple,  alder,  yew,  withy,  and  birch  : 
here  we  saw  a  black  bear.  This  place  yieldeth  great 


76  Davis.     Second  Voyage 

store  of  birds,  as  pheasant,  partridge,  Barbary  hens  or 
the  like,  wild  geese,  ducks,  blackbirds,  jays,  thrushes, 
with  other  kinds  of  small  birds.  Of  the  partridge  and 
pheasant  we  killed  great  store  with  bow  and  arrows  : 
in  this  place  at  the  harbour  mouth  we  found  great 
store  of  cod. 

The  first  of  September  at  ten  o'clock  we  set  sail, 
and  coasted  the  shore  with  very  fair  weather.  The 
third  day  being  calm,  at  noon  we  struck  sail,  and  let 
fall  a  kedge  anchor,  to  prove  whether  we  could  take 
any  fish,  being  in  latitude  54  degrees  30  minutes ; 
in  which  place  we  found  great  abundance  of  cod,  so 
that  the  hook  was  no  sooner  overboard,  but  presently 
a  fish  was  taken.  It  was  the  largest  and  the  best 
fed  fish  that  ever  I  saw,  and  divers  fishermen  that  were 
with  me  said  that  they  never  saw  a  more  suavle  or 
better  scull  of  fish  in  their  lives :  yet  had  they  seen 
great  abundance. 

The  fourth  of  September  at  five  o'clock  in  the 
afternoon  we  anchored  in  a  very  good  road  among  great 
store  of  isles,  the  country  lowland,  pleasant  and  very 
full  of  fair  woods.  To  the  north  of  this  place  eight 
leagues,  we  had  a  perfect  hope  of  the  passage,  finding 
a  mighty  great  sea  passing  between  two  lands  west, 
the  south  land  to  our  judgment  being  nothing  but  isles. 
We  greatly  desired  to  go  into  this  sea,  but  the  wind  was 
directly  against  us.  We  anchored  in  four  fathom  fine 
sand.  In  this  place  is  fowl  and  fish  mighty  store. 

The  sixth  of  September  having  a  fair  north-north- 
west wind,  having  trimmed  our  bark  we  purposed  to 
depart,  and  sent  five  of  our  sailer's  young  men  ashore 
to  an  island,  to  fetch  certain  fish  which  we  purposed 
to  weather,  and  therefore  left  it  all  night  covered 


Davis.     Second  Voyage  77 

upon  the  isle.  The  brutish  people  of  this  country 
lay  secretly  lurking  in  the  wood,  and  upon  the  sudden 
assaulted  our  men :  which  when  we  perceived,  we 
presently  let  slip  our  cables  upon  the  hawse,  and  under 
our  foresail  bare  into  the  shore,  and  with  all  expedition 
discharged  a  double  musket  upon  them  twice,  at 
the  noise  whereof  they  fled.  Notwithstanding,  to  our 
very  great  grief,  two  of  our  men  were  slain  with  their 
arrows,  and  two  grievously  wounded,  of  whom  at 
this  present  we  stand  in  very  great  doubt.  Only  one 
escaped  by  swimming,  with  an  arrow  shot  through  his 
arm.  These  wicked  miscreants  never  offered  parley  or 
speech,  but  presently  executed  their  cursed  fury. 

This  present  evening  it  pleased  God  further  to  in- 
crease our  sorrows  with  a  mighty  tempestuous  storm, 
the  wind  being  north-north-east,  which  lasted  unto  the 
tenth  of  this  month  very  extreme.  We  unrigged 
our  ship,  and  purposed  to  cut  down  our  masts.  The 
cable  of  our  sheet-anchor  brake  so  that  we  only  expected 
to  be  driven  on  shore  among  these  cannibals  for  their 
prey.  Yet  in  this  deep  distress  the  mighty  mercy 
of  God,  when  hope  was  past,  gave  us  succour,  and  sent 
us  a  fair  lee,  so  as  we  recovered  our  anchor  again, 
and  new  moored  our  ship  :  where  we  saw  that  God 
manifestly  delivered  us ;  for  the  strands  of  one  of 
our  cables  were  broken,  and  we  only  rode  by  an  old 
junk.  Thus  being  freshly  moored  a  new  storm  arose, 
the  wind  being  west-north-west,  very  forcible,  which 
lasted  unto  the  tenth  day  at  night. 

The  eleventh  day  with  a  fair  west-north-west 
wind  we  departed  with  trust  in  God's  mercy,  shaping 
our  course  for  England,  and  arrived  in  the  West  country 
in  the  beginning  of  October. 


DAVIS.     THIRD  VOYAGE 

The  third  voyage  north-westward,  made  by  Master 
John  Davis,  gentleman,  as  chief  captain  and  pilot 
general,  for  the  discovery  of  a  passage  to  the  isles 
of  the  Moluccas,  or  the  coast  of  China,  in  the 
year  1587.  Written  by  Master  John  Jane. 

May 

The  19  of  this  present  month  about  midnight  we 
weighed  our  anchors,  set  sail,  and  departed  from 
Dartmouth  with  two  barks  and  a  clincher,  the  one 
named  the  Elizabeth  of  Dartmouth,  the  other  the 
Sunshine  of  London,  and  the  clincher  called  the  Helen 
of  London :  thus  in  God's  name  we  set  forwards 
with  the  wind  at  north-east  a  good  fresh  gale.  About 
three  hours  after  our  departure,  the  night  being  some- 
what thick  with  darkness,  we  had  lost  the  pinnace  : 
the  captain  imagining  that  the  men  had  run  away 
with  her,  willed  the  master  of  the  Sunshine  to  stand 
to  seawards,  and  see  if  we  could  descry  them,  we 
bearing  in  with  the  shore  for  Plymouth.  At  length 
we  descried  her,  bare  with  her,  and  demanded  what 
the  cause  was  :  they  answered  that  the  tiller  of  their 
helm  was  burst.  So  shaping  our  course  west-south- 
west, we  went  forward,  hoping  that  a  hard  beginning 
would  make  a  good  ending,  yet  some  of  us  were  doubtful 
of  it,  falling  in  reckoning  that  she  was  a  clincher  ; 
nevertheless  we  put  our  trust  in  God. 


Davis.     Third  Voyage  79 

The  21  we  met  with  the  Red  Lion  of  London, 
which  came  from  the  coast  of  Spain,  which  was  afraid 
that  we  had  been  men-of-war;  but  we  hailed  them, 
and  after  a  little  conference,  we  desired  the  master 
to  carry  our  letters  for  London  directed  to  my  uncle 
Sanderson,  who  promised  us  a  safe  delivery.  And 
after  we  had  heaved  them  a  lead  and  a  line,  where- 
unto  we  had  made  fast  our  letters,  before  they  could 
get  them  into  the  ship,  they  fell  into  the  sea,  and  so 
all  our  labour  and  theirs  also  was  lost ;  notwith- 
standing they  promised  to  certify  our  departure  at 
London,  and  so  we  departed,  and  the  same  day  we 
had  sight  of  Scilly. 

June 

The  first  six  days  we  had  fair  weather  :  after  that 
for  five  days  we  had  fog  and  rain,  the  wind  being 
south.  The  12  we  had  clear  weather.  The  mariners 
in  the  Sunshine  and  the  master  could  not  agree  : 
the  mariners  would  go  on  their  voyage  a-fishing, 
because  the  year  began  to  waste  :  the  master  would 
not  depart  till  he  had  the  company  of  the  Elizabeth. 
Whereupon  the  master  told  our  captain  that  he  was 
afraid  his  men  would  shape  some  contrary  course 
while  he  was  asleep,  and  so  he  should  lose  us.  At 
length  after  much  talk  and  many  threatenings,  they 
were  content  to  bring  us  to  the  land  which  we  looked 
for  daily. 

The  14  day  we  discovered  land  at  five  of  the  clock 
in  the  morning,  being  very  great  and  high  mountains, 
the  tops  of  the  hills  being  covered  with  snow. 

The  16  we  came  to  an  anchor  about  four  or  five 
of  the  clock  after  noon.  The  people  came  presently 


80  Davis.     Third  Voyage 

to  us  after  the  old  manner,  with  'crying  "  Iliaout  "  and 
showing  us  seals'  skins.  The  17  we  began  to  set  up 
the  pinnace  that  Pearson  framed  at  Dartmouth,  with 
the  boards  which  he  brought  from  London. 

The  18  Pearson  and  the  carpenters  of  the  ships 
began  to  set  on  the  planks.  The  19  as  we  went  about 
an  island,  were  found  black  pumice  stones,  and  salt 
kerned  on  the  rocks,  very  white  and  glistering.  This 
day  also  the  master  of  the  Sunshine  took  of  the  people 
a  very  strong  lusty  young  fellow. 

The  20  about  two  of  the  clock  in  the  morning, 
the  savages  came  to  the  island  where  our  pinnace 
was  built  ready  to  be  launched,  and  tore  the  two 
upper  strakes,  and  carried  them  away  only  for  the 
love  of  the  iron  in  the  boards.  While  they  were  about 
this  practice,  we  manned  the  Elizabeth's  boat  to  go 
ashore  to  them.  Our  men  being  either  afraid  or  amazed, 
were  so  long  before  they  came  to  shore,  that  our  captain 
willed  them  to  stay,  and  made  the  gunner  give  fire 
to  a  saker,  and  laid  the  piece  level  with  the  boat 
which  the  savages  had  turned  on  the  one  side,  because 
we  should  not  hurt  them  with  our  arrows ;  and  made 
the  boat  their  bulwark  against  the  arrows  which  we 
shot  at  them.  Our  gunner  having  made  all  things 
ready,  gave  fire  to  the  piece,  and  fearing  to  hurt  any 
of  the  people,  and  regarding  the  owner's  profit,  thought 
belike  he  would  save  a  saker's  shot,  doubting  we  should 
have  occasion  to  fight  with  men-of-war,  and  so  shot 
off  the  saker  without  a  bullet.  We  looking  still  when 
the  savages  that  were  hurt  should  run  away  without 
legs,  at  length  we  could  perceive  never  a  man  hurt, 
but  all  having  their  legs  could  carry  away  their  bodies. 
We  had  no  sooner  shot  off  the  piece,  but  the  master 


Davis.     Third  Voyage  81 

of  the  Sunshine  manned  his  boat,  and  came  rowing 
toward  the  island,  the  very  sight  of  whom  made  each 
of  them  take  that  he  had  gotten,  and  flee  away  as 
fast  as  they  could  to  another  island  about  two  miles 
off,  where  they  took  the  nails  out  of  the  timber, 
and  left  the  wood  on  the  isle.  When  we  came  on  shore, 
and  saw  how  they  had  spoiled  the  boat,  after  much 
debating  of  the  matter,  we  agreed  that  the  Elizabeth 
should  have  her  to  fish  withal :  whereupon  she  was 
presently  carried  aboard,  and  stowed. 

Now  after  this  trouble,  being  resolved  to  depart 
with  the  first  wind,  there  fell  out  another  matter 
worse  than  all  the  rest,  and  that  was  in  this  manner. 
John  Churchyard,  one  whom  our  captain  had  appointed 
as  pilot  in  the  pinnace,  came  to  our  captain,  and  Master 
Bruton,  and  told  them  that  the  good  ship  which  we 
must  all  hazard  our  lives  in,  had  three  hundred  strokes 
at  one  time  as  she  rode  in  the  harbour.  This  disquieted 
us  all  greatly,  and  many  doubted  to  go  in  her.  At 
length  our  captain,  by  whom  we  were  all  to  be  governed, 
determined  rather  to  end  his  life  with  credit,  than  to 
return  with  infamy  and  disgrace,  and  so  being  all 
agreed,  we  purposed  to  live  and  die  together,  and 
committed  ourselves  to  the  ship.  Now  the  21, 
having  brought  all  our  things  aboard,  about  eleven 
or  twelve  of  the  clock  at  night  we  set  sail  and 
departed  from  those  isles,  which  lie  in  64  degrees 
of  latitude,  our  ships  being  all  now  at  sea,  and  we 
shaping  our  course  to  go,  coasting  the  land  to  the 
northwards  upon  the  eastern  shore,  (which  we  called 
the  shore  of  our  merchants,  because  there  we  met 
with  people  which  trafficked  with  us) ;  but  here  we 
were  not  without  doubt  of  our  ship. 

A.  P.  6 


82  Davis.     Third  Voyage 

The  24  being  in  67  degrees  and  40  minutes,  we 
had  great  store  of  whales,  and  a  kind  of  sea-birds 
which  the  mariners  call  cortinous.  This  day  about 
six  of  the  clock  at  night,  we  espied  two  of  the 
country  people  at  sea,  thinking  at  the  first  they  had 
been  two  great  seals,  until  we  saw  their  oars  glistering 
with  the  sun.  They  came  rowing  towards  us,  as  fast 
as  they  could,  and  when  they  came  within  hearing, 
they  held  up  their  oars,  and  cried  "  Iliaout,"  making 
many  signs  ;  and  at  last  they  came  to  us,  giving  us 
birds  for  bracelets,  and  of  them  I  had  a  dart  with  a 
bone  in  it,  or  a  piece  of  unicorn's  horn,  as  I  did  judge. 
This  dart  he  made  store  of,  but  when  he  saw  a  knife, 
he  let  it  go,  being  more  desirous  of  the  knife  than  of 
his  dart.  These  people  continued  rowing  after  our 
ship  the  space  of  three  hours. 

The  25  in  the  morning,  at  seven  of  the  clock,  we 
descried  30  savages  rowing  after  us,  being  by  judg- 
ment 10  leagues  off  from  the  shore.  They  brought 
us  salmon  peels,  birds,  and  capelin,  and  we  gave  them 
pins,  needles,  bracelets,  nails,  knives,  bells,  looking- 
glasses,  and  other  small  trifles ;  and  for  a  knife,  a  nail 
or  a  bracelet  (which  they  call  ponigmah),  they  would 
sell  their  boat,  coats,  or  anything  they  had,  although 
they  were  far  from  the  shore.  We  had  but  few  skins 
of  them,  about  20,  but  they  made  signs  to  us  that 
if  we  would  go  to  the  shore,  we  should  have  more 
store  of  chichsanege :  they  stayed  with  us  till  1 1  of 
the  clock,  at  which  time  we  went  to  prayer,  and  they 
departed  from  us. 

The  28  and  29  were  foggy  with  clouds,  the  30  day 
we  took  the  height,  and  found  ourselves  in  72  degrees 
and  12  minutes  of  latitude  both  at  noon  and  at  night, 


Davis.     Third  Voyage  83 

the  sun  being  5  degrees  above  the  horizon.  At  mid- 
night the  compass  set  to  the  variation  of  28  degrees 
to  the  westward.  Now  having  coasted  the  land,  which 
we  called  London  Coast,  from  the  21  of  this  present, 
till  the  30,  the  sea  open  all  to  the  westwards  and 
northwards,  the  land  on  starboard  side  east  from  us, 
the  wind  shifted  to  the  north,  whereupon  we  left  that 
shore,  naming  the  same  Hope  Sanderson,  and  shaped 
our  course  west,  and  ran  40  leagues  and  better  with- 
out the  sight  of  any  land. 

July 

The  second  of  July  we  fell  with  a  mighty  bank 
of  ice  west  from  us,  lying  north  and  south,  which 
bank  we  would  gladly  have  doubled  out  to  the  north- 
wards, but  the  wind  would  not  suffer  us,  so  that  we 
were  fain  to  coast  it  to  the  southwards,  hoping  to 
double  it  out,  that  we  might  have  run  so  far  west 
till  we  had  found  land,  or  else  to  have  been  thoroughly 
resolved  of  our  pretended  purpose. 

The  3  we  fell  with,  the  ice  again,  and  putting  off 
from  it,  we  sought  to  the  northwards,  but  the  wind 
crossed  us. 

The  12  we  coasted  again  the  ice,  having  the  wind 
at  north-north-west.  The  13  bearing  off  from  the  ice, 
we  determined  to  go  with  the  shore  and  come  to  an 
anchor,  and  to  stay  five  or  six  days  for  the  dissolving 
of  the  ice,  hoping  that  the  sea  continually  beating  it, 
and  the  sun,  with  the  extreme  force  of  heat  which  it 
had,  always'  shining  upon  it,  would  make  a  quick 
dispatch,  that  we  might  have  a  further  search  upon 
the  western  shore.  Now  when  we  were  come  to  the 

6—2 


84  Davis.     Third  Voyage 

eastern  coast,  the  water  something  deep,  and  some 
of  our  company  fearful  withal,  we  durst  not  come 
to  an  anchor,  but  bare  off  into  the  sea  again.  The 
poor  people  seeing  us  go  away  again,  came  rowing 
after  us  into  the  sea,  the  waves  being  somewhat 
lofty.  We  trucked  with  them  for  a  few  skins  and 
darts,  and  gave  them  beads,  nails,  pins,  needles,  and 
cards,  they  pointing  to  the  shore,  as  though  they  would 
show  us  some  great  friendship  :  but  we  little  regarding 
their  courtesy,  gave  them  the  gentle  farewell,  and  so 
departed. 

The  19  at  one  o'clock  after  noon,  we  had  sight  of 
the  land  which  we  called  Mount  Raleigh,  and  at  12  of 
the  clock  at  night,  we  were  thwart  the  straits  which 
we  discovered  the  first  year.  The  20  we  traversed  in 
the  mouth  of  the  strait,  the  wind  being  at  west,  with 
fair  and  clear  weather.  The  21  and  22  we  coasted  the 
northern  coast  of  the  straits.  The  23  having  sailed 
threescore  leagues  north-west  into  the  straits,  at  two 
o'clock  after  noon  we  anchored  among  many  isles  in 
the  bottom  of  the  gulf,  naming  the  same  The  Earl  of 
Cumberland's  Isles,  where  riding  at  anchor,  a  whale 
passed  by  our  ship  and  went  west  in  among  the  isles. 
Here  the  compass  set  at  30  degrees  westward  variation. 
The  23  we  departed,  shaping  our  course  south-east  to 
recover  the  sea.  The  25  we  were  becalmed  in  the 
bottom  of  the  gulf,  the  air  being  extreme  hot.  Master 
Bruton  and  some  of  the  mariners  went  on  shore  to 
course  dogs,  where  they  found  many  graves,  and  train 
spilt  on  the  ground,  the  dogs  being  so  fat  that  they 
were  scant  able  to  run. 

The  26  we  had  a  pretty  storm,  the  wind  being  at 
south-east.  The  27  and  28  were  fair.  The  29  we  were 


Davis.     Third  Voyage  85 

clear  out  of  the  straits,  having  coasted  the  south  shore, 
and  this  day  at  noon  we  were  in  62  degrees  of  latitude. 
The  30  in  the  afternoon  we  coasted  a  bank  of  ice,  which 
lay  on  the  shore,  and  passed  by  a  great  bank  or  inlet, 
which  lay  between  63  and  62  degrees  of  latitude,  which 
we  called  Lumley's  Inlet.  We  had  oftentimes,  as  we 
sailed  alongst  the  coast,  great  ruts,  the  water  as  it  were 
whirling  and  overfalling,  as  if  it  were  the  fall  of  some 
great  water  through  a  bridge. 

The  31  as  we  sailed  by  a  headland,  which  we  named 
Warwick's  Foreland,  we  fell  into  one  of  those  over- 
falls with  a  fresh  gale  of  wind,  and  bearing  all  our 
sails,  we  looking  upon  an  island  of  ice  between  us 
and  the  shore,  had  thought  that  our  bark  did  make 
no  way,  which  caused  us  to  take  marks  on  the  shore. 
At  length  we  perceived  ourselves  to  go  very  fast, 
and  the  island  of  ice,  which  we  saw  before,  was  carried 
very  forcibly  with  the  set  of  the  current  faster  than 
our  ship  went.  This  day  and  night  we  passed  by  a 
very  great  gulf,  the  water  whirling  and  roaring  as 
it  were  the  meetings  of  tides. 

August 

The  first  of  August  having  coasted  a  bank  of  ice 
which  was  driven  out  at  the  mouth  of  this  gulf,  we 
fell  with  the  southermost  cape  of  the  gulf,  which 
we  named  Chidley's  Cape,  which  lay  in  61  degrees 
and  10  minutes  of  latitude.  The  12  we  saw  five 
deer  on  the  top  of  an  island,  called  by  us  Darcey's 
Island.  And  we  hoised  out  our  boat,  and  went 
ashore  to  them,  thinking  to  have  killed  some  of  them. 
But  when  we  came  on  shore,  and  had  coursed  them 


86  Davis.     Third  Voyage 

twice  about  the  island,  they  took  the  sea  and  swam 
towards  islands  distant  from  that  three  leagues. 
When  we  perceived  that  they  had  taken  the  sea, 
we  gave  them  over,  because  our  boat  was  so  small 
that  it  could  not  carry  us,  and  row  after  them,  they 
swam  so  fast  :  but  one  of  them  was  as  big  as  a  good 
pretty  cow,  and  very  fat,  their  feet  as  big  as  ox  feet. 
Here  upon  this  island  I  killed  with  my  piece  a  gray 
hare. 

The  13  in  the  morning  we  saw  three  or  four  white 
bears,  but  durst  not  go  on  shore  to  them  for  lack  of 
a  good  boat.  This  day  we  struck  a  rock  seeking  for 
an  harbour,  and  received  a  leak :  and  this  day  we  were 
in  54  degrees  of  latitude. 

The  14  we  stopped  our  leak  in  a  storm  not  very 
outrageous,  at  noon. 

The  15  being  almost  in  52  degrees  of  latitude, 
and  not  finding  our  ships,  nor  (according  to  their 
promise)  any  kind  of  mark,  token,  or  beacon,  which 
we  willed  them  to  set  up,  (and  they  protested  to  do 
so  upon  every  headland,  island,  or  cape,  within  twenty 
leagues  every  way  off  from  their  fishing  place,  which 
our  captain  appointed  to  be  between  54  and  55  degrees) , 
this  15,  I  say,  we  shaped  our  course  homewards  for 
England,  having  in  our  ship  but  little  wood,  and 
half  a  hogshead  of  fresh  water.  Our  men  were  very 
willing  to  depart,  and  no  man  more  forward  than 
Pearson,  for  he  feared  to  be  put  out  of  his  office  of 
stewardship  ;  but  because  every  man  was  so  willing  to 
depart,  we  consented  to  return  for  our  own  country  : 
and  so  we  had  the  16  fair  weather,  with  the  wind  at 
south-west. 

The   17  we  met  a  ship  at  sea,  and  as  far  as  we 


Davis.     Third  Voyage  87 

could  judge  it  was  a  Biscay  an.  We  thought  she  went 
a-fishing  for  whales;  for  in  52  degrees  or  thereabout 
we  saw  very  many. 

The  18  was  fair,  with  a  good  gale  at  west. 

The  19  fair  also,  with  much  wind  at  west  and  by 
south. 

And  thus,  after  much  variable  weather  and  change 
of  winds,  we  arrived  the  15  of  September  in  Dart- 
mouth, anno  1587,  giving  thanks  to  God  for  our  safe 
arrival. 


HUDSON.     LAST  VOYAGE 

(FoR  THE  DISCOVERY  OF  THE  NORTH  WEST 
PASSAGE)  1610 

(BY  ABACUK  PuicKETT)1 

[Sailing  in  one  ship  only,  the  Discovery,  about  the 
middle  of  April,  1610,  they  reached  Greenland  early 
in  June,  touching  at  Iceland  on  the  way.  From 
Greenland  they  sailed  to  the  west,  reached  Hudson 
Strait  towards  the  end  of  June,  and  entered  Hudson 
Bay  (called  by  Hudson  "The  Bay  of  God's  Great 
Mercies")  close  to  Cape  Wolstenholme  in  the  beginning 
of  August.  For  three  months  they  explored  the 
southern  part  of  the  Bay,  and  there  they  were  obliged 
to  winter,  the  ship  being  frozen  in  by  November  10. 
They  had  a  scanty  supply  of  provisions;  there  had 
already  been  signs  of  mutiny,  and  Hudson  had  dis- 
placed his  mate  Robert  Juet  and  the  boatswain 
Clement,  appointing  in  their  stead  Robert  Bylot 
(who  became  afterwards  a  well-known  Arctic  explorer) 
and  William  Wilson.] 

1  It  should  be  borne  in  mind,  in  reading  Prickett's  narrative,  with  its 
hazy  geographical  details,  that  it  was  written  with  a  view  to  white- 
washing the  mutineers,  who  had  saved  his  life  for  this  purpose,  rather 
than  to  giving  an  account  of  the  voyage.  Dead  men  tell  no  tales,  arid 
so  he  throws  part  of  the  blame  for  the  mutiny  on  Hudson  himself,  but 
the  greater  part  on  Greene  and  the  others  who  had  never  returned .  The 
survivors,  including  himself,  are  free  from  guilt. 


Hudson.     Last  Voyage 


89 


We  were  victualled  for  six  months  in  good  propor- 
tion, and  of  that  which  was  good  :  if  our  master  would 
have  had  more,  he  might  have  had  it  at  home  and  in 
other  places.  Here  we  were  now,  and  therefore  it 
behoved  us  so  to  spend,  that  we  might  have  (when 


Hudson  Bay  and  its  approaches 

time  came)  to  bring  us  to  the  capes  where  the  fowl 
bred,  for  that  was  all  the  hope  we  had  to  bring  us 
home.  Wherefore  our  master  took  order,  first  for 
the  spending  of  that  we  had,  and  then  to  increase  it, 
by  propounding  a  reward  to  them  that  killed  either 
beast,  fish,  or  fowl,  as  in  his  journal  you  have  seen. 


90  Hudson.     Last  Voyage 

About  the  middle  of  this  month  of  November,  died, 
John  Williams,  our  gunner.  God  pardon  the  master's 
uncharitable  dealing  with  this  man.  Now  for  that 
I  am  come  to  speak  of  him,  out  of  whose  ashes  (as  it 
were)  that  unhappy  deed  grew,  which  brought  a  scandal 
upon  all  that  are  returned  home,  and  upon  the  action 
itself,  the  multitude  (like  the  dog)  running  after  the 
stone,  but  not  at  the  caster:  therefore,  not  to  wrong 
the  living  nor  slander  the  dead,  I  will  (by  the  leave  of 
God)  deliver  the  truth  as  near  as  I  can. 

You  shah1  understand  that  our  master  kept  (in 
his  house  at  London)  a  young  man,  named  Henry 
Greene,  born  in  Kent,  of  worshipful  parents,  but  by 
his  lewd  life  and  conversation  he  had  lost  the  good  will 
of  all  his  friends,  and  had  spent  all  that  he  had.  This 
man  our  master  would  have  to  sea  with  him,  because 
he  could  write  well.  Our  master  gave  him  meat,  and 
drink,  and  lodging,  and  by  means  of  one  Master  Venson, 
with  much  ado  got  four  pounds  of  his  mother  to  buy  him 
clothes,  wherewith  Master  Venson  would  not  trust 
him  ;  but  saw  it  laid  out  himself.  This  Henry  Greene 
was  not  set  down  in  the  owners'  book,  nor  any  wages 
made  for  him.  So  Henry  Greene  stood  upright,  and 
very  inward  with  the  master,  and  was  a  serviceable 
man  every  way  for  manhood :  but  for  religion  he 
would  say,  he  was  clean  paper,  whereon  he  might 
write  what  he  would.  Now  when  our  gunner  was 
dead,  and  (as  the  order  is  in  such  cases)  if  the  company 
stand  in  need  of  anything  that  belonged  to  the  man 
deceased,  then  is  it  brought  to  the  mainmast,  and 
there  sold  to  them  that  will  give  most  for  the  same. 
This  gunner  had  a  gray  cloth  gown,  which  Greene 
prayed  the  master  to  friend  him  so  much,  as  to  let  him 


Hudson.     Last  Voyage  91 

have  it,  paying  for  it  as  another  would  give.  The  master 
saith  he  should,  and  thereupon  he  answered  some, 
that  sought  to  have  it,  that  Greene  should  have  it. 
and  none  else,  and  so  it  rested. 

Now  out  of  season  and  time  the  master  calleth  the 
carpenter  to  go  in  hand  with  a  house  on  shore,  which 
at  the  beginning  our  master  would  not  hear,  when  it 
might  have  been  done.  The  carpenter  told  him,  that 
the  snow  and  frost  were  such,  as  he  neither  could  nor 
would  go  in  hand  with  such  work.  Which  when  our 
master  heard,  he  ferreted  him  out  of  his  cabin  to  strike 
him,  calling  him  by  many  foul  names,  and  threatening 
to  hang  him.  The  carpenter  told  him  that  he  knew 
what  belonged  to  his  place  better  than  himself,  and 
that  he  was  no  house  carpenter.  So  this  passed,  and 
the  house  was  (after)  made  with  much  labour,  but  to 
no  end.  The  next  day,  after  the  master  and  the 
carpenter  fell  out,  the  carpenter  took  his  piece  and 
Henry  Greene  with  him ;  for  it  was  an  order  that  none 
should  go  out  alone,  but  one  with  a  piece,  and  another 
with  a  pike.  This  did  move  the  master  so  much  the 
more  against  Henry  Greene,  that  Robert  Bylot,  his 
mate,  must  have  the  gown,  and  had  it  delivered  unto 
him.  Which  when  Henry  Greene  saw,  he  challenged 
the  master's  promise ;  but  the  master  did  so  rail  on 
Greene,  with  so  many  words  of  disgrace,  telling  him 
that  all  his  friends  would  not  trust  him  with  twenty 
shillings,  and  therefore  why  should  he  ?  As  for  wages 
he  had  none,  nor  none  should  have,  if  he  did  not  please 
him  well.  Yet  the  master  had  promised  him  to  make 
his  wages  as  good  as  any  man's  in  the  ship;  and  to 
have  him  one  of  the  Prince's  guard  when  we  came 
home.  But  vou  shall  see  how  the  devil  out  of  this 


92  Hudson.    Last  Voyage 

so  wrought  with  Greene,  that  he  did  the  master  what 
mischief  he  could,  in  seeking  to  discredit  him,  and  to 
thrust  him  and  many  other  honest  men  out  of  the  ship 
in  the  end.  To  speak  of  all  our  trouble  in  this  time 
of  winter  (which  was  so  cold,  as  it  lamed  the  most  of 
our  company,  and  myself  do  yet  feel  it)  would  be  too 
tedious. 

But  I  must  not  forget  to  shew  how  mercifully  God 
dealt  with  us  in  this  time.  For  the  space  of  three  months 
we  had  such  store  of  fowl  of  one  kind  (which  were 
partridges  as  white  as  milk),  that  we  killed  above  an 
hundred  dozen,  besides  others  of  sundry  sorts :  for  all 
was  fish  that  came  to  the  net.  The  spring  coming,  this 
fowl  left  us  :  yet  they  were  with  us  all  the  extreme  cold. 
Then  in  their  places  came  divers  sort  of  other  fowl,  as 
swan,  geese,  duck,  and  teal,  but  hard  to  come  by. 
Our  master  hoped  they  would  have  bred  in  those 
broken  grounds,  but  they  do  not;  but  came  from  the 
south,  and  flew  to  the  north,  further  than  we  were 
this  voyage.  Yet  if  they  be  taken  short  with  the  wind 
at  north,  or  north-west,  or  north-east,  then  they  fall 
and  stay  till  the  wind  serve  them,  and  then  fly  to  the 
north.  Now  in  time  these  fowls  are  gone,  and  few  or 
none  to  be  seen.  Then  we  went  into  the  woods,  hills, 
and  valleys,  for  all  things  that  had  any  shew  of  sub- 
stance in  them,  how  vile  soever:  the  moss  of  the 
ground,  than  the  which  I  take  the  powder  of  a  post  to 
be  much  better,  and  the  frog  (in  his  engendering  time 
as  loathsome  as  a  toad)  was  not  spared.  But  amongst 
the  divers  sorts  of  buds,  it  pleased  God  that  Thomas 
Woodhouse  brought  home  a  bud  of  a  tree  full  of  a 
turpentine  substance.  Of  this  our  surgeon  made  a 
decoction  to  drink,  and  applied  the  buds  hot  to  them 


Hudson.     Last  Voyage  93 

that  were  troubled  with  ache  in  any  part  of  their 
bodies;  and  for  my  part,  I  confess,  I  received  great 
and  present  ease  of  my  pain. 

About  this  time,  when  the  ice  began  to  break  out 
of  the  bays,  there  came  a  savage  to  our  ship,  as  it  were 
to  see  and  to  be  seen,  being  the  first  that  we  had  seen 
in  all  this  time:  whom  our  master  entreated  well, 
and  made  much  of  him,  promising  unto  himself  great 
matters  by  his  means,  and  therefore  would  have  all 
the  knives  and  hatchets  (which  any  man  had)  to  his 
private  use,  but  received  none,  but  from  John  King, 
the  carpenter,  and  myself.  To  this  savage  our  master 
gave  a  knife,  a  looking-glass,  and  buttons,  who  received 
them  thankfully,  and  made  signs  that  after  he  had 
slept  he  would  come  again,  which  he  did.  When  he 
came  he  brought  with  him  a  sled,  which  he  drew  after 
him,  and  upon  it  two  deer  skins  and  two  beaver  skins. 
He  had  a  scrip  under  his  arm,  out  of  which  he  drew 
those  things  which  the  master  had  given  him.  He 
took  the  knife,  and  laid  it  upon  one  of  the  beaver  skins, 
and  his  glasses  and  buttons  upon  the  other,  and  so 
gave  them  to  the  master,  who  received  them ;  and  the 
savage  took  those  things  which  the  master  had  given 
him,  and  put  them  up  into  his  scrip  again.  Then  the 
master  shewed  him  an  hatchet,  for  which  he  would 
have  given  the  master  one  of  his  deer  skins,  but  our 
master  would  have  them  both,  and  so  he  had,  although 
not  willingly.  After  many  signs  of  people  to  the 
north  and  to  the  south,  and  that  after  so  many  sleeps 
he  would  come  again,  he  went  his  way,  but  never  came 
more. 

Now  the  ice  being  out  of  the  sounds,  so  that  our 
boat  might  go  from  one  place  unto  another,  a  company 


94  Hudson.     Last  Voyage 

of  men  were  appointed  by  the  master  to  go  a  fishing 
with  our  net.  Their  names  were  as  folio  we  th :  William 
Wilson,  Henry  Greene,  Michael  Perce,  John  Thomas, 
Andrew  Moter,  Bennet  Mathewes,  and  Arnold  Lodlo. 
These  men,  the  first  day  they  went,  caught  five  hundred 
fish,  as  big  as  good  herrings,  and  some  trouts.  Which 
put  us  all  in  some  hope  to  have  our  wants  supplied, 
and  our  commons  amended ;  but  these  were  the  most 
that  ever  they  got  in  one  day,  for  many  days  they 
got  not  a  quarter  so  many.  In  this  time  of  their 
fishing,  Henry  Greene  and  William  Wilson,  with  some 
others,  plotted  to  take  the  net  and  the  shallop,  which 
the  carpenter  had  now  set  up,  and  so  to  shift  for 
themselves.  But  the  shallop  being  ready,  our  master 
would  go  in  it  himself  to  the  south  and  south-west, 
to  see  if  he  could  meet  with  the  people;  for  to  that 
end  was  it  set  up,  and  (that  way)  we  might  see  the 
woods  set  on  fire  by  them.  So  the  master  took  the 
seine  and  the  shallop,  and  so  much  victual  as  would 
serve  for  eight  or  nine  days,  and  to  the  south  he  went. 
They  that  remained  aboard  were  to  take  in  water, 
wood,  and  ballast,  and  to  have  all  things  in  a  readiness 
against  he  came  back.  But  he  set  no  time  of  his  return, 
for  he  was  persuaded,. if  he  could  meet  with  the  people, 
he  should  have  flesh  of  them,  and  that  good  store : 
but  he  returned  worse  than  he  went  forth.  For  he 
could  by  no  means  meet  with  the  people,  although 
they  were  near  them,  yet  they  would  set  the  woods  on 
fire  in  his  sight. 

Being  returned,  he  fitted  all  things  for  his  return, 
and  first  delivered  all  the  bread  out  of  the  bread  room 
(which  came  to  a  pound  a  piece  for  every  man's  share), 
and  delivered  also  a  bill  of  return,  willing  them  to  have 


Hudson.     Last  Voyage  95 

that  to  shew,  if  it  pleased  God  that  they  came  home : 
and  he  wept  when  he  gave  it  unto  them.  But  to  help 
us  in  this  poor  estate  with  some  relief,  the  boat  and 
seine  went  to  work  on  Friday  morning,  and  stayed 
till  Sunday  noon:  at  which  time  they  came  aboard, 
and  brought  fourscore  small  fish,  a  poor  relief  for  so 
many  hungry  bellies.  Then  we  weighed  and  stood 
out  of  our  wintering  place,  and  came  to  an  anchor 
without,  in  the  mouth  of  the  bay:  from  whence  we 
weighed  and  came  to  an  anchor  without  in  the  sea, 
where  our  bread  being  gone,  that  store  of  cheese  we 
had  was  to  stop  a  gap,  whereof  there  were  five,  whereat 
the  company  grudged,  because  they  made  account  of 
nine.  But  those  that  were  left  were  equally  divided  by 
the  master,  although  he  had  counsel  to  the  contrary : 
for  there  were  some  who  having  it,  would  make  haste 
to  be  rid  thereof,  because  they  could  not  govern  it. 
I  knew  when  Henry  Greene  gave  half  his  bread,  which 
he  had  for  fourteen  days,  to  one  to  keep,  and  prayed 
him  not  to  let  him  have  any  until  the  next  Monday : 
but  before  Wednesday  at  night  he  never  left  till  he  had 
it  again,  having  eaten  up  his  first  week's  bread  before. 
So  Wilson  the  boatswain  hath  eaten  (in  one  day)  his 
fortnight's  bread,  and  hath  been  two  or  three  days 
sick  for  his  labour.  The  cause  that  moved  the  master 
to  deliver  all  the  cheese,  was  because  they  were  not 
all  of  one  goodness,  and  therefore  they  should  see  that 
they  had  no  wrong  done  them ;  but  every  man  should 
have  alike  the  best  and  the  worst  together,  which  was 
three  pounds  and  a  half  for  seven  days. 

The  wind  serving,  we  weighed  and  stood  to  the 
north-west,  and  on  Monday  at  night  (the  eighteenth 
day  of  June)  we  fell  into  the  ice,  and  the  next  day,  the 


96  Hudson.     Last  Voyage 

wind  being  at  west,  we  lay  there  till  Sunday  in  sight 
of  land.  Now  being  here,  the  master  told  Nicholas 
Simmes  that  there  would  be  a  breaking  up  of  chests 
and  a  search  for  bread,  and  willed  him,  if  he  had  any, 
to  bring  it  to  him,  which  he  did,  and  delivered  to  the 
master  thirty  cakes  in  a  bag.  This  deed  of  the  master 
(if  it  be  true)  hath  made  me  marvel  what  should  be 
the  reason  that  he  did  not  stop  the  breach  in  the  begin- 
ning, but  let  it  grow  to  that  height,  as  that  it  overthrew 
himself  and  many  other  honest  men:  but  "there  are 
many  devices  in  the  heart  of  man,  yet  the  counsel  of  the 
Lord  shall  stand." 

Being  thus  in  the  ice  on  Saturday,  the  one  and 
twentieth  of  June,  at  night,  Wilson  the  boatswain  and 
Henry  Greene  came  to  me  lying  in  my  cabin  lame, 
and  told  me  that  they  and  the  rest  of  their  associates 
would  shift  the  company,  and  turn  the  master  and  all 
the  sick  men  into  the  shallop,  and  let  them  shift  for 
themselves.  For  there  was  not  fourteen  days'  victual 
left  for  all  the  company,  at  that  poor  allowance  they 
were  at,  and  that  there  they  lay,  the  master  not  caring 
to  go  one  way  or  other :  and  that  they  had  not  eaten 
anything  these  three  days,  and  therefore  were  resolute, 
either  to  mend  or  end,  and  what  they  had  begun  they 
would  go  through  with  it,  or  die.  When  I  heard  this, 
I  told  them  I  marvelled  to  hear  so  much  from  them, 
considering  that  they  were  married  men,  and  had  wives 
and  children,  and  that  for  their  sakes  they  should 
not  commit  so  foul  a  thing  in  the  sight  of  God  and 
man,  as  that  would  be;  for  why  should  they  banish 
themselves  from  their  native  country  ?  Henry  Greene 
bade  me  hold  my  peace,  for  he  knew  the  worst,  which 
was,  to  be  hanged  when  he  came  home,  and  therefore 


Hudson.     Last  Voyage  97 

of  the  two  he  would  rather  be  hanged  at  home  than 
starved  abroad:  and  for  the  good  will  they  bare  me, 
they  would  have  me  stay  in  the  ship.  I  gave  them 
thanks,  and  told  them  that  I  came  into  her,  not 
to  forsake  her,  yet  not  to  hurt  myself  and  others 
by  any  such  deed.  Henry  Greene  told  me  then, 
that  I  must  take  my  fortune  in  the  shallop.  "  If 
there  be  no  remedy,"  said  I,  "the  will  of  God  be 
done." 

Away  went  Henry  Greene  in  a  rage,  swearing  to 
cut  his  throat  that  went  about  to  disturb  them,  and 
left  Wilson  by  me,  with  whom  I  had  some  talk,  but  to 
no  good ;  for  he  was  so  persuaded,  that  there  was  no 
remedy  now  but  to  go  on  while  it  was  hot,  lest  their 
party  should  fail  them,  and  the  mischief  they  had 
intended  to  others  should  light  on  themselves.  Henry 
Greene  came  again,  and  demanded  of  him  what  I  said. 
Wilson  answered :  "  He  is  in  his  old  song,  still  patient." 
Then  I  spake  to  Henry  Greene  to  stay  three  days,  in 
which  time  I  would  so  deal  with  the  master  that  all 
should  be  well.  So  I  dealt  with  him  to  forbear  but  two 
days,  nay  twelve  hours.  "  There  is  no  way,"  then  say 
they,  "but  out  of  hand."  Then  I  told  them,  that  if 
they  would  stay  till  Monday,  I  would  join  with  them  to 
share  all  the  victuals  in  the  ship,  and  would  justify  it 
when  I  came  home ;  but  this  would  not  serve  their  turns. 
Wherefore  I  told  them  it  was  some  worse  matter  they 
had  in  hand,  than  they  made  show  of,  and  that  it  was 
blood  and  revenge  he  sought,  or  else  he  would  not  at  such 
a  time  of  night  undertake  such  a  deed.  Henry  Greene 
(with  that)  taketh  my  Bible  which  lay  before  me,  and 
sware  that  he  would  do  no  man  harm,  and  what  he 
did  was  for  the  good  of  the  voyage,  and  for  nothing 

A.  p.  7 


98  Hudson.    Last  Voyage 

else;  and  that  all  the  rest  should 'do  the  like.  The  like 
did  Wilson  swear. 

Henry  Greene  went  his  way,  and  presently  came 
Juet,  who,  because  he  was  an  ancient  man,  I  hoped  to 
have  found  some  reason  in  him ;  but  he  was  worse  than 
Henry  Greene,  for  he  sware  plainly  that  he  would 
justify  this  deed  when  he  came  home.  After  him  came 
John  Thomas  and  Michael  Perce,  as  birds  of  one  feather ; 
but  because  they  are  not  living,  I  will  let  them  go,  as 
then  I  did.  Then  came  Moter  and  Bennet,  of  whom 
I  demanded,  if  they  were  well  advised  what  they  had 
taken  in  hand.  They  answered,  they  were,  and  there- 
fore came  to  take  their  oath. 

Now,  because  I  am  much  condemned  for  this  oath, 
as  one  of  them  that  plotted  with  them,  and  that  by 
an  oath  I  should  bind  them  together  to  perform  what 
they  had  begun,  I  thought  good  here  to  set  down  to 
the  view  of  all,  how  well  their  oath  and  deeds  agreed: 
and  thus  it  was: — "You  shall  swear  truth  to  God, 
your  prince  and  country :  you  shall  do  nothing,  but  to 
the  glory  of  God,  and  the  good  of  the  action  in  hand, 
and  harm  to  no  man."  This  was  the  oath,  without 
adding  or  diminishing.  I  looked  for  more  of  these 
companions  (although  these  were  too  many),  but  there 
came  no  more.  It  was  dark,  and  they  in  a  readiness 
to  put  this  deed  of  darkness  in  execution.  I  called  to 
Henry  Greene  and  Wilson,  and  prayed  them  not  to 
go  in  hand  with  it  in  the  dark,  but  to  stay  till  the  morn- 
ing. Now,  every  man  (I  hoped)  would  go  to  his  rest, 
but  wickedness  sleepeth  not ;  for  Henry  Greene  keepeth 
the  master  company  all  night  (and  gave  me  bread, 
which  his  cabin-mate  gave  him),  and  others  are  as 
watchful  as  he.  Then  I  asked  Henry  Greene,  whom 


Hudson.    Last  Voyage  99 

he  would  put  out  with  the  master  ?  He  said,  the  car- 
penter, John  King,  and  the  sick  men.  I  said,  they  should 
not  do  well  to  part  with  the  carpenter,  what  need 
soever  they  should  have.  Why  the  carpenter  was  in 
no  more  regard  amongst  them  was,  first,  for  that  he 
and  John  King  were  condemned  for  wrong  done  in 
the  victual ;  but  the  chiefest  cause  was,  for  that  the 
master  loved  him,  and  made  him  his  mate  upon  his 
return  out  of  our  wintering  place,  thereby  displacing 
Robert  Bylot;  whereat  they  did  grudge,  because  he 
could  neither  write  nor  read.  And  therefore  (said  they) 
the  master  and  his  ignorant  mate  would  carry  the  ship 
whither  the  master  pleased:  the  master  forbidding 
any  man  to  keep  account  or  reckoning,  having  taken 
from  all  men  whatsoever  served  for  that  purpose. 
Well,  I  obtained  of  Henry  Greene  and  Wilson  that  the 
carpenter  should  stay,  by  whose  means  I  hoped  (after 
they  had  satisfied  themselves),  that  the  master  and 
the  poor  man  might  be  taken  into  the  ship  again.  Or, 
I  hoped,  that  some  one  or  other  would  give  some  notice, 
either  to  the  carpenter,  John  King,  or  the  master;  for 
so  it  might  have  come  to  pass  by  some  of  them,  that 
were  the  most  forward. 

Now,  it  shall  not  be  amiss  to  show  how  we  were 
lodged ;  and  to  begin  in  the  cook  room — there  lay  Bennet 
and  the  cooper  lame :  without  the  cook  room,  on  the 
starboard  side,  lay  Thomas  Wydhouse  sick;  next  to 
him  lay  Sidrack  Funer  lame;  then  the  surgeon,  and 
John  Hudson  with  him ;  next  to  them  lay  Wilson  the 
boatswain,  and  then  Arnold  Lodlo  'next  to  him:  in 
the  gun-room  lay  Robert  Juet  and  John  Thomas ;  on  the 
larboard  side  lay  Michael  Bute  and  Adria  Moore,  who 
had  never  been  well  since  we  lost  our  anchor;  next 

7—2 


100  Hudson.    Last  Voyage 

to  them  lay  Michael  Perce  and  Andrew  Moter.  Next 
to  them,  without  the  gun-room,  lay  John  King,  and 
with  him  Robert  Bylot;  next  to  them  myself,  and 
next  to  me  Francis  Clements.  In  the  midship,  between 
the  capstan  and  the  pumps,  lay  Henry  Greene  and 
Nicholas  Simmes.  This  night  John  King  was  late 
up,  and  they  thought  he  had  been  with  the  master ; 
but  he  was  with  the  carpenter,  who  lay  on  the  poop, 
and  coming  down  from  him  was  met  by  his  cabin-mate, 
as  it  were  by  chance,  and  so  they  came  to  their  cabin 
together.  It  was  not  long  ere  it  was  day :  then  came 
Bennet  for  water  for  the  kettle.  He  rose  and  went  into 
the  hold.  When  he  was  in,  they  shut  the  hatch  on  him 
(but  who  kept  it  down  I  know  not) ;  up  upon  the  deck 
went  Bennet. 

In  the  meantime  Henry  Greene  and  another  went 
to  the  carpenter,  and  held  him  with  a  talk,  till  the 
master  came  out  of  his  cabin  (which  he  soon  did); 
then  came  John  Thomas  and  Bennet  before  him, 
while  Wilson  bound  his  arms  behind  him.  He  asked 
them  what  they  meant?  They  told  him  he  should 
know,  when  he  was  in  the  shallop.  Now  Juet,  while 
this  was  a  doing,  came  to  John  King  into  the  hold, 
who  was  provided  for  him,  for  he  had  got  a  sword  of 
his  own,  and  kept  him  at  a  bay,  and  might  have  killed 
him,  but  others  came  to  help  him :  and  so  he  came  up 
to  the  master.  The  master  called  to  the  carpenter 
and  told  him  that  he  was  bound,  but  I  heard  no  answer 
he  made.  Now  Arnold  Lodlo  and  Michael  Bute 
railed  at  them,  and  told  them  their  knavery  would 
show  itself.  Then  was  the  shallop  haled  up  to  the 
ship  side,  and  the  poor,  sick,  and  lame  men  were  called 
upon  to  get  them  out  of  their  cabins  into  the  shallop. 


Hudson.    Last  Voyage  101 

The  master  called  to  me,  who  came  out  of  my  cabin 
as  well  as  I  could  to  the  hatchway,  to  speak  with  him  ; 
where,  on  my  knees  I  besought  them,  for  the  love  of 
God,  to  remember  themselves,  and  to  do  as  they  would 
be  done  unto.  They  bade  me  keep  myself  well,  and 
get  me  into  my  cabin,  not  suffering  the  master  to 
speak  with  me.  But  when  I  came  into  my  cabin 
again,  he  called  to  me  at  the  horn,  which  gave  light 
into  my  cabin,  and  told  me  that  Juet  would  over- 
throw us  all.  "Nay"  (said  I),  "it  is  that  villain 
Henry  Greene,"  and  I  spake  it  not  softly. 

Now  was  the  carpenter  at  liberty,  who  asked  them 
if  they  would  be  hanged,  when  they  came  home :  and 
as  for  himself,  he  said,  he  would  not  stay  in  the  ship 
unless  they  would  force  him :  they  bade  him  go  then, 
for  they  would  not  stay  him.  "  I  will "  (said  he),  "  so 
I  may  have  my  chest  with  me,  and  all  that  is  in  it." 
They  said  he  should,  and  presently  they  put  it  into 
the  shallop.  Then  he  came  down  to  me  to  take  his 
leave  of  me,  who  persuaded  him  to  stay ;  which  if  he 
did,  he  might  so  work  that  all  should  be  well.  He  said 
he  did  not  think,  but  they  would  be  glad  to  take  them 
in  again.  For  he  was  so  persuaded  by  the  master, 
that  there  was  not  one  in  all  the  ship,  that  could  tell 
how  to  carry  her  home.  "  But "  (saith  he),  "  if  we  must 
part,  which  we  will  not  willingly  do  "  (for  they  would 
follow  the  ship),  he  prayed  me,  if  we  came  to  the  capes 
before  them,  that  I  would  leave  some  token  that  we 
had  been  there,  near  to  the  place  where  the  fowls  bred, 
and  he  would  do  the  like  for  us :  and  so  (with  tears) 
we  parted.  Now  were  the  sick  men  driven  out  of 
their  cabins  into  the  shallop;  but  John  Thomas  was 
Francis  Clements 's  friend,  and  Bennet  was  the  cooper's, 


102  Hudson.    Last  Voyage 

so  as  there  were  words  between  them  and  Henry 
Greene,  one  saying  that  they  should  go,  and  the 
other  swearing  that  they  should  not  go,  but  such 
as  were  in  the  shallop  should  return.  When  Henry 
Greene  heard  that,  he  was  compelled  to  give  place,  and 
to  put  out  Arnold  Lodlo  and  Michael  Bute,  which 
with  much  ado  they  did. 

In  the  meantime,  there  were  some  of  them  that 
plied  their  work,  as  if  the  ship  had  been  entered  by 
force,  and  they  had  free  leave  to  pillage,  breaking  up 
chests  and  rifling  all  places.  One  of  them  came  by 
me,  who  asked  me  what  they  should  do.  I  answered, 
he  should  make  an  end  of  what  he  had  begun ;  for  I 
saw  him  do  nothing  but  shark  up  and  down.  Now 
were  all  the  poor  men  in  the  shallop,  whose  names  are 
as  followeth:  Henry  Hudson,  John  Hudson,  Arnold 
Lodlo,  Sidrack  Funer,  Phillip  Staffe,  Thomas  Wood- 
house  or  Wydhouse,  Adam  Moore,  Henry  King, 
Michael  Bute.  The  carpenter  got  of  them  a  piece, 
and  pow<Jer,  and  shot,  and  some  pikes,  an  iron  pot, 
with  some  meal,  and  other  things.  They  stood  out  of 
the  ice,  the  shallop  being  fast  to  the  stern  of  the  ship, 
and  so  (when  they  were  nigh  out,  for  I  cannot  say 
they  were  clean  out)  they  cut  her  head  fast  from  the 
stern  of  our  ship,  then  out  with  their  top-sails,  and 
towards  the  east  they  stood  in  a  clear  sea.  In  the 
end  they  took  in  their  top-sails,  righted  their  helm, 
and  lay  under  their  foresail,  till  they  had  ransacked 
and  searched  all  places  in  the  ship.  In  the  hold  they 
found  one  of  the  vessels  of  meal  whole,  and  the  other 
half  spent  (for  we  had  but  two).  We  found  also  two 
firkins  of  butter,  some  twenty-seven  pieces  of  pork, 
half  a  bushel  of  peas;  but  in  the  master's  cabin  we 


Hudson.     Last  Voyage  103 

found  two  hundred  of  biscuit  cakes,  a  peck  of  meal, 
of  beer  to  the  .quantity  of  a  butt,  one  with  another. 
Now  it  was  said  that  the  shallop  was  come  within 
sight,  they  let  fall  the  mainsail,  and  out  with  their 
top-sails,  and  fly  as  from  an  enemy. 

Then  I  prayed  them  yet  to  remember  themselves: 
but  William  Wilson  (more  than  the  rest)  would  hear 
of  no  such  matter.  Coming  nigh  the  east  shore  they 
cast  about,  and  stood  to  the  west  and  came  to  an  island, 
and  anchored  in  sixteen  or  seventeen  fathom  water. 
So  they  sent  the  boat  and  the  net  ashore  to  see  if  they 
could  have  a  draught;  but  could  not  for  rocks  and 
great  stones.  Michael  Perce  killed  two  fowl,  and 
here  they  found  good  store  of  that  weed,  which  we 
called  cockle-grass  in  our  wintering-place,  whereof 
they  gathered  store,  and  came  aboard  again.  Here 
we  lay  that  night  and  the  best  part  of  the  next  day,  in 
all  which  time  we  saw  not  the  shallop,  or  ever  after. 
Now  Henry  Greene  came  to  me  and  told  me,  that  it 
was  the  company's  will,  that  I  should  come  up  into 
the  master's  cabin  and  take  charge  thereof.  I  told 
him  it  was  more  fit  for  Robert  Juet :  he  said  he  should 
not  come  in  it,  nor  meddle  with  the  master's  card  or 
journals.  So  up  I  came,  and  Henry  Greene  gave  me 
the  key  of  the  master's  chest,  and  told  me  then  that 
he  had  laid  the  master's  best  things  together,  which 
he  would  use  himself,  when  time  did  serve :  the  bread 
was  also  delivered  me  by  tale. 

The  wind  serving,  we  stood  to  the  north-east,  and 
this  was  Robert  Bylot's  course,  contrary  to  Robert 
Juet,  who  would  have  gone  to  the  north-west.  We 
had  the  eastern  shore  still  in  sight,  and  (in  the  night) 
had  a  stout  gale  of  wind,  and  stood  afore  it  till  we 


104  Hudson.     Last  Voyage 

met  with  ice,  into  the  which  we  ran  from  thin  to  thick, 
till  we  could  go  no  further  for  ice,  wh\ch  lay  so  thick 
ahead  of  us  (and  the  wind  brought  it  after  us  astern), 
that  we  could  not  stir  backward  nor  forward;  but  so 
lay  embayed  fourteen  days  in  worse  ice  than  ever  we 
met  to  deal  withal,  for  we  had  been  where  there  was 
greater  store,  but  it  was  not  so  broad  upon  the  water 
as  this;  for  this  floating  ice  contained  miles  and  half 
miles  in  compass,  where  we  had  a  deep  sea,  and  a  tide 
of  flood  and  ebb,  which  set  north-west  and  south-east. 
Here  Robert  Juet  would  have  gone  to  the  north-west, 
but  Robert  Bylot  was  confident  to  go  through  to  the 
north-east,  which  he  did.  At  last,  being  clear  of  this  ice, 
he  continued  his  course  in  sight  of  the  eastern  shore  till 
he  raised  four  islands,  which  lay  north  and  south ;  but 
we  passed  them  six  or  seven  leagues,  the  wind  took  us 
so  short.  Then  we  stood  back  to  them  again,  and 
came  to  an  anchor  between  two  of  the  most  norther- 
most.  We  sent  the  boat  ashore,  to  see  if  there  were 
anything  there  to  be  had,  but  found  nothing  but 
cockle-grass,  whereof  they  gathered  store,  and  so 
returned  aboard.  Before  we  came  to  this  place,  I 
might  well  see  that  I  was  kept  in  the  ship  against 
Henry  Greene's  mind,  because  I  did  not  favour  their 
proceedings  better  than  I  did.  Then  he  began  (very 
subtly)  to  draw  me  to  take  upon  me  to  search  for 
those  things,  which  himself  had  stolen:  and  accused 
me  of  a  matter  no  less  than  treason  amongst  us,  that 
I  had  deceived  the  company  of  thirty  cakes  of  bread. 
Now  they  began  to  talk  amongst  themselves,  that 
England  was  no  safe  place  for  them,  and  Henry  Greene 
swore  the  ship  should  not  come  into  any  place  (but 
keep  the  sea  still),  till  he  had  the  King's  Majesty's  hand 


Hudson.     Last  Voyage  105 

and  seal  to  show  for  his  safety.  They  had  many  devices 
in  their  heads,  but  Henry  Greene  in  the  end  was  their 
captain,  and  so  called  of  them. 

From  these  islands  we  stood  to  the  north-east  and 
the  easter  land  still  in  sight :  we  raised  those  islands, 
that  our  master  called  Rumney's  Islands.  Between 
these  islands  and  the  shallow  ground  to  the  east  of 
them,  our  master  went  down  into  the  first  great  bay. 
We  kept  the  east  shore  still  in  our  sight,  and  coming 
thwart  of  the  low  land,  we  ran  on  a  rock  that  lay  under 
water,  and  struck  but  once;  for  if  she  had,  we  might 
have  been  made  inhabitants  of  that  place;  but  God 
sent  us  soon  off  without  any  harm  that  we  saw.  We 
continued  our  course  and  raised  land  ahead  of  us, 
which  stretched  out  to  the  north.  Which  when  they 
saw,  they  said  plainly  that  Robert  Bylot  by  his 
northerly  course  had  left  the  capes  to  the  south,  and 
that  they  were  best  to  seek  down  to  the  south  in  time 
for  relief,  before  all  was  gone ;  for  we  had  small  store 
left.  But  Robert  Bylot  would  follow  the  land  to  the 
north,  saying  that  he  hoped  in  God  to  find  somewhat 
to  relieve  us  that  way,  as  soon  as  to  the  south.  I  told 
them  that  this  land  was  the  main  of  Wolstenholme 
Cape,  and  that  the  shallow  rocky  ground  was  the  same 
that  the  master  went  down  by,  when  he  went  into  the 
great  bay.  Robert  Juet  and  all  said  it  was  not  possible, 
unless  the  master  had  brought  the  ship  over  land,  and 
willed  them  to  look  into  the  master's  card  and  their 
course,  how  well  they  did  agree.  We  stood  to  the  east 
and  left  the  mainland  to  the  north,  by  many  small 
islands  into  a  narrow  gut  between  two  lands,  and  there 
came  to  an  anchor.  The  boat  went  ashore  on  the 
north  side,  where  we  found  the  great  horn,  but  nothing 


106  Hudson.    Last  Voyage 

else.  The  next  day  we  went  *to  the  south  side,  but 
found  nothing  there  save  cockle-grass,  of  which  we 
gathered.  This  grass  was  a  great  relief  unto  us,  for 
without  it  we  should  hardly  have  got  to  the  capes 
for  want  of  victual.  The  wind  serving,  we  stood  out, 
but  before  we  could  get  clean  out,  the  wind  came  to 
the  west,  so  that  we  were  constrained  to  anchor  on 
the  north  side. 

The  next  day  we  weighed  and  doubled  the  point 
of  the  north  land,  which  is  high  land,  and  so  con- 
tinued to  the  capes,  lying  north  and  south,  some  five- 
and-twenty  or  thirty  leagues.  To  the  north  we  stood, 
"to  see  store  of  those  fowls,  that  breed  in  the  capes,  and 
to  kill  some  with  our  shot,  and  to  fetch  them  with  our 
boat.  We  raised  the  capes  with  joy  and  bare  for  them, 
and  came  to  the  islands  that  lie  in  the  mouth  of  the 
strait;  but  bearing  in  between  the  rocky  isles,  we 
ran  on  a  rock  that  lay  under  water,  and  there  stuck 
fast  eight  or  nine  hours.  It  was  ebbing  water  when 
we  thus  came  on,  so  the  flood  set  us  afloat,  God  guiding 
both  wind  and  sea,  that  it  was  calm  and  fair  weather : 
the  ebb  came  from  the  east,  and  the  flood  from  the 
west.  When  we  were  afloat  we  stood  more  near  to 
the  east  shore,  and  there  anchored. 

The  next  day,  being  the  seven  and  twentieth  of 
July,  we  sent  the  boat  to  fetch  some  fowl,  and  the  ship 
should  weigh  and  stand  as  near  as  they  could ;  for  the 
wind  was  against  us.  They  had  a  great  way  to  row, 
and  by  that  means  they  could  not  reach  to  the  place 
where  the  fowl  bred;  but  found  good  store  of  gulls, 
yet  hard  to  come  by,  on  the  rocks  and  cliffs;  but  with 
their  pieces  they  killed  some  thirty,  and  towards  night 
returned.  Now  we  had  brought  our  ship  more  near 


Hudson.    Last  Voyage  107 

to  the  mouth  of  the  straits,  and  there  came  to  an  anchor 
in  eighteen  or  twenty  fathom  water,  upon  a  reef  or 
shelf  of  ground.  Which  after  they  had  weighed  their 
anchor,  and  stood  more  near  to  the  place  where  the 
fowl  bred,  they  could  not  find  it  again,  nor  no  place 
like  it :  but  were  fain  to  turn  to  and  fro  in  the  mouth 
of  the  strait,  and  to  be  in  danger  of  rocks,  because 
they  could  not  find  ground  to  let  fall  an  anchor  in, 
the  water  was  so  deep. 

The  eight  and  twentieth  day,  the  boat  went  to 
Digges's  Cape  for  fowl,  and  made  directly  for  the 
place  where  the  fowl  bred,  and  being  near,  they  saw 
seven  boats  come  about  the  eastern  point  towards 
them.  When  the  savages  saw  our  boat,  they  drew 
themselves  together,  and  drew  their  lesser  boats  into 
their  bigger :  and  when  they  had  done,  they  came 
rowing  to  our  boat,  and  made  signs  to  the  west,  but 
they  made  ready  for  all  assays.  The  savages  came 
to  them,  and  by  signs  grew  familiar  one  with  another, 
so  as  our  men  took  one  of  theirs  into  our  boat,  and 
they  took  one  of  ours  into-  their  boat.  Then  they 
carried  our  man  to  a  cove  where  their  tents  stood, 
toward  the  west  of  the  place  where  the  fowl  bred:  so 
they  carried  him  into  their  tents,  where  he  remained 
till  our  men  returned  with  theirs.  Our  boat  went  to 
the  place  where  the  fowl  bred,  and  were  desirous  to 
know  how  the  savages  killed  their  fowl.  He  showed 
them  the  manner  how,  which  was  thus :  they  take  a 
long  pole  with  a  snare  at  the  end,  which  they  put  about 
the  fowl's  neck,  and  so  pluck  them  down.  When  our 
men  knew  that  they  had  a  better  way  of  their  own, 
they  showed  him  the  use  of  our  pieces,  which  at  one 
shot  would  kill  seven  or  eight.  To  be  short,  our  boat 


108  Hudson.    Last  Voyage 

returned  to  their  cove  for  our  man  and  to  deliver  theirs. 
When  they  came,  they  made  great  joy,  with  dancing, 
and  leaping,  and  stroking  of  their  breasts:  they 
offered  divers  things  to  our  men,  but  they  only  took 
some  morses'  teeth,  which  they  gave  them  for  a  knife 
and  two  glass  buttons :  and  so,  receiving  our  man,  they 
came  aboard,  much  rejoicing  at  this  chance,  as  if 
they  had  met  with  the  most  simple  and  kind  people 
of  the  world. 

And  Henry  Greene  (more  than  the  rest)  was  so 
confident,  that  by  no  means  we  should  take  care  to 
stand  on  our  guard :  God  blinding  him  so,  that  where 
he  made  reckoning  to  receive  great  matters  from  these 
people,  he  received  more  than  he  looked  for,  and  that 
suddenly,  by  being  made  a  good  example  for  all  men, 
that  make  no  conscience  of  doing  evil ;  and  that  we 
take  heed  of  the  savage  people,  how  simple  soever 
they  seem  to  be. 

The  next  day,  the  nine  and  twentieth  of  July,  they 
made  haste  to  be  ashore,  and  because  the  ship  rid 
too  far  off,  they  weighed  and  stood  as  near  to  the  place 
where  the  fowl  bred,  as  they  could ;  and  because  I  was 
lame,  I  was  to  go  in  the  boat,  to  carry  such  things  as 
I  had  in  the  cabin,  of  everything  somewhat;  and  so. 
with  more  haste  than  good  speed  (and  not  without 
swearing),  away  we  went,  Henry  Greene,  William 
Wilson,  John  Thomas,  Michael  Perce,  Andrew  Moter, 
and  myself.  When  we  came  near  the  shore,  the  people 
were  on  the  hills  dancing  and  leaping :  to  the  cove 
we  came,  where  they  had  drawn  up  their  boats :  we 
brought  our  boat  to  the  east  side  of  the  cove,  close 
to  the  rocks.  Ashore  they  went,  and  made  fast  the 
boat  to  a  great  stone  on  the  shore.  The  people  came, 


Hudson.    Last  Voyage  109 

and  every  one  had  somewhat  in  his  hand  to  barter; 
but  Henry  Greene  swore  they  should  have  nothing 
till  he  had  venison,  for  that  they  had  so  promised  him 
by  signs. 

Now  when  we  came,  they  made  signs  to  their  dogs 
(whereof  there  were  many  like  mongrels,  as  big  as 
hounds),  and  pointed  to  their  mountain  and  to  the 
sun,  clapping  their  hands.  Then  Henry  Greene,  John 
Thomas,  and  William  Wilson  stood  hard  by  the  boat 
head ;  Michael  Perce  and  Andrew  Moter  were  got  up 
upon  the  rock  a  gathering  of  sorrel.  Not  one  of  them 
had  any  weapon  about  him,  not  so  much  as  a  stick, 
save  Henry  Greene  only,  who  had  a  piece  of  a  pike  in  his 
hand :  nor  saw  I  anything,  that  they  had,  wherewith  to 
hurt  us.  Henry  Greene  and  William  Wilson  had  looking- 
glasses,  and  Jews'  trumps,  and  bells,  which  they  were 
showing  the  people.  The  savages  standing  round 
about  them,  one  of  them  came  into  the  boat's  head 
to  me  to  show  me  a  bottle :  I  made  signs  to  him  to 
get  him  ashore,  but  he  made  as  though  he  had  not 
understood  me,  whereupon  I  stood  up  and  pointed 
him  ashore.  In  the  meantime  another  stole  behind 
me  to  the  stern  of  the  boat,  and  when  I  saw  him 
ashore,  that  was  in  the  head  of  the  boat,  I  sat  down 
again ;  but  suddenly  I  saw  the  leg  and  foot  of  a  man  by 
me.  Wherefore  I  cast  up  my  head,  and  saw  the  savage 
with  his  knife  in  his  hand,  who  struck  at  my  breast 
over  my  head:  I  cast  up  my  right  arm  to  save  my 
breast;  he  wounded  my  arm,  and  struck  me  into  the 
body  under  my  right  pap.  He  struck  a  second  blow, 
which  I  met  with  my  left  hand,  and  then  he  struck 
me  into  the  right  thigh,  and  had  like  to  have  cut  off 
my  little  finger  of  the  left  hand.  Now  I  had  got  hold 


110  Hudson.     Last  Voyage 

of  the  string  of  the  knife,  and  had  wound  it  about  my 
left  hand,  he  striving  with  both  his  hands  to  make 
an  end  of  that  he  had  begun:  I  found  him  but  weak 
in  the  grip  (God  enabling  me),  and  getting  hold  of 
the  sleeve  of  his  left  arm,  so  bare  him  from  me.  His 
left  side  lay  bare  to  me,  which  when  I  saw,  I  put  his 
sleeve  off  his  left  arm  into  my  left  hand,  holding  the 
string  of  the  knife  fast  in  the  same  hand;  and  having 
got  my  right  hand  at  liberty,  I  sought  for  somewhat 
wherewith  to  strike  him  (not  remembering  my  dagger 
at  my  side),  but  looking  down  I  saw  it,  and  therewith 
struck  him  into  the  body  and  the  throat. 

Whiles  I  was  thus  assaulted  in  the  boat,  our  men 
were  set  upon  on  the  shore.  John  Thomas  and 
William  Wilson  had  their  bowels  cut,  and  Michael 
Perce  and  Henry  Greene,  being  mortally  wounded, 
came  tumbling  into  the  boat  together.  When  Andrew 
Moter  saw-  this  medley,  he  came  running  down  the 
rocks,  and  leaped  into  the  sea,  and  so  swam  to  the  boat, 
hanging  on  the  stern  thereof,  till  Michael  Perce  took 
him  in,  who  manfully  made  good  the  head  of  the  boat 
against  the  savages,  that  pressed  sore  upon  us.  Now 
Michael  Perce  had  got  an  hatchet,  wherewith  I  saw 
him  strike  one  of  them,  that  he  lay  sprawling  in  the 
sea.  Henry  Greene  crieth  "  Cor  agio"  and  layeth  about 
him  with  his  truncheon.  I  cried  to  them  to  clear  the 
boat,  and  Andrew  Moter  cried  to  be  taken  in.  The 
savages  betook  them  to  their  bows  and  arrows,  which 
they  sent  amongst  us,  wherewith  Henry  Greene  was 
slain  outright,  and  Michael  Perce  received  many  wounds, 
and  so  did  the  rest.  Michael  Perce  cleareth  the  boat, 
and  puts  it  from  the  shore,  and  helpeth  Andrew  Moter 
in ;  but  in  turning  of  the  boat  I  received  a  cruel  wound 


Hudson.    Last  Voyage  111 

in  my  back  with  an  arrow.  Michael  Perce  and  Andrew 
Moter  rowed  the  boat  away ;  which  when  the  savages 
saw,  they  ran  to  their  boats,  and  I  feared  they  would 
have  launched  them  to  have  followed  us,  but  they  did 
not,  and  our  ship  was  in  the  middle  of  the  channel 
and  could  not  see  us. 

Now  when  they  had  rowed  a  good  way  from  the 
shore,  Michael  Perce  fainted,  and  could  row  no  more. 
Then  was  Andrew  Moter  driven  to  stand  in  the  boat 
head,  and  waft  to  the  ship,  which  at  the  first  saw  us 
not,  and  when  they  did,  they  could  not  tell  what  to 
make  of  us ;  but  in  the  end  they  stood  for  us,  and  so 
took  us  up.  Henry  .Greene  was  thrown  out  of  the  boat 
into  the  sea,  and  the  rest  were  had  aboard,  the  savage 
being  yet  alive,  yet  without  sense.  But  they  died 
all  there  that  day,  William  Wilson  swearing  and  cursing 
in  most  fearful  manner.  Michael  Perce  lived  two 
days  after,  and  then  died.  Thus  you  have  heard  the 
tragical  end  of  Henry  Greene  and  his  mates,  whom 
they  called  captain,  these  four  being  the  only  lusty 
men  in  all  the  ship. 

The  poor  number,  that  was  left,  were  to  ply  our 
ship  to  and  fro  in  the  mouth  of  the  strait;  for  there 
was  no  place  to  anchor  in  near  hand.  Besides,  they 
were  to  go  in  the  boat  to  kill  fowl  to  bring  us  home, 
which  they  did,  although  with  danger  to  us  all.  For 
if  the  wind  blew,  there  was  an  high  sea,  and  the  eddies 
of  the  tides  would  carry  the  ship  so  near  the  rocks,  as 
it  feared  our  master,  for  so  I  will  now  call  him.  After 
they  had  killed  some  two  hundred  fowl,  with  great 
labour,  on  the  south  cape,  we  stood  to  the  east ;  but 
when  we  were  six  or  seven  leagues  from  the  capes,  the 
wind  came  up  at  east.  Then  we  stood  back  to  the 


112  Hudson.     Last  Voyage 

capes  again,  and  killed  an  hundred  fowl  more.  After 
this  the  wind  came  to  the  west,  so  we  were  driven  to 
go  away,  and  then  our  master  stood  (for  the  most) 
along  by  the  north  shore,  till  he  fell  into  broken  ground 
about  the  Queen's  Foreland,  and  there  anchored. 
From  thence  we  went  to  God's  Mercies,  and  from  thence 
to  those  islands,  which  lie  in  the  mouth  of  our  strait, 
not  seeing  the  land  till  we  were  ready  to  run  our  bow- 
sprit against  the  rocks  in  a  fog.  But  it  cleared  a  little, 
and  then  we  might  see  ourselves  enclosed  with  rocky 
islands,  and  could  find  no  ground  to  anchor  in.  There 
our  master  lay  a-try  all  night,  and  the  next  day,  the 
fog  continuing,  they  sought  for  ground  to  anchor  in, 
and  found  some  in  an  hundred  and  odd  fathoms  of 
water.  The  next  day  we  weighed  and  stood  to  the 
east,  but  before  we  came  here,  we  had  put  ourselves 
to  hard  allowance,  as  half  a  fowl  a  day  with  the  pottage ; 
for  yet  we  had  some  meal  left,  and  nothing  else.  Then 
they  began  to  make  trial  of  all  whatsoever.  We  had 
flayed  our  fowl,  for  they  will  not  pull ;  and  Robert 
Juet  was  the  first  that  made  use  of  the  skins  by  burning 
of  the  feathers :  so  they  became  a  great  dish  of  meat, 
and  as  for  the  garbage,  it  was  not  thrown  away. 

After  we  were  clear  of  these  islands,  which  lie  out 
with  two  points,  one  to  the  south-east  and  the  other 
to  the  north,  making  a  bay  to  the  sight,  as  if  there 
were  no  way  through,  we  continued  our  course  east- 
south-east  and  south  and  by  east,  to  raise  the  Desola- 
tions, from  thence  to  shape  our  course  for  Ireland. 
Thus  we  continued  divers  days ;  but  the  wind,  coming 
against  us,  made  us  to  alter  our  course,  and  by  the  means 
of  Robert  Juet,  who  persuaded  the  company  that 
they  should  find  great  relief  in  Newfoundland,  if  our 


Hudson.    Last  Voyage  113 

countrymen  were  there,  and  if  they  were  gone  before  we 
came,  yet  should  we  find  great  store  of  bread  and  fish 
left  ashore  by  them ;  but  how  true,  I  give  God  thanks 
we  did  not  try.  Yet  we  stood  to  the  south-west  and 
to  the  west,  almost  to  fifty-seven  degrees ;  when  (by 
the  will  of  God)  the  wind  came  up  at  south-west. 
Then  the  master  asked  me,  if  he  should  take  the  benefit 
of  this  wind,  and  shape  his  course  for  Ireland.  I  said 
it  was  best  to  go,  where  we  knew  corn  grew,  and  not  to 
seek  it,  where  it  was  cast  away  and  not  to  be  found. 
Towards  Ireland  now  we  stood,  with  prosperous  winds 
for  many  days  together.  Then  was  all  our  meal  spent, 
and  our  fowl  reasty  and  dry;  but  (being  no  remedy) 
we  were  content  with  the  salt  broth  for  dinner  and  the 
half  fowl  for  supper.  Now  went  our  candles  to  wrack, 
and  Bennet,  our  cook,  made  a  mess  of  meat  of  the  bones 
of  the  fowl,  frying  them  with  candle  grease  till  they 
were  crisp,  and,  with  vinegar  put  to  them,  made  a 
good  dish  of  meat.  Our  vinegar  was  shared,  and  to 
every  man  a  pound  of  candles  delivered  for  a  week, 
as  a  great  dainty.  Now  Robert  Juet  (by  his  reckoning) 
saith  we  were  within  sixty  or  seventy  leagues  of  Ireland, 
when  we  had  two  hundred  thither.  And  sure  our 
course  was  so  much  the  longer  through  our  evil  steerage ; 
for  our  men  became  so  weak,  that  they  could  not  stand 
at  the  helm,  but  were  fain  to  sit. 

Then  Robert  Juet  died  for  mere  want,  and  all  our 
men  were  in  despair,  and  said  we  were  past  Ireland, 
and  our  last  fowl  were  in  the  steep- tub.  So  our  men 
cared  not  which  end  went  forward,  insomuch  as  our 
master  was  driven  to  look  to  their  labour,  as  well  as 
his  own;  for  some  of  them  would  sit  and  see  the  fore- 
sail or  mainsail  fly  up  to  the  tops,  the  sheets  being 

A.  P.  8 


114  Hudson.     Last  Voyage 

either  flown  or  broken,  and  would  not  help  it  them- 
selves, nor  call  to  others  for  help,  which  much  grieved 
the  master.  Now  in  this  extremity  it  pleased  God 
to  give  us  sight  of  land,  not  far  from  the  place  our 
master  said  he  would  fall  withal,  which  was  the 
bay  of  Gal  way,  and  we  fell  to  the  west  of  the  Durseys, 
and  so  stood  along  by  the  coast  to  the  south-west.  In 
the  end  there  was  a  joyful  cry,  "A  sail,  a  sail,"  towards 
which  they  stood.  Then  they  saw  more,  but  to  the 
nearest  we  stood,  and  called  to  him;  his  bark  was  of 
Fowey,  and  was  at  anchor  a  fishing.  He  came  to  us, 
and  brought  us  into  Bere  Haven.  From  Bere  Haven 
we  came  to  Plymouth,  and  so  to  an  anchor  before  the 
castle ;  and  from  Plymouth,  with  fair  wind  and  weather, 
without  stop  or  stay  we  came  to  the  Downs ;  from 
thence  to  Gravesend,  where  most  of  our  men  went 
ashore,  and  from  thence  came  on  this  side  Erith,  and 
there  stopped.  Where  our  master  Robert  By  lot  came 
aboard,  and  so  had  me  up  to  London  with  him,  and  so 
we  came  to  Sir  Thomas  Smith's  together. 


William   Barents 

Keproduced,  by  kind  permission  of  the  publisher,  from  Dr  A.  D.  de 
Vries's  Oud-Hottand  (Binger,  1882).  Originally  a  vignette  in  a  chart 
published  in  Amsterdam  between  1613  and  1615. 


8—2 


WILLIAM  BARENTS 

THE  THIRD  VOYAGE  NORTHWARD  TO  THE 
KINGDOMS  OF  CATHAIA  AND  CHINA,  IN 
ANNO  1596 

(BY  GERRIT  DB  VEER) 

In  the  beginning  of  this  year,  there  was  two  ships 
rigged  and  set  forth  by  the  town  of  Amsterdam,  to  sail 
that  voyage.  In  the  one,  Jacob  Heemskerck  Hen- 
drickson  was  master  and  factor  for  the  wares  and 
merchandise,  and  William  Barents  chief  pilot.  In 
the  other,  John  Cornelison  Rijp  was  both  master  and 
factor  for  the  goods,  that  the  merchants  had  laden  in 
her. 

The  5  of  May  all  the  men  in  both  the  ships  were 
mustered,  and  upon  the  tenth  of  May  they  sailed  from 
Amsterdam. 

The  first  of  June  we  had  no  night,  and  the  second 
of  June  we  had  the  wind  contrary;  but  upon  the 
fourth  of  June  we  had  a  good  wind  out  of  the  west- 
north-west,  and  sailed  north-east. 

And  when  the  sun  was  about  south-south-east  (half- 
past  9  a.m.),  we  saw  a  strange  sight  in  the  element :  for 
on  each  side  of  the  sun  there  was  another  sun,  and  two 
rainbows  that  passed  clean  through  the  three  suns,  and 
then  two  rainbows  more,  the  one  compassing  round 
about  the  suns,  and  the  other  cross  through  the  great 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     117 

roundel ;  the  great  roundel  standing  with  the  uttermost 
point  elevated  above  the  horizon  28  degrees. 

The  fifth  of  June  we  saw  the  first  ice,  which  we 
wondered  at,  at  the  first  thinking  that  it  had  been 
white  swans ;  for  one  of  our  men  walking  in  the  fore- 
deck  on  a  sudden  began  to  cry  out  with  a  loud  voice, 
and  said  that  he  saw  white  swans :  which  we  that  were 


A  wonder  in  the  heavens,  and  how  we  caught  a  bear 

under  hatches  hearing,  presently  came  up,  and  perceived 
that  it  was  ice,  that  came  driving  from  the  great  heap, 
showing  like  swans,  it  being  then  about  evening. 

The  ninth  of  June  we  found  the  island,  that  lay 
under  74  degrees  and  30  minutes. 

The  12  of  June,  in  the  morning,  we  saw  a  white 
bear,  which  we  rowed  after  with  our  boat,  thinking  to 


118     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

cast  a  rope  about  her  neck;  but  when  we  were  near 
her,  she  was  so  great  that  we  durst  not  do  it,  but 
rowed  back  again  to  our  ship,  to  fetch  more  men  and 
our  arms,  and  so  made  to  her  again  with  muskets, 
arquebuses,  halberts,  and  hatchets,  John  Cornelison's 
men  coming  also  with  their  boat  to  help  us.  And  so 
being  well  furnished  of  men  and  weapons,  we  rowed 
with  both  our  boats  unto  the  bear,  and  fought  with 
her,  while  four  glasses  were  run  out,  for  our  weapons 
could  do  her  little  hurt;  and  amongst  the  rest  of  the 
blows  that  we  gave  her,  one  of  our  men  struck  her  into 
the  back  with  an  axe,  which  stuck  fast  in  her  back, 
and  yet  she  swam  away  with  it;  but  we  rowed  after 
her,  and  at  last  we  cut  her  head  in  sunder  with  an 
axe,  wherewith  she  died.  And  then  we  brought  her 
into  John  Cornelison's  ship,  where  we  flayed  her, 
and  found  her  skin  to  be  twelve  foot  long.  Which 
done,  we  ate  some  of  her  flesh;  but  we  brooked  it  not 
well.  This  island  we  called  the  Bear  Island. 

The  13  of  June  we  left  the  island,  and  sailed  north 
and  somewhat  easterly. 

The  19  of  June  we  saw  land  again.  This  land  was 
very  great,  and  we  sailed  westward  along  by  it. 

The  21  of  June  we  cast  out  our  anchor  at  18 
fathom  before  the  land;  and  then  we  and  John 
Cornelison's  men  rode  on  the  west  side  of  the  land, 
and  there  fetched  ballast :  and  when  we  got  on  board 
again  with  our  ballast,  we  saw  a  white  bear,  that  swam 
towards  our  ship.  Whereupon  we  left  off  our  work, 
and  entering  into  the  boat  with  John  Cornelison's 
men,  rowed  after  her,  and  crossing  her  in  the  way, 
drove  her  from  the  land ;  wherewith  she  swam  further 
into  the  sea,  and  we  followed  her.  And  for  that  our 


120     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

boat  could  not  make  way  after  her,  we  manned  out 
our  scute  also,  the  better  to  follow  her :  but  she  swam 
four  miles  into  the  sea;  yet  we  followed  her  with  the 
most  part  of  all  our  men  of  both  ships  in  three  boats, 
and  struck  oftentimes  at  her,  cutting  and  hewing  her, 
so  that  all  our  arms  were  most  broken  in  pieces.  During 
our  fight  with  her,  she  struck  her  claws  so  hard  in  our 


How  a  bear  came  unto  our  boat,  and  what  took  place  with  him 

boat,  that  the  signs  thereof  were  seen  in  it;  but  as 
hap  was,  it  was  in  the  forehead  of  our  boat :  for  if  it 
had  been  in  the  middle  thereof,  she  had  (peradventure) 
overthrown  it,  they  have  such  force  in  their  claws.  At 
last,  after  we  had  fought  long  with  her,  and  made  her 
weary  with  our  three  boats,  that  kept  about  her,  we 
overcame  her,  and  killed  her :  which  done,  we  brought 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     121 

her  into  our  ship,  and  flayed  her,  her  skin  being  13  foot 
long. 

After  that,  we  rowed  with  our  scute  about  four  miles 
inward  to  the  land,  where  there  was  a  good  haven  and 
good  anchor  ground,  on  the  east  side  being  sandy. 
There  we  cast  out  our  lead,  and  found  16  fathom  deep, 
and  after  that  10  and  12  fathom;  and  rowing  further, 
we  found  that  on  the  east  side  there  was  two  islands, 
that  reached  eastward  into  the  sea:  on  the  west  side 
also  there  was  a  great  creek  or  river,  which  shewed 
also  like  an  island.  Then  we  rowed  to  the  island,  that 
lay  in  the  middle,  and  there  we  found  many  brent 
geese,  which  we  saw  sitting  upon  their  nests,  and  drave 
them  from  them,  and  they  flying  away  cried :  "  Rot, 
rot,  rot."  And  as  they  sat,  we  killed  one  goose  dead 
with  a  stone,  which  we  dressed  and  ate.  and  at  least 
60  eggs,  that  we  took  with  us  aboard  the  ship;  and 
upon  the  22  of  June  we  went  aboard  our  ship  again. 

Those  geese  were  true  brent  geese,  such  as  come 
into  Holland  about  Wieringen,  and  every  year  are 
there  taken  in  abundance,  but  till  this  time  it  was 
never  known,  where  they  laid  and  hatched  their  eggs ; 
so  that  some  men  have  taken  upon  them  to  write 
that  they  grow  upon  trees  in  Scotland,  that  hang  over 
the  water,  and  the  fruits,  which  fall  from  them  down 
into  the  water,  become  young  geese  and  swim  away; 
but  those,  that  fall  upon  the  land,  burst  in  sunder 
and  are  lost.  But  this  is  now  found  to  be  contrary, 
and  it  is  not  to  be  wondered  at,  that  no  man  could 
tell  where  they  breed  their  eggs,  for  that  no  man,  that 
ever  we  knew,  had  ever  been  under  80  degrees,  nor 
that  land  under  80  degrees  was  never  set  down  in  any 
card,  much  less  the  brent  geese  that  breed  therein. 


122     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

The  first  of  July  we  saw  the  Bear  Island  again,  and 
then  John  Cornelison  and  his  officers  came  aboard  of 
our  ship,  to  speak  with  us  about  altering  of  our  course ; 
but  we  being  of  a  contrary  opinion,  it  was  agreed  that 
we  should  follow  on  our  course,  and  he  his :  which  was, 
that  he  (according  to  his  desire)  should  sail  unto  80 
degrees  again;  for  he  was  of  opinion,  that  there  he 
should  find  a  passage  through,  on  the  east  side  of  the 
land,  that  lay  under  80  degrees.  And  upon  that  agree- 
ment we  left  each  other,  they  sailing  northward,  and 
we  southward  because  of  the  ice,  the  wind  being  east- 
south-east. 

The  second  of  July  we  sailed  eastward,  and  on 
the  17  we  saw  the  land  of  Nova  Zembla.  Then  we 
altered  our  course,  and  sailed  north-east  and  by  north, 
and  on  the  19  we  came  to  the  Cross  Island.  There 
stood  two  'crosses  upon  the  land,  whereof  it  had  the 
name. 

The  twentieth  of  July  we  anchored  under  the  island, 
for  we  could  get  no  further  for  the  ice.  There  we  put 
out  our  boat,  and  with  eight  men  rowed  on  land,  and 
went  to  one  of  the  crosses,  where  we  rested  us  awhile, 
to  go  to  the  next  cross ;  but  being  in  the  way  we  saw 
two  bears  by  the  other  cross,  at  which  time  we  had  no 
weapons  at  all  about  us.  The  bears  rose  up  upon  their 
hinder  feet  to  see  us  (for  they  smell  further  than  they 
see),  and  for  that  they  smelt  us,  therefore  they  rose 
upright  and  came  towards  us,  wherewith  we  were  not 
a  little  abashed,  in  such  sort  that  we  had  little  lust  to 
laugh,  and  in  all  haste  went  to  our  boat  again,  still 
looking  behind  us  to  see  if  they  followed  us,  thinking 
to  get  into  the  boat,  and  so  put  off  from  the  land :  but 
the  master  stayed  us,  saying,  "He  that  first  begins  to 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     123 

run  away,  I  will  thrust  this  boat-hook "  (which  he 
then  held  in  his  hand)  "into  his  ribs,  for  it  is  better 
for  us  "  (said  he),  "  to  stay  all  together,  and  see  if  we 
can  make  them  afraid  with  whooping  and  holloaing.'* 
And  so  we  went  softly  towards  the  boat,  and  got  away 


Map  of  Novaya  Zemlya,  showing  entrances  to  Kara  Sea 

glad  that  we  had  escaped   their  claws,  and  that  we 
had  the  leisure  to  tell  our  fellows  thereof. 

The  5  of  August  we  set  sail  again  towards  Ice 
Point,  and  on  the  7  we  had  a  west-south-west  wind, 
and  sailed  along  by  the  land,  south-east  and  south-east 


124     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

and  by  east,  and  saw  but  a  little  ice,  and  then  passed 
by  Cape  Comfort,  which  we  had  much  longed  for. 

The  16  of  August  ten  of  our  men  entering  into 
one  boat,  rowed  to  the  firm  land  at  Nova  Zembla,  and 
drew  the  boat  up  upon  the  ice;  which  done,  we  went 
up  a  high  hill  to  see  the  situation  of  the  land,  and  found 
that  it  reached  south-east  and  south-south-east,  and 
then  again  south,  which  we  disliked,  for  that  it  lay  so 
much  southward :  but  when  we  saw  open. .water  south- 
east and  east-south-east,  we  were  much  comforted 
again,  thinking  that  we  had  won  our  voyage,  and 
knew  not  how  we  should  get  soon  enough  on  board, 
to  certify  William  Barents  thereof. 

The  19  of  August  it  was  indifferent  good  weather, 
the  wind  blowing  south-west,  the  ice  still  driving,  and 
we  set  sail  with  an  indifferent  gale  of  wind,  and  passed 
by  Cape  Desire,  whereby  we  were  once  again  in  good 
hope. 

The  26  of  August  there  blew  a  reasonable  gale 
of  wind,  at  which  time  we  determined  to  sail  back 
to  Cape  Desire,  and  so  home  again,  seeing  that  we 
could  not  get  through  by  the  way  towards  the  Wey- 
gats,  although  we  used  all  the  means  and  industry  we 
could,  to  get  forward ;  but  when  we  had  passed  by  the 
Ice  Haven,  the  ice  began  to  drive  with  such  force,  that 
we  were  enclosed  round  about  therewith,  and  yet  we 
sought  all  the  means  we  could  to  get  out,  but  it  was 
all  in  vain.  And  at  that  time  we  had  like  to  have  lost 
three  men,  that  were  upon  the  ice  to  make  way  for  the 
ship,  if  the  ice  had  held  the  course  it  went ;  but  as  we 
drove  back  again,  and  that  the  ice  also,  whereon  our 
men  stood,  in  like  sort  drove,  they  being  nimble,  as 
the  ship  drove  by  them,  one  of  them  caught  hold  of 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     125 

the  beak  head,  another  upon  the  shrouds,  and  the 
third  upon  the  great  brace  that  hung  out  behind,  and 
so  by  great  adventure,  by  the  hold  that  they  took,  they 
got  safe  into  the  ship  again,  for  which  they  thanked 
God  with  all  their  hearts:  for  it  was  much  likelier 
that  they  should  rather  have  been  carried  away  with 
the  ice,  but  God,  by  the  nimbleness  of  their  hands, 


How  our  ship  stuck  fast  in  the  ice,  whereby  three  of  us  were 
nearly  lost 

delivered  them  out  of  that  danger,  which  was  a  pitiful 
thing  to  behold,  although  it  fell  out  for  the  best, 
for  if  they  had  not  been  nimble,  they  had  surely  died 
for  it. 

The  same  day  in  the  evening  we  got  to  the  west 
side  of  the  Ice  Haven,  where  we  were  forced,  in  great 


126     William  Barents.    Third  Voyage  Northward 

cold,  poverty,  misery,  and  grief,  to  stay  all  that  winter ; 
the  wind  being  then  east  north-east. 

The  27  of  August  the  ice  drove  round  about  the 
ship,  and  yet  it  was  good  weather;  at  which  time  we 
went  on  land,  and  being  there,  it  began  to  blow  south- 
east with  a  reasonable  gale,  and  then  the  ice  came  with 
great  force  before  the  bow,  and  drove  the  ship  up  four 


How  the  ice  heaved  up  the  fore  part  of  our  ship 

foot  high  before,  and  behind  it  seemed  as  if  the  keel 
lay  on  the  ground,  so  that  it  seemed  that  the  ship 
would  be  overthrown  in  the  place.  Whereupon  they 
that  were  in  the  ship  put  out  the  boat,  therewith  to 
save  their  lives,  and  withal  put  out  a  flag,  to  make 
a  sign  to  us  to  come  on  board:  which  we  perceiving, 
and  beholding  the  ship  to  be  lifted  up  in  that  sort, 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     127 

made  all  the  haste  we  could  to  get  on  board,  thinking 
that  the  ship  was  burst  in  pieces,  but  coming  unto  it, 
we  found  it  to  be  in  better  case,  than  we  thought  it  had 
been. 

The  28  of  August  we  got  some  of  the  ice  from  it, 
and  the  ship  began  to  sit  upright  again;  but  before 
it  was  fully  upright,  as  William  Barents  and  the  other 
pilot  went  forward  to  the  bow,  to  see  how  th6  ship 
lay,  and  how  much  it  was  risen,  and  while  they  were 
busy  upon  their  knees  and  elbows  to  measure  how 
much  it  was,  the  ship  burst  out  of  the  ice  with  such  a 
noise  and  so  great  a  crack,  that  they  thought  verily 
that  they  were  all  cast  away,  knowing  not  how  to  save 
themselves. 

The  29  of  August,  the  ship  lying  upright  again,  we 
used  all  the  means  we  could,  with  iron  crowbars  and 
other  instruments,  to  break  the  flakes  of  ice  that  lay 
one  heaped  upon  the  other,  but  all  in  vain ;  so  that  we 
determined  to  commit  ourselves  to  the  mercy  of  God, 
and  to  attend  aid  from  him,  for  that  the  ice  drove  not 
away  in  any  such  sort,  that  it  could  help  us. 

The  30  of  August  the  ice  began  to  drive  together 
one  upon  the  other  with  greater  force  than  before, 
and  bare  against  the  ship  with  a  boisterous  south-west 
wind  and  a  great  snow,  so  that  all  the  whole  ship  was 
borne  up  and  enclosed,  whereby  all  that  was  both 
about  and  in  it  began  to  crack,  so  that  it  seemed  to 
burst  in  a  hundred  pieces,  which  was  most  fearful 
both  to  see  and  hear,  and  made  all  the  hair  of  our  heads 
to  rise  upright  with  fear;  and  after  that,  the  ship 
(by  the  ice  on  both  sides,  that  joined  and  got  under  the 
same)  was  driven  so  upright,  in  such  sort  as  if  it  had 
been  lifted  up  with  a  wrench  or  vice. 


128     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

The  5  of  September  it  was  fair  sunshine  weather 
and  very  calm ;  and  at  evening,  when  we  had  supped, 
the  ice  compassed  about  us  again,  and  we  were  hard 
enclosed  therewith,  the  ship  beginning  to  lie  upon  the 
one  side  and  suffered  much,  but  by  God's  grace  it  still 
remained  tight,  wherewith  we  were  wholly  in  fear  to 
lose  the  ship,  it  was  in  so  great  danger.  At  which 
time  we  took  counsel  together,  and  carried  our  old 
foresail,  with  powder,  lead,  pieces,  muskets,  and  other 
furniture  on  land,  to  make  a  tent  or  hut  about  our 
scute,  that  we  had  drawn  upon  the  land ;  and  at  that 
time  we  carried  some  bread  and  wine  on  land  also, 
with  some  carpenter's  tools,  therewith  to  mend  our 
boat,  that  it  might  serve  us  in  time  of  need. 

The  6  of  September  it  was  indifferent  fair  sea- 
weather  and  sunshine,  the  wind  being  west,  whereby 
we  were  somewhat  comforted,  hoping  that  the  ice 
would  drive  away,  and  that  we  might  get  from  thence 
again. 

The  7  of  September  it  was  indifferent  weather 
again,  but  we  perceived  no  opening  of  the  water,  but 
to  the  contrary  we  lay  hard  enclosed  with  ice,  and  no 
water  at  all  about  the  ship,  no,  not  so  much  as  a  bucket- 
ful. The  same  day  five  of  our  men  went  on  land, 
but  two  of  them  came  back  again;  the  other  three 
went  forward  about  eight  miles  into  the  land,  and  there 
found  a  river  of  sweet  water,  where  also  they  found 
great  store  of  wood,  that  had  been  driven  thither,  and 
there  they  found  the  footsteps  of  harts  and  hinds,  as 
they  thought,  for  they  were  cloven  footed,  some  greater 
footed  than  others,  which  made  them  judge  them  to 
be  so. 

The   11    of  September  it  was  calm  weather,  and 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward      129 

eight  of  us  went  on  land,  every  man  armed,  to  see  if 
that  were  true,  as  our  other  three  companions  had  said, 
that  there  lay  wood  about  the  river;    for  that  seeing 
we  had  so  long  wound  and  turned  about,  sometime  in 
the  ice  and  then  again  got  out,   and  thereby  were 
compelled  to  alter  our  course,  and  at  last  saw  that  we 
could  not  get  out  of  the  ice,  but  rather  became  faster, 
and  could  not  loose  our  ship  as  at  other  times  we  had 
done,  as  also  that  it  began  to  be  near  autumn  and 
winter,  we  took  counsel  together  what  we  were  best  to 
do  according  to  the  time,  that  we  might  winter  there 
and  attend  such  adventure  as  God  would  send  us.    And 
after  we  had  debated  upon  the  matter,  to  keep  and 
defend  ourselves  both  from  the  cold  and  the  wild  beasts, 
we  determined  to  build  a  shed  or  house  upon  the  land, 
to  keep  us  therein  as  well  as  we  could,  and  so  to  commit 
ourselves  unto  the  tuition  of  God.     And  to  that  end  we 
went  further  into  the  land,  to  find  out  the  convenientest 
place  in  our  opinions  to  raise  crur  house  upon,  and  yet 
we  had  not  much  stuff  to  make  it  withal,  in  regard 
that  there  grew  no  trees,  nor  any  other  thing  in  that 
country  convenient  to  build  it  withal.     But  we  leaving 
no   occasion  unsought,   as   our  men  went   abroad  to 
view  the  country,  and  to  see  what  good  fortune  might 
happen    unto    us,    at  last  we   found    an    unexpected 
comfort  in  our  need,  which  was  that  we  found  certain 
trees,  roots  and  all,  (as  our  three  companions  had  said 
before),  which  had  been  driven  upon  the  shore,  either 
from  Tartaria,  Muscovia,  or  elsewhere;   for  there  was 
none  growing  upon  that  land.     Wherewith  (as  if  God 
had  purposely  sent  them  unto  us)  we  were  much  com- 
forted, being  in  good  hope  that  God  would  show  us 
some  further  favour;    for  that  wood  served  us  not 
A.  P.  9 


130     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

only  to  build  our  house,  but  also  to  burn  and  serve  us 
all  the  winter  long;  otherwise  without  all  doubt  we 
had  died  there  miserably  with  extreme  cold. 

The  15  of  September,  in  ^the  morning,  as  one  of 
our  men  held  watch,  we  saw  three  bears,  whereof  the 
one  lay  still  behind  a  piece  of  ice,  and  the  other  two 
came  close  to  the  ship,  which  we  perceiving,  made  our 
pieces  ready  to  shoot  at  them;  at  which  time  there 
stood  a  tub  full  of  meat  upon  the  ice,  which  lay  upon 
the  ice,  to  freshen,  for  that  close  by  the  ship  there 
was  no  water.  One  of  the  bears  went  unto  it,  and  put 
hi  his  head  to  take  out  a  piece  of  the  meat,  but  she 
fared  therewith  as  the  dog  did  with  the  pudding;  for 
as  she  was  snatching  at  the  beef  she  was  shot  into  the 
head,  wherewith  she  fell  down  dead  and  never  stirred. 
The  other  bear  stood  still,  and  looked  upon  her  fellow ; 
and  when  she  had  stood  a  good  while,  she  smelt  her 
fellow,  and  perceiving  that  she  was  dead,  she  ran 
away,  but  we  took  halberts  and  other  arms  with  us 
and  followed  her.  And  at  last  she  came  again  towards 
us,  and  we  prepared  ourselves  to  withstand  her, 
wherewith  she  rose  up  upon  her  hinder  feet,  thinking 
to  ramp  at  us;  but  while  she  reared  herself  up,  one 
of  our  men  shot  her  into  the  belly,  and  with  that  she 
fell  upon  her  fore-feet  again,  and  roaring  as  loud  as 
she  could,  ran  away. 

The  17  of  September  thirteen  of  us  went  where 
the  wood  lay  with  our  sleds,  and  so  drew  five  and  five 
in  a  sled,  and  the  other  three  helped  to  lift  the  wood 
behind,  to  make  us  draw  the  better  and  with  more  ease ; 
and  in  that  manner  we  drew  wood  twice  a  day,  and 
laid  it  on  a  heap  by  the  place  where  we  meant  to  build 
our  house 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     131 

The  25  of  September  we  raised  up  the  principals 
of  our  house,  and  began  to  work  hard  thereon. 

The  26  of  September  we  had  a  west  wind  and 
an  open  sea,  but  our  ship  lay  fast,  wherewith  we  were 
not  a  little  grieved;  but  it  was  God's  will,  which  we 
must  patiently  bear,  and  we  began  to  make  up  our 
house:  part  of  our  men  fetched  wood  to  burn,  the 


How  we  built  a  house  of  wood,  wherein  to  keep  ourselves 
through  the  winter 

rest  played  the  carpenters  and  were  busy  about  the 
house.  As  then  we  were  sixteen  men  in  all,  for  our 
carpenter  was  dead,  and  of  our  sixteen  men  there  was 
still  one  or  other  sick.  . 

The  27th  of  September  it  blew  hard  north-east,  and 
it  froze  so  hard  that,  as  we  put  a  nail  into  our  mouths 

9—2 


132     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

(as,  when  men  work  carpenters'  work,  they  use  to  do), 
there  would  ice  hang  thereon  when  we  took  it  out  again, 
and  make  the  blood  follow.  The  same  day  there  came 
an  old  bear  and  a  young  one  towards  us  as  we  were 
going  to  our  house,  being  all  together  (for  we  durst  not 
go  alone),  which  we  thought  to  shoot  at,  but  she  ran 
away. 

The  29  of  September,  in  the  morning,  the  wind 
was  west,  and  after  noon  it  blew  east,  and  then  we 
saw  three  bears  between  us  and  the  house,  an  old  one 
and  two  young;  but  we  notwithstanding  drew  our 
goods  from  the  ship  to  the  house,  and  so  got  before 
the  bears,  and  yet  they  followed  us.  Nevertheless  we 
would  not  shun  the  way  for  them,  but  holloaed  out 
as  loud  as  we  could,  thinking  that  they  would  have 
gone  away;  but  they  would  not  once  go  out  of  their 
footpath,  but  got  before  us,  wherewith  we  and  they 
that  were  at  the  house  made  a  great  noise,  which  made 
the  bears  run  away,  and  we  were  not  a  little  glad  thereof. 

The  5  of  October  we  brake  up  the  lower  deck  of 
the  fore-part  of  our  ship,  and  with  those  deals  we  covered 
our  house,  and  made  it  slope  overhead  that  the  water 
might  run  off. 

The  8  of  October,  all  the  night  before  it  blew  so 
hard  and  the  same  day  also,  and  snowed  so  fast  that 
we  should  have  smothered,  if  we  had  gone  out  into  the 
air;  and  to  speak  truth,  it  had  not  been  possible  for 
any  man  to  have  gone  one  ship's  length,  though  his 
life  had  lain  thereon;  for  it  was  not  possible  for  us 
to  go  out  of  the  house  or  ship. 

The  11  of  October  it  was  calm  weather,  the  wind 
being  south  and  somewhat  warm,  and  then  we  carried 
our  wine  and  other  victuals  on  land;  and  as  we  were 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     133 

hoising  the  wine  overboard,  there  came  a  bear  towards 
our  ship  that  had  lain  behind  a  piece  of  ice,  and  it 
seemed  that  we  had  waked  her  with  the  noise  we  made ; 
for  we  had  seen  her  lie  there,  but  we  thought  her  to 
be  a  piece  of  ice ;  but  as  she  came  near  us,  we  shot  at 
her,  and  she  ran  away,  so  we  proceeded  in  our  work. 

The  12  of  October  it  blew  north  and  somewhat 
westerly,  and  then  half  of  our  men  slept  in  the  house, 
and  that  was  the  first  time  that  we  lay  in  it;  but  we 
endured  great  cold  because  our  cabins  were  not  made, 
and  besides  that  we  had  not  clothes  enough,  and  we 
could  keep  no  fire,  because  our  chimney  was  not  made, 
whereby  it  smoked  exceedingly. 

The  19  of  October  the  wind  blew  north-east,  and 
then  there  was  but  two  men  and  a  boy  in  the  ship,  at 
which  time  there  came  a  bear  that  sought  forcibly  to 
get  into  the  ship,  although  the  two  men  shot  at  her 
with  pieces  of  wood,  and  yet  she  ventured  upon  them, 
whereby  they  were  in  an  extreme  fear;  and  each  of 
them  seeking  to  save  themselves,  the  two  men  leapt 
into  the  hold,  and  the  boy  climbed  up  the  fore-rigging 
to  save  their  lives.  Meantime  some  of  our  men  shot 
at  her  with  a  musket,  and  then  she  ran  away. 

The  20  of  October  it  was  calm  sunshine  weather, 
and  then  again  we  saw  some  open  places  of  water  in 
the  sea,  at  which  time  we  went  on  board  to  fetch  the 
rest  of  our  beer  out  of  the  ship,  where  we  found  some 
of  the  barrels  frozen  in  pieces,  and  the  iron  hoops 
that  were  upon  the  spruce -beer  barrels  were  also 
frozen  in  pieces. 

The  21  of  October  it  was  calm  sunshine  weather, 
and  then  we  had  almost  fetched  all  our  victuals  out 
of  the  ship. 


134     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

The  24  of  October  we  drew  our  boat  home  to 
our  house,  and  turned  the  bottom  thereof  upwards, 
that,  when  time  served  us  (if  God  saved  our  lives  in  the 
winter  time),  we  might  use  it.  And  after  that,  per- 
ceiving that  the  ship  lay  fast  and  that  there  was  nothing 
less  to  be  expected  than  the  opening  of  the  water, 
we  put  our  anchor  into  the  ship  again,  because  it 
should  not  be  covered  over  and  lost  in  the  snow,  that 
in  the  spring  time  we  might  use  it :  for  we  always  trusted 
in  God  that  he  would  deliver  us  from  thence  towards 
summer  time  either  one  way  or  other. 

Things  standing  at  this  point  with  us,  as  the  sun 
(when  we  might  see  it  best  and  highest)  began  to  be 
very  low,  we  used  all  the  speed  we  could  to  fetch  all 
things  with  sleds  out  of  our  ship  into  our  house,  not 
only  meat  and  drink,  but  all  other  necessaries;  at 
which  time  the  wind  was  north. 

The  26  of  October  we  fetched  all  things  that  were 
necessary  for  the  furnishing  of  our  scute  and  our  boat ; 
and  when  we  had  laden  the  last  sled,  and  stood  ready 
to  draw  it  to  the  house,  our  master  looked  about  him 
and  saw  three  bears  behind  the  ship,  that  were  coming 
towards  us,  whereupon  he  cried  out  aloud  to  fear  them 
away,  and  we  presently  leaped  forth  to  defend  ourselves 
as  well  as  we  could.  And  as  good  fortune  was,  there 
lay  two  halberds  upon  the  sled,  whereof  the  master 
took  one,  and  I  the  other,  and  made  resistance  against 
them  as  well  as  we  could ;  but  the  rest  of  our  men  ran 
to  save  themselves  in  the  ship,  and  as  they  ran,  one  of 
them  fell  into  a  cleft  of  ice,  which  grieved  us  much, 
for  we  thought  verily  that  the  bears  would  have  ran 
unto  him  to  devour  him;  but  God  defended  him,  for 
the  bears  still  made  towards  the  ship  after  the  men, 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     135 

that  ran  thither  to  save  themselves.  Meantime  we 
and  the  man  that  fell  into  the  cleft  of  ice  took  our  ad- 
vantage, and  got  into  the  ship  on  the  other  side ;  which 
the  bears  perceiving,  they  came  fiercely  towards  us, 
that  had  no  other  arms  to  defend  us  withal  but  only 
the  two  halberds,  which  we  doubting  would  not  be 
sufficient,  we  still  gave  them  work  to  do  by  throwing 
billets  of  firewood  and  other  things  at  them,  and 
every  time  we  threw,  they  ran  after  them,  as  a  dog 
useth  to  do  at  a  stone  that  is  cast  at  him.  Meantime 
we  sent  a  man  down  under  hatches  to  strike  fire,  and 
another  to  fetch  pikes;  but  we  could  get  no  fire,  and 
so  we  had  no  means  to  shoot.  At  the  last,  as  the  bears 
came  fiercely  upon  us,  we  struck  one  of  them  with  a 
halberd  upon  the  snout,  wherewith  she  gave  back 
when  she  felt  herself  hurt,  and  went  away,  which  the 
other  two,  that  were  not  so  great  as  she,  perceiving,  ran 
away;  and  we  thanked  God  that  we  were  so  well 
delivered  from  them,  and  so  drew  our  sled  quietly  to 
our  house,  and  there  showed  our  men  what  had  hap- 
pened unto  us. 

The  26  of  October  the  wind  was  north  and  north- 
north-west,  with  indifferent  fair  weather.  Then  we 
saw  open  water  hard  by  the  land,  but  we  perceived 
the  ice  to  drive  in  the  sea  still  towards  the  ship. 

The  27  of  October  the  wind  blew  north-east,  and 
it  snowed  so  fast  that  we  could  not  work  without  the 
door.  That  day  our  men  killed  a  white  fox,  which 
they  flayed,  and  after  they  had  roasted  it,  ate  thereof, 
which  tasted  like  coney's  flesh.  The  same  day  we  set 
up  our  dial  and  made  the  clock  strike,  and  we  hung  up  a 
lamp  to  burn  in  the  night  time,  wherein  we  used  the  fat 
of  the  bear,  which  we  melted  and  burnt  in  the  lamp. 


136     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

The  3  of  November  the  wind  blew  north-west 
with  calm  weather,  and  the  sun  rose  south  and  by 
east  and  somewhat  more  southerly,  and  went  down 
south  and  by  west  and  somewhat  more  southerly; 
and  then  we  could  see  nothing  but  the  upper  part  of 
the  sun  above  the  horizon,  and  yet  the  land,  where  we 
were,  was  as  high  as  the  mast  of  our  ship. 

The  4  of  November  it  was  calm  weather,  but  then 
we  saw  the  sun  no  more,  for  it  was  no  longer  above 
the  horizon.  Then  our  chirurgeon  made  a  bath,  to 
bathe  us  in,  of  a  wine  pipe,  wherein  we  entered  one  after 
the  other,  and  it  did  us  much  good  and  was  a  great 
means  of  our  health.  The  same  day  we  took  a  white 
fox,  that  oftentimes  came  abroad,  not  as  they  used 
at  other  times ;  for  that  when  the  bears  left  us  at  the 
setting  of  the  sun,  and  came  not  again  before  it  rose, 
the  foxes,  to  the  contrary,  came  abroad  when  they  were 
gone. 

The  5  of  November  the  wind  was  north  and  some- 
what west,  and  then  we  saw  open  water  upon  the  sea, 
but  our  ship  lay  still  fast  in  the  ice ;  and  when  the  sun 
had  left  us,  we  saw  the  moon  continually  both  day  and 
night,  and  it  never  went  down,  when  it  was  in  the 
highest  degree. 

The  11  of  November  it  was  indifferent  weather, 
the  wind  north-west.  The  same  day  we  made  a 
round  hoop  of  cable  yarn  and  like  to  a  net,  to  catch 
foxes  withal,  that  we  might  get  them  into  the  house, 
and  it  was  made  like  a  trap,  which  fell  upon  the 
f oxes  as  they  came  under  it ;  and  that  day  we  caught 
one. 

The  12  of  November  the  wind  blew  east,  with 
a  cloudy  sky.  That  day  we  began  to  share  our  wine ; 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     137 

every  man  had  two  glasses  a  day,  but  commonly  our 
drink  was  water,  which  we  melted  out  of  snow,  which 
we  gathered  without  the  house. 

The  13  of  November  it  was  foul  weather,  with 
great  snow,  the  wind  east. 

The  20  of  November  it  was  fair  still  weather,  the 
wind  easterly.  Then  we  washed  our  shirts,  but  it 
was  so  cold  that,  when  we  had  washed  and  wrung  them, 
they  presently  froze  so  stiff  that,  although  we  laid 
them  by  a  great  fire,  the  side  that  lay  next  the  fire 
thawed,  but  the  other  side  was  hard  frozen;  so  that 
we  should  sooner  have  torn  them  in  sunder  than 
have  opened  them,  whereby  we  were  forced  to  put 
them  into  the  seething  water  again  to  thaw  them,  it 
was  so  exceeding  cold. 

The  21  of  November  it  was  indifferent  weather 
with  a  north-east  wind.  Then  we  agreed  that  every 
man  should  take  his  turn  to  cleave  wood,  thereby  to 
ease  our  cook,  that  had  more  than  work  enough  to  do 
twice  a  day,  to  dress  meat  and  to  melt  snow  for  our 
drink;  but  our  master  and  the  pilot  were  exempted 
from  that  work. 

The  22  of  November  the  wind  was  south-east, 
and  it  was  fair  weather;  then  we  had  but  seventeen 
cheeses,  whereof  one  we  ate  amongst  us,  and  the  rest 
were  divided  to  every  man  one  for  his  portion,  which 
they  might  eat  when  he  list. 

The  23  of  November  it  was  indifferent  good 
weather,  the  wind  south-east,  and  as  we  perceived  that 
the  foxes  used  to  come  oftener  and  more  than  they 
were  wont,  to  take  them  the  better  we 'made  certain 
traps  of  thick  planks,  whereon  we  laid  stones,  and 
round  about  them  placed  ends  of  spars  fast  in  the 


138     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

ground,  that  they  might  not  dig  under  them;  and  so 
got  some  of  the  foxes. 

The  28  of  November  it  was  foul  stormy  weather, 
and  the  wind  blew  hard  out  of  the  north,  and  it  snowed 
hard,  whereby  we  were  shut  up  again  in  our  house, 
the  snow  lay  so  closed  before  the  doors. 

The  29  of  November  it  was  fair  clear  weather 
and  a  good  air,  the  wind  northerly;  and  we  found 
means  to  open  our  door  by  shovelling  away  the  snow, 
whereby  we  got  one  of  our  doors  open ;  and  going  out 
we  found  all  our  traps  and  springes  clean  covered  over 
with  snow,  which  we  made  clean,  and  set  them  up 
agam  to  take  foxes;  and  that  day  we  took  one, 
which  as  then  served  us  not  only  for  meat,  but  of 
the  skins  we  made  caps  to  wear  upon  our  heads, 
therewith  to  keep  them  warm  from  the  extreme 
cold. 

The  3  of  December  we  had  the  like  weather,  at 
which  times,  as  we  lay  in  our  cabins,  we  might  hear 
the  ice  crack  in  the  sea,  and  yet  it  was  at  the  least 
two  miles  from  us,  which  made  a  huge  noise,  and  we 
were  of  opinion  that  as  then  the  great  hills  of  ice, 
which  we  had  seen  in  the  sea  in  summer  time,  brake 
one  from  the  other.  And  for  that  during  those  two  or 
three  days,  because  of  the  extreme  smoke,  we  made 
not  so  much  fire  as  we  commonly  used  to  do,  it  froze 
so  sore  within  the  house,  that  the  walls  and  the  roof 
thereof  were  frozen  two  fingers  thick  with  ice,  and  also 
in  our  cabins  where  we  lay.  All  those  three  days, 
while  we  could  not  go  out  by  reason  of  the  foul  weather, 
we  set  up  the  glass  of  twelve  hours,  and  when  it  was 
run  out,  we  set  it  up  again,  still  watching  it  lest  we 
should  miss  our  time.  For  the  cold  was  so  great  that 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     139 

our  clock  was  frozen,  and  might  not  go,  although  we 
hung  more  weight  on  it  than  before. 

The  6  of  December  it  was  foul  weather  again, 
with  an  easterly  wind  and  extreme  cold,  almost  not  to 
be  endured;  whereupon  we  looked  pitifully  one  upon 
the  other,  being  in  great  fear  that,  if  the  extremity  of 
the  cold  grew  to  be  more  and  more,  we  should  all  die 
there  with  cold,  for  that  what  fire  soever  we  made,  it 
would  not  warm  us:  yea,  and  our  sack,  which  is  so 
strong,  was  frozen  very  hard,  so  that  when  we  were  every 
man  to  have  his  part,  we  were  forced  to  melt  it  over 
the  fire,  which  we  shared  every  second  day  about  half 
a  pint  for  a  man,  wherewith  we  were  forced  to  sustain 
ourselves ;  and  at  other  times  we  drank  water,  which 
agreed  not  well  with  the  cold,  and  we  needed  not  to 
cool  it  with  snow  or  ice,  but  we  were  forced  to  melt  it 
out  of  the  snow. 

The  7  of  December  it  was  still  foul  weather,  and 
we  had  a  great  storm  with  a  north-east  wind,  which 
brought  an  extreme  cold  with  it;  at  which  time  we 
knew  not  what  to  do,  and  while  we  sat  consulting 
together  what  were  best  for  us  to  do,  one  of  our  com- 
panions gave  us  counsel  to  burn  some  of  the  sea-coals 
that  we  had  brought  out  of  the  ship,  which  would 
cast  a  great  heat  and  continue  long ;  and  so  at  evening 
we  made  a  great  fire  thereof,  which  cast  a  great  heat. 
At  which  time  we  were  very  careful  to  keep  it  in,  for  that 
the  heat  being  so  great  a  comfort  unto  us,  we  took  care 
how  to  make  it  continue  long;  whereupon  we  agreed 
to  stop  up  all  the  doors  and  the  chimney,  thereby  to 
keep  in  the  heat,  and  so  went  into  our  cabins  to  sleep, 
well  comforted  with  the  heat,  and  so  lay  a  great  while 
talking  together.  But  at  last  we  were  taken  with  a 


140      William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

great  swounding  and  dizziness  in  our  heads,  yet  some 
more  than  other  some,  which  we  first  perceived  by  a  sick 
man  and  therefore  the  less  able  to  bear  it,  and  found 
ourselves  to  be  very  ill  at  ease,  so  that  some  of  us 
that  were  strongest  started  out  of  their  cabins,  and 
first  opened  the  chimney  and  then  the  doors,  but  he 
that  opened  the  door  fell  down  in  a  swound  upon  the 
snow.  Which  I  hearing,  as  lying  in  my  cabin  next  to 
the  door,  started  up,  and  casting  vinegar  in  his  face 
recovered  him  again,  and  so  he  rose  up.  And  when 
the  doors  were  open,  we  all  recovered  our  healths  again 
by  reason  of  the  cold  air;  and  so  the  cold,  which 
before  had  been  so  great  an  enemy  unto  us,  was  then 
the  only  relief  that  we  had,  otherwise  without  doubt 
we  had  died  in  a  sudden  swound.  After  that,  the 
master,  when  we  were  come  to  ourselves  again,  gave 
every  one  of  us  a  little  wine  to  comfort  our  hearts. 

The  8  of  December  it  was  foul  weather,  the  wind 
northerly,  very  sharp  and  cold,  but  we  durst  lay  no 
more  coals  on,  as  we  did  the  day  before,  for  that  our 
misfortune  had  taught  us  that,  to  shun  one  danger,  we 
should  not  run  into  another. 

The  9  of  December  it  was  fair  clear  weather,  the 
sky  full  of  stars;  then  we  set  our  door  wide  open, 
which  before  was  fast  closed  up  with  snow,  and  made 
our  springes  ready  to  take  foxes. 

The  10  of  December  it  was  still  fair  starlight 
weather,  the  wind  north-west.  Then  we  took  two 
foxes,  which  were  good  meat  for  us,  for  as  then  our 
victuals  began  to  be  scant  and  the  cold  still  increased, 
whereunto  their  skins  served  us  for  a  good  defence. 

The  19  of  December  it  was  fair  weather,  the  wind 
being  south.  Then  we  put  each  other  in  good  comfort 


William  Barents.    Third  Voyage  Northward     141 

that  the  sun  was  then  almost  half  over,  and  ready  to 
come  to  us  again,  which  we  sore  longed  for,  it  being 
a  weary  time  for  us  to  be  without  the  sun,  and  to  want 
the  greatest  comfort  that  God  sendeth  unto  man  here 
upon  the  earth,  and  that  which  rejoiceth  every  living 
thing. 

The  20  of  December  before  noon  it  was  fair  clear 
weather,  and  then  we  had  taken  a  fox;  but  towards 
evening  there  rose  such  a  storm  in  the  south-west,  with 
so  great  a  snow,  that  all  the  house  was  enclosed  there- 
with. 

The  21  of  December  it  was  fair  clear  weather, 
with  a  north-east  wind.  Then  we  made  our  door 
clean  again  and  made  a  way  to  go  out,  and  cleansed 
our  traps  for  the  foxes,  which  did  us  great  pleasure 
when  we  took  them,  for  they  seemed  as  dainty  as 
venison  unto  us. 

The  26  of  December  it  was  foul  weather,  the 
wind  north-west,  and  it  was  so  cold  that  we  could  not 
warm  us,  although  we  used  all  the  means  we  could, 
with  great  fires,  good  store  of  clothes,  and  with  hot 
stones  and  balls  laid  upon  our  feet  and  upon  our 
bodies,  as  we  lay  in  our  cabins ;  but  notwithstanding  all 
this,  in  the  morning  our  cabins  were  frozen  white,  which 
made  us  behold  one  the  other  with  sad  countenance. 
But  yet  we  comforted  ourselves  again  as  well  as  we 
could,  that  the  sun  was  then  as  low  as  it  could  go, 
and  that  it  now  began  to  come  to  us  again,  and  we  found 
it  to  be  true ;  for  that  the  days  beginning  to  lengthen, 
the  cold  began  to  strengthen,  but  hope  put  us  in 
good  comfort  and  eased  our  pain. 

The  27  of  December  it  was  still  foul  weather 
with  a  north-west  wind,  so  that  as  then  we  had  not 


142      William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

been  out  in  three  days  together,  nor  durst  not  thrust 
our  heads  out  of  doors;  and  within  the  house  it  was 
so  extreme  cold,  that  as  we  sat  before  a  great  fire,  and 
seemed  to  burn  on  the  fore  side,  we  froze  behind  at 
our  backs,  and  were  all  white,  as  the  countrymen  use 
to  be,  when  they  come  in  at  the  gates  of  the  town  in 
Holland  with  their  sleds,  and  have  gone  all  night. 

The  28  of  December  it  was  still  foul  weather, 
with  a  west  wind,  but  about  evening  it  began  to  clear 
up.  At  which  time  one  of  our  men  made  a  hole  open 
at  one  of  our  doors,  and  went  out  to  see  what  news 
abroad,  but  found  it  so  hard  weather  that  he  stayed 
not  long,  and  told  us  that  it  had  snowed  so  much,  that 
the  snow  lay  "higher  than  our  house,  and  that,  if  he  had 
stayed  out  longer,  his  ears  would  undoubtedly  have 
been  frozen  off. 

The  29  of  December  it  was  calm  weather  and  a 
cloudy  sky,  the  wind  being  southward.  That  day 
he,  whose  turn  it  was,  opened  the  door  and  digged  a 
hole  through  the  snow,  where  we  went  out  of  the  house 
upon  steps,  as  if  it  had  been  out  of  a  cellar,  at  least 
seven  or  eight  steps  high,  each  step  a  foot  from  the 
other. 

Anno  1597 

After  that,  with  great  cold,  danger,  and  disease, 
we  had  brought  the  year  unto  an  end,  we  entered  into 
the  year  of  our  Lord  God  1597,  the  beginning  whereof 
was  in  the  same  manner  as  the  end  of  anno  1596  had 
been;  for  the  weather  continued  as  cold,  foul,  and 
snowy  as  it  was  before,  so  that  upon  the  first  of  January 
we  were  enclosed  in  the  house,  the  wind  then  being 
west.  At  the  same  time  we  agreed  to  share  our  wine, 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward    143 

every  man  a  small  measure  full,  and  that  but  once  in 
two  days.  And  as  we  were  in  great  care  and  fear  that 
it  would  be  long  before  we  should  get  out  from  thence, 
and  we  having  but  small  hope  therein,  some  of  us 
spared  to  drink  wine  as  long  as  we  could,  that,  if  we 
should  stay  long  there,  we  might  drink  it  at  our  need. 

The  5  of  January,  when  we  had  toiled  all  day, 
we  remembered  ourselves  that  it  was  Twelfth  Even, 
and  then  we  prayed  our  master  that  we  might  be 
merry  that  night,  and  said  that  we  were  content  to 
spend  some  of  the  wine  that  night,  which  we  had  spared 
and  which  was  our  share  every  second  day,  and  whereof 
for  certain  days  we  had  not  drunk;  and  so  that  night 
we  made  merry  and  drew  for  king.  And  therewith 
we  had  two  pound  of  meal,  whereof  we  made  pancakes 
with  oil,  and  we  laid  to  every  man  a  white  biscuit, 
which  we  sopped  in  wine.  And  so,  supposing  that  we 
were  in  our  own  country  and  amongst  our  friends, 
it  comforted  us  as  well  as  if  we  had  made  a  great 
banquet  in  our  own  house.  And  we  also  distributed 
tickets,  and  our  gunner  was  king  of  Nova  Zembla, 
which  is  at  least  eight  hundred  miles  long  and  lieth 
between  two  seas. 

The  16  of  January  it  was  fair  weather,  the  wind 
northerly ;  and  then  we  went  now  and  then  out  of  the 
house  to  stretch  out  our  joints  and  our  limbs  with  going 
and  running,  that  we  might  not  become  lame;  and 
about  noon  time  we  saw  a  certain  redness  in  the  sky, 
as  a  show  or  messenger  of  the  sun,  that  began  to  come 
towards  us. 

The  23  of  January  it  was  fair  calm  weather,  with 
a  south-west  wind.  Then  four  of  us  went  to  the 
ship  and  comforted  each  other,  giving  God  thanks 


144    William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

that  the  hardest  time  of  the  winter  was  past,  being  in 
good  hope  that  we  should  live  to  talk  of  those  things 
at  home  in  our  own  country;  and  when  we  were  in 
the  ship,  we  found  that  the  water  rose  higher  and 
higher  in  it,  and  so  each  of  us  taking  a  biscuit  or  two 
with  us,  we  went  home  again. 

The  24  of  January  it  was  fair  clear  weather,  with  a 
west  wind.  Then  I  and  Jacob  Heemskerck,  and  another 
with  us,  went  to  the  sea-side  on  the  south  side  of  Nova 
Zembla,  where,  contrary  to  our  expectation,  I,  the  first 
of  all,  saw  the  edge  of  the  sun;  wherewith  we  went 
speedily  home  again,  to  tell  William  Barents  and  the 
rest  of  our  companions  that  joyful  news.  But  William 
Barents,  being  a  wise  and  well  experienced  pilot,  would 
not  believe  it,  esteeming  it  to  be  about  fourteen  days 
too  soon  for  the  sun  to  shine  in  that  part  of  the  world ; 
but  we  earnestly  affirmed  the  contrary  and  said  we 
had  seen  the  sun.  Whereupon  divers  wagers  were 
laid. 

The  25  and  26  of  January  it  was  misty  and  close 
weather,  so  that  we  could  not  see  anything.  Then 
they,  that  laid  the  contrary  wager  with  us,  thought 
that  they  had  won;  but  upon  the  twenty-seven  day 
it  was  clear  weather,  and  then  we  saw  the  sun  in  his 
full  roundness  above  the  horizon,  whereby  it  manifestly 
appeared  that  we  had  seen  it  upon  the  twenty-four 
day  of  January. 

The  26  of  January  in  the  evening  the  sick  man, 
that  was  amongst  us,  was  very  weak,  and  felt  himself 
to  be  extreme  sick,  for  he  had  lain  long  time,  and  we 
comforted  him  as  well  as  we  might,  and  gave  him  the 
best  admonition  that  we  could,  but  he  died  not  long 
after  midnight. 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward    145 

The  27  of  January  it  was  fair  clear  weather,  with 
a  south-west  wind.  Then  in  the  morning  we  digged 
a  hole  in  the  snow,  hard  by  the  house,  but  it  was  still 
so  extreme  cold  that  we  could  not  stay  long  at  work, 
and  so  we  digged  by  turns,  every  man  a  little  while, 
and  then  went  to  the  fire,  and  another  went  and 
supplied  his  place,  till  at  last  we  digged  seven  foot 
depth,  where  we  went  to  bury  the  dead  man.  After 
that,  when  we  had  read  certain  chapters  and  sung  some 
psalms,  we  all  went  out  and  buried  the  man;  which 
done,  we  went  in  and  broke  our  fasts.  And  while 
we  were  at  meat,  and  discoursed  amongst  ourselves 
touching  the  great  quantity  of  snow,  that  continually 
fell  in  that  place,  we  said  that,  if  it  fell  out  that  our 
house  should  be  closed  up  again  with  snow,  we  would  find 
the  means  to  climb  out  at  the  chimney.  Whereupon  our 
master  went  to  try  if  he  could  climb  up  through  the 
chimney  and  so  get  out,  and  while  he  was  climbing, 
one  of  our  men  went  forth  of  the  door  to  see  if  the 
master  were  out  or  not,  who,  standing  upon  the  snow, 
saw  the  sun,  and  called  us  all  out;  wherewith  we  all 
went  forth  and  saw  the  sun  in  his  full  roundness  a  little 
above  the  horizon.  And  then  it  was  without  all  doubt 
that  we  had  seen  the  sun  upon  the  24  of  January, 
which  made  us  all  glad,  and  we  gave  God  hearty  thanks 
for  his  grace  shewed  unto  us,  that  that  glorious  light 
appeared  unto  us  again. 

The  5  of  February  it  was  still  foul  weather,  the 
wind  being  east  with  great  store  of  snow,  whereby 
we  were  shut  up  again  into  the  house  and  had  no  other 
way  to  get  out  but  by  the  chimney,  and  those,  that 
could  not  climb  out,  were  fain  to  help  themselves  within 
as  well  as  they  could. 

A.  P.  10 


146    William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

The  12  of  February  it  was  clear  weather  and  very 
calm,  the  wind  south-west.  Then  we  made  our  traps 
and  springes  clean  again.  Meantime  there  came  a  great 
bear  towards  our  house,  which  made  us  all  go  in,  and 
we  levelled  at  her  with  our  muskets,  and  as  she  came 
right  before  our  door,  we  shot  her  into  the  breast  clean 
through  the  heart,  the  bullet  passing  through  her  body 
and  went  out  again  at  her  tail,  and  was  as  flat  as  a 
counter.  The  bear  feeling  the  blow,  leapt  backwards, 
and  ran  twenty  or  thirty  foot  from  the  house,  and  there 
lay  down,  wherewith  we  leapt  all  out  of  the  house 
and  ran  to  her,  and  found  her  still  alive.  And  when 
she  saw  us,  she  reared  up  her  head,  as  if  she  would  gladly 
have  done  us  some  mischief;  but  we  trusted  her  not, 
for  that  we  had  tried  her  strength  sufficiently  before, 
and  therefore  we  shot  her  twice  into  the  body  again, 
and  therewith  she  died.  Then  we  ripped  up  her  belly, 
and  taking  out  her  guts,  drew  her  home  to  the  house, 
where  we  flayed  her  and  took  at  least  one  hundred 
pound  of  fat  out  of  her  belly,  which  we  melted  and 
burnt  in  our  lamp.  This  grease  did  us  great  good 
service,  for  by  that  means  we  still  kept  a  lamp  burning 
all  night  long,  which  before  we  could  not  do  for  want 
of  grease;  and  every  man  had  means  to  burn  a  lamp 
in  his  cabin  for  such  necessaries  as  he  had  to  do.  The 
bear's  skin  was  nine  foot  long,  and  seven  foot  broad. 

The  13  of  February  it  was  fair  clear  weather  with 
a  hard  west  wind,  at  which  time  we  had  more  light  in 
our  house  by  burning  of  lamps,  whereby  we  had  means 
to  pass  the  time  away  by  reading  and  other  exercises, 
which  before  (when  we  could  not  distinguish  day  from 
night  by  reason  of  the  darkness,  and  had  not  lamps 
continually  burning)  we  could  not  do. 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward    147 

The  18  of  February  it  was  foul  weather  with  much 
snow  and  very  cold,  the  wind  being  south-west;  and 
in  the  night  time,  as  we  burnt  lamps  and  some  of  our 
men  lay  awake,  we  heard  beasts  run  upon  the  roof  of 
our  house,  which  by  reason  of  the  snow  made  the 
noise  of  their  feet  sound  more  than  otherwise  it  would 


How  we  shot  a  bear,  wherefrom  we  got  a  good  hundred  pounds' 
weight  of  grease 

have  done,  the  snow  was  so  hard  and  cracked  so  much 
that  it  gave  a  great  sound,  whereby  we  thought  they 
had  been  bears ;  but  when  it  was  day,  we  saw  no  footing 
but  of  foxes,  and  we  thought  they  had  been  bears,  for 
the  night,  which  of  itself  is  solitary  and  fearful,  made 
that  which  was  doubtful  to  be  more  doubtful  and 
worse  feared. 

10—2 


148    William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

The  22  of  February  it  was  clear  fair  weather  with  a 
south-west  wind.  Then  we  made  ready  a  sled  to  fetch 
more  wood,  for  need  compelled  us  thereunto;  for,  as 
they  say,  hunger  driveth  the  wolf  out  of  the  wood. 
And  eleven  of  us  went  together,  all  well  appointed  with 
our  arms;  but  coming  to  the  place  where  we  should 
have  the  wood,  we  could  not  come  by  it,  by  reason  it 
lay  so  deep  under  the  snow,  whereby  of  necessity  we 
were  compelled  to  go  further,  where  with  great  labour 
and  trouble  we  got  some;  but  as  we  returned  back 
again  therewith,  it  was  so  sore  labour  unto  us  that  we 
were  almost  out  of  comfort,  for  that  by  reason  of  the 
long  cold  and  trouble  that  we  had  endured,  we  were 
become  so  weak  and  feeble  that  we  had  little  strength, 
and  we  began  to  be  in  doubt  that  we  should  lose  our 
strength,  and  should  not  be  able  to  fetch  any  more 
wood,  and  so  we  should  have  died  with  cold;  but 
the  present  necessity,  and  the  hope  we  had  of  better 
weather,  increased  our  forces,  and  made  us  do  more 
than  our  strengths  afforded.  And  when  we  came  near 
to  our  house,  we  saw  much  open  water  in  the  sea, 
which  in  long  time  we  had  not  seen,  which  also  put 
us  in  good  comfort  that  things  would  be  better. 

The  3  of  March  it  was  fair  weather,  with  a  south- 
west wind ;  at  which-  time  our  sick  men  were  somewhat 
better,  and  sat  upright  in  their  cabins  to  do  some- 
thing to  pass  the  time  away,  but  after  they  found 
that  they  were  too  ready  to  stir  before  their  times. 

The  4  of  March  it  was  fair  weather  with  a  west 
wind.  The  same  day  there  came  a  bear  to  our  house, 
whom  we  watched  with  our  pieces  as  we  did  before, 
and  shot  at  her  and  hit  her,  but  she  run  away.  At 
that  time  five  of  us  went  to  our  ship,  where  we  found 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward    149 

that  the  bears  had  madfe  work,  and  had  opened  our 
cook's  cupboard,  that  was  covered  over  with  snow, 
thinking  to  find  something  in  it,  and  had  drawn  it 
out  of  the  ship,  where  we  found  it. 

The  11  of  March  twelve  of  us  went  to  the  place 
where  we  used  to  go,  to  fetch  a  sled  of  wood,  but  still 
we  had  more  pain  and  labour  therewith,  because  we 
were  weaker;  and  when  we  came  home  with  it  and 
were  very  weary,  we  prayed  the  master  to  give  either 
of  us  a  draught  of  wine,  which  he  did,  wherewith  we 
were  somewhat  relieved  and  comforted,  and  after  that 
were  the  willinger  to  labour,  which  was  unsupportable 
for  us,  if  mere  extremity  had  not  compelled  us  there- 
unto, saying  oftentimes  one  unto  the  other,  that  if 
the  wood  were  to  be  bought  for  money,  we  would  give 
all  our  earnings  or  wages  for  it. 

The  3  of  April  it  was  fair  clear  weather,  with  a 
north-east  wind  and  very  calm;  then  we  made  a  staff 
to  play  at  golf,  thereby  to  stretch  our  joints,  which 
we  sought,  by  all  the  means  we  could,  to  do. 

The  6  of  April  it  was  still  foul  weather,  with  a 
stiff  north-west  wind.  That  night  there  came  a  bear 
to  our  house,  and  we  did  the  best  we  could  to  shoot  at 
her,  but  because  it  was  moist  weather  and  the  powder 
damp,  our  piece  would  not  give  fire,  wherewith  the 
bear  came  boldly  toward  the  house,  and  came  down 
the  stairs  close  to  the  door,  seeking  to  break  into  the 
house ;  but  our  master  held  the  door  fast  to,  and  being 
in  great  haste  and  fear,  could  not  bar  it  with  the  piece 
of  wood  that  we  used  thereunto;  but  the  bear  seeing 
that  the  door  was  shut,  she  went  back  again,  and 
within  two  hours  after  she  came  again,  and  went  round 
about  and  upon  the  top  of  the  house,  and  made  such 


150     William  Barents.     Third   Voyage  Northward 

a  roaring,  that  it  was  fearful  to  hear,  and  at  last  got 
to  the  chimney,  and  made  such  work  there,  that  we 
thought  she  would  have  broken  it  down,  and  tore  the 
sail,  that  was  made  fast  about  it,  in  many  pieces  with  a 
great  and  fearful  noise;  but  for  that  it  was  night  we 
made  no  resistance  against  her,  because  we  could  not 
see  her.  At  last  she  went  away  and  left  us. 

The  15  of  April  it  was  fair  calm  weather  with  a 
north  wind;  then  seven  of  us  went  aboard  the  ship 
to  see  in  what  case  it  was,  and  found  it  to  be  all  in  one 
sort;  and  as  we  came  back  again  there  came  a  great 
bear  towards  us,  against  whom  we  began  to  make 
defence ;  but  she  perceiving  that,  made  away  from  us, 
and  we  went  to  the  place  from  whence  she  came,  to  see 
her  den,  where  we  found  a  great  hole  made  in  the  ice, 
about  a  man's  length  in  depth,  the  entry  thereof  being 
very  narrow,  and  within  wide.  There  we  thrust  in  our 
pikes  to  feel  if  there  was  anything  within  it,  but 
perceiving  it  was  empty,  one  of  our  men  crept  into  it, 
but  not  too  far,  for  it  was  fearful  to  behold.  After  that 
we  went  along  by  the  sea  side,  and  there  we  saw  that 
in  the  end  of  March  and  the  beginning  of  April  the 
ice  was  in  such  wonderful  manner  risen  and  piled  up 
one  upon  the  other,  that  it  was  wonderful,  in  such 
manner  as  if  there  had  been  whole  towns  made  of  ice, 
with  towers  and  bulwarks  round  about  them. 

The  16  of  April  it  was  foul  weather,  the  wind 
north-west,  whereby  the  ice  began  somewhat  to  break. 

The  17  of  April  it  was  fair  clear  weather  with  a 
south-west  wind;  and  then  seven  of  us  went  to  the 
ship,  and  there  we  saw  open  water  in  the  sea,  and  then 
we  went  over  the  ice  hills  as  well  as  we  could  to  the 
water,  for  in  six  or  seven  months  we  had  not  gone  so 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward    151 

near  unto  it;  and  when  we  got  to  the  water,  there 
we  saw  a  little  bird  swimming  therein,  but  as  soon  as 
it  espied  us,  it  dived  under  the  water,  which  we  took 
for  a  sign  that  there  was  more  open  water  in  the 
sea  than  there  had  been  before,  and  that  the  time 
approached  that  the  water  would  be  open. 

The  29  of  April  it  was  fair  weather  with  a  south- 
west wind.  Then  we  played  at  golf,  both  to  the  ship 
and  from  thence  again  homeward,  to  exercise  our- 
selves. 

The  30  of  April  it  was  fair  weather,  the  wind 
south-west;  then  in  the  night  we  could  see  the  sun  in 
the  north,  when  it  was  in  the  highest,  just  above  the 
horizon,  so  that  from  that  time  we  saw  the  sun  both 
night  and  day. 

The  1  of  May  it  was  fair  weather  with  a  west  wind ; 
then  we  sod  our  last  flesh,  which  for  a  long  time  we  had 
spared,  and  it  was  still  very  good,  and  the  last  morsel 
tasted  as  well  as  the  first,  only  it  had  but  one  fault, 
which  was  that  it  would  last  no  longer. 

The  2  of  May  it  was  foul  weather  with  a  storm 
out  of  the  south-west,  whereby  the  sea  was  almost 
clear  of  ice,  and  then  we  began  to  speak  about  getting 
from  thence,  for  we  had  kept  house  long  enough  there. 

The  3  of  Mayat  was  still  foul  weather  with  a  south- 
west wind,  whereby  the  ice  began  wholly  to  drive  away, 
but  it  lay  fast  about  the  ship.  And  when  our  best  meat, 
as  flesh,  barley,  and  other  things,  began  to  fail  us,  which 
was  our  greatest  sustenance,  and  that  it  behoved  us 
to  be  somewhat  strong,  to  sustain  the  labour  that  we 
were  to  undergo  when  we  went  from  thence,  the  master 
shared  the  rest  of  the  pork  amongst  us,  which  was  a 
small  barrel  with  salt  pork  in  pickle,  whereof  every 


152    William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

one  of  us  haoLtwo  ounces  a  day,  which  continued  for 
the  space  of  three  weeks,  and  then  it  was  eaten  up. 

The  4  of  May  it  was  indifferent  fair  weather,  the 
wind  south-west.  That  day  five  of  us  went  to  the  ship, 
and  found  it  lying  still  as  fast  in  the  ice,  more  than 
before;  for  about  the  middle  of  March  it  was  but  75 
paces  from  the  open  water,  and  now  it  was  500  paces 
from  the  water  and  enclosed  round  about  with  high 
hills  of  ice,  which  put  us  in  no  small  fear  how  we 
should  bring  our  scute  and  our  boat  through  or  over 
that  way  into  the  water,  when  we  went  to  leave  that 
place. 

The  9  of  May  it  was  fair  clear  weather  with  an 
indifferent  wind  out  of  the  north-east;  at  which  time 
the  desire,  that  our  men  had  to  be  gone  from  thence, 
still  more  and  more  increased,  and  then  they  agreed 
to  speak  to  William  Barents  to  move  the  master  to  go 
from  thence,  but  he  held  them  off  with  fair  words; 
and  yet  it  was  not  done  in  a  mutinous  manner,  but  to 
take  the  best  counsel  with  reason  and  good  advice,  for 
they  let  themselves  easily  be  talked  over. 

The  20  of  May  at  noon  we  spake  unto  the  master, 
and  told  him  that  it  was  time  to  make  preparation  to 
be  gone,  if  he  would  ever  get  away  from  thence ;  where- 
unto  he  made  answer  that  his  own  life  was  as  dear  unto 
him  as  any  of  ours  unto  us,  nevertheless  he  willed  us 
to  make  haste  to  prepare  our  clothes  and  other  things 
ready  and  fit  for  our  voyage,  and  that  in  the  meantime 
we  should  patch  and  amend  them,  that  after  it  might 
be  no  hindrance  unto  us,  and  that  we  should  stay  till 
the  month  of  May  was  past,  and  then  make  ready  the 
scute  and  the  boat  and  all  other  things  fit  and  convenient 
for  our  journey. 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward    153 

The  22  of  May  it  was  fair  weather  with  a  north- 
west wind;  and  for  that  we  had  almost  spent  all  our 
wood,  we  brake  the  portal  of  our  door  down  and 
burnt  it. 

The  28  of  May  it  was  foul  weather  with  a  north- 
west wind ;  after  noon  it  began  to  be  somewhat  better. 
Then  seven  of  us  went  unto  the  ship,  and  fetched  such 
things  from  thence  as  should  serve  us  for  the  furnishing 
of  our  scute  and  our  boat,  as  the  old  foresail  to  make 
the  sails  for  our  boat  and  our  scute,  and  some  tackles 
and  other  things  necessary  for  us. 

The  29  of  May,  in  the  morning,  it  was  reasonable  fair 
weather  with  a  west  wind.  Then  ten  of  us  went  unto 
the  scute  to  bring  it  to  the  house  to  dress  it  and  make 
it  ready  to  sail,  but  we  found  it  deep  hidden  under  the 
snow,  and  were  fain  with  great  pain  and  labour  to  dig 
it  out ;  but  when  we  had  gotten  it  out  of  the  snow,  and 
thought  to  draw  it  to  the  house,  we  could  not  do  it, 
because  we  were  too  weak.  Wherewith  we  became 
wholly  out  of  heart,  doubting  that  we  should  not  be 
able  to  go  forward  with  our  labour;  but  the  master 
encouraging  us  bade  us  strive  to  do  more  than  we  were 
able,  saying  that  both  our  lives  and  our  welfare  con- 
sisted therein,  and  that  if  we  could  not  get  the  scute 
from  thence  and  make  it  ready,  then  he  said  we  must 
dwell  there  as  burghers  of  Nova  Zembla,  and  make  our 
graves  in  that  place.  But  there  wanted  no  good  will 
in  us,  but  only  strength,  which  made  us  for  that  time 
to  leave  off  work  and  let  the  scute  lie  still,  which  was 
no  small  grief  unto  us  and  trouble  to  think  what  were 
best  for  us  to  do.  But  after  noon,  being  thus  comfort- 
less come  home,  we  took  heart  again,  and  determined 
to  turn  the  boat,  that  lay  by  the  house  with  her  keel 


154    William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

upwards,  and  to  amend  it  and  heighten  the  gunwales, 
that  it  might  be  the  fitter  to  carry  us  over  the  sea; 
for  we  made  full  account  that  we  had  a  long,  trouble- 
some voyage  in  hand,  wherein  we  might  have  many 
crosses,  and  wherein  we  should  not  be  sufficiently 
provided  for  all  things  necessary,  although  we  took 


How  we  made  ready  to  sail  back  again  to  Holland 

never  so  much  care.  And  while  we  were  busy  about 
our  work  there  came  a  great  bear  unto  us.  Where- 
with we  went  into  our  house  and  stood  to  watch  her 
in  our  three  doors  with  arquebuses,  and  one  stood  in 
the  chimney  with  a  musket.  This  bear  came  boldlier 
unto  us  than  ever  any  had  done  before;  for  she  came 
to  the  nether  step  that  went  to  one  of  our  doors,  and 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward    155 

the  man  that  stood  in  the  door  saw  her  not,  because 
he  looked  towards  the  other  door.  But  they  that 
stood  within  saw  her  and  in  great  fear  called  to  him, 
wherewith  he  turned  about,  and  although  he  was 
in  a  maze  he  shot  at  her,  and  the  bullet  passed  clean 
through  her  body:  whereupon  she  ran  away.  Yet  it 
was  a  fearful  thing  to  see,  for  the  bear  was  almost  upon 
him  before  he  saw  her,  so  that  if  the  piece  had  failed 
to  give  fire  (as  oftentimes  they  do)  it  had  cost  him  his 
life,  and  it  may  be  that  the  bear  would  have  gotten 
into  the  house.  The  bear  being  gone  somewhat  from 
the  house,  lay  down.  Wherewith  we  went  all  armed 
and  killed  her  outright,  and  when  we  had  ripped  open 
her  belly  we  found  a  piece  of  a  buck  therein,  with  hair, 
skin  and  all,  which  not  long  before  she  had  torn  and 
devoured. 

The  30  of  May  it  was  indifferent  fair  weather, 
not  very  cold,  but  dark,  the  wind  west.  Then  we 
began  to  set  ourselves  to  work  about  the  boat  to  amencl 
it,  the  rest  staying  in  the  house  to  make  the  sails  and 
all  other  things  ready  that  were  necessary  for  us.  But 
while  we  were  busy  working  at  our  boat,  there  came 
a  bear  unto  us,  wherewith  we  were  forced  to  leave 
work ;  but  she  was  shot  by  our  men.  Then  we  brake 
down  the  planks  of  the  roof  of  our  house,  to  amend  our 
boat  withal,  and  so  proceeded  in  our  work  as  well  as  we 
could ;  for  every  man  was  willing  to  labour,  for  we  had 
sore  longed  for  it,  and  did  more  than  we  were  able  to  do. 

The  31  of  May  it  was  fair  weather,  but  somewhat 
colder  than  before,  the  wind  being  south-west,  whereby 
the  ice  drave  away,  and  we  wrought  hard  about  our 
boat.  But  when  we  were  in  the  chiefest  part  of  work, 
there  came  another  bear,  as  if  they  had  smelt  that  we 


156    William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

would  be  gone,  and  that  therefore  they  desired  to  taste 
a  piece  of  some  of  us ;  for  that  was  the  third  day,  one 
after  the  other,  that  they  set  so  fiercely  upon  us.  So  that 
we  were  forced  to  leave  our  work  and  go  into  the  house, 
and  she  followed  us ;  but  we  stood  with  our  pieces  to 
watch  her,  and  shot  three  pieces  at  her,  two  from  our 
doors  and  one  out  of  the  chimney,  which  all  three  hit 
her,  whereby  she  fared  as  the  dog  did  with  the  pudding. 
But  her  death  did  us  more  hurt  than  her  life,  for  after 
we  ripped  her  belly,  we  dressed  her  liver  and  ate  it, 
which  in  the  taste  liked  us  well,  but  it  made  us  all  sick, 
specially  three  that  were  exceeding  sick,  and  we  verily 
thought  that  we  should  have  lost  them,  for  all  their 
skins  came  off  from  the  foot  to  the  head.  But  yet  they 
recovered  again,  for  the  which  we  gave  God  hearty 
thanks ;  for  if  as  then  we  had  lost  these  three  men,  it 
was  a  hundred  to  one  that  we  should  never  have  gotten 
from  thence,  because  we  should  have  had  too  few  men 
to  draw  and  lift  at  our  need. 

The  3  of  June,  in  the  morning,  it  was  fair  clear 
weather,  the  wind  west;  and  then  we  were  somewhat 
better,  and  took  great  pains  with  the  boat,  that  at 
last  we  got  it  ready,  after  we  had  wrought  six  days  upon 
it.  About  evening  it  began  to  blow  hard,  and  there- 
with the  water  was  very  open,  which  put  us  in  good 
comfort  that  our  deliverance  would  soon  follow,  and 
that  we  should  once  get  out  of  that  desolate  and 
fearful  place. 

The  4  of  June  it  was  fair  clear  weather  and  indifferent 
warm ;  and  about  the  south-east  sun  (half  past  7  a.m.) 
eleven  of  us  went  to  our  scute  where  it  then  lay,  and 
drew  it  towards  the  ship.  At  which  time  the  labour 
seemed  lighter  unto  us  than  it  did  before,  when  we  took 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward    157 

it  in  hand  and  were  forced  to  leave  it  off  again.  The 
reason  thereof  was  the  opinion  that  we  had,  that  the 
snow  as  then  lay  harder  upon  the  ground,  and  so  was 
become  stronger,  and  it  may  be  that  our  courages  were 
better  to  see  that  the  time  gave  us  open  water,  and  that 
our  hope  was  that  we  should  get  from  thence.  And  so 
three  of  our  men  stayed  by  the  scute  to  build  her  to 
our  minds ;  and  for  that  it  was  a  herring  scute,  which 
are  made  narrow  behind,  therefore  they  sawed  it  off 
behind,  and  made  it  a  broad  stern  and  better  to  brook 
the  seas.  They  built  it  also  somewhat  higher,  and 
dressed  it  up  as  well  they  could.  The  rest  of  our  men 
were  busy  in  the  house  to  make  all  other  things  ready 
for  our  voyage,  and  that  day  drew  two  sleds  with 
victuals  and  other  goods  unto  the  ship,  that  lay  about 
half  way  between  the  house  and  the  open  water,  so  that 
after  they  might  have  so  much  the  shorter  way  to  carry 
the  goods  unto  the  water  side,  when  we  should  go  away. 
At  which  time  all  the  labour  and  pains  that  we  took 
seemed  light  and  easy  unto  us,  because  of  the  hope 
that  we  had  to  get  out  of  that  wild,  desert,  irksome, 
fearful,  and  cold  country. 

The  11  of  June  it  was  foul  weather  and  it  blew 
hard  north-north-west,  so  that  all  day  we  could  do 
nothing,  and  we  were  in  great  fear  lest  the  storm  would 
carry  the  ice  and  the  ship  both  away  together  (which 
might  well  have  come  to  pass) ;  then  we  should  have 
been  in  greater  misery  than  ever  we  were,  for  that  our 
goods,  both  victuals  and  others,  were  then  all  in  the 
ship ;  but  God  provided  so  well  for  us,  that  it  fell  not 
out  so  unfortunately. 

The  12  of  June  it  was  indifferent  fair  weather. 
Then  we  went  with  hatchets,  halberds,  shovels,  and 


158    William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

other  instruments,  to  make  the  way  plain  where  we 
should  draw  the  scute  and  the  boat  to  the  water  side, 
along  the  way  that  lay  full  of  knobs  and  hills  of  ice, 
where  we  wrought  sore  with  our  hatchets  and  other 
instruments.  And  while  we  were  in  the  chief est  of 
our  work,  there  came  a  great  lean  bear  out  of  the  sea 
upon  the  ice  towards  us,  which  we  judged  to  come  out 
of  Tartaria,  for  we  had  seen  of  them  80  or  120  miles 
within  the  sea.  And  for  that  we  had  no  muskets,  but 
only  one  which  our  surgeon  carried,  I  ran  in  great  haste 
towards  the  ship  to  fetch  one  or  two,  which  the  bear 
perceiving  ran  after  me,  and  was  very  likely  to  have 
overtaken  me ;  but  our  company  seeing  that,  left  their 
work  and  ran  after  her,  which  made  the  bear  turn 
towards  them  and  left  me.  But  when  she  ran  towards 
them,  she  was  shot  into  the  body  by  the  surgeon,  and 
ran  away ;  but  because  the  ice  was  so  uneven  and  hilly, 
she  could  not  go  far,  but  being  by  us  overtaken,  we 
killed  her  outright,  and  smote  her  teeth  out  of  her 
head,  while  she  was  yet  living. 

The  13  of  June  it  was  fair  weather.  Then  the 
master  and  the  carpenters  went  to  the  ship,  and  there 
made  the  scute  and  the  boat  ready,  so  that  there  rested 
nothing  as  then,  but  only  to  bring  it  down  to  the  water 
side.  The  master  and  those  that  were  with  him,  seeing 
that  it  was  open  water  and  a  good  west  wind,  came 
back  to  the  house  again,  and  there  he  spake  unto 
William  Barents  (that  had  been  long  sick),  and  showed 
him  that  he  thought  it  good  (seeing  it  was  a  fit  time) 
to  go  from  thence,  and  so  willed  the  company  to  drive 
the  boat  and  the  scute  down  to  the  water  side,  and  in 
the  name  of  God  to  begin  our  voyage  to  sail  from  Nova 
Zembla.  Then  William  Barents  wrote  a  letter,  which 


•r 

I 

I 


. 


160    William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

he  put  into  a  musket's  charge  and  hanged  it  up  in  the 
chimney,  showing  how  we  came  out  of  Holland  to  sail 
to  the  kingdom  of  China,  and  what  had  happened  unto 
us  being  there  on  land,  with  all  our  crosses,  that  if  any 
man  chanced  to  come  thither,  they  might  know  what 
had  happened  unto  us,  and  how  we  had  been  forced 
in  our  extremity  to  make  that  house,  and  had  dwelt 
10  months  therein.  And  for  that  we  were  now  forced 
to  put  to  sea  in  two  small  open  boats  and  to  undertake 
a  dangerous  and  adventurous  voyage  in  hand,  the 
master  wrote  two  letters,  which  most  of  us  subscribed 
unto,  signifying  how  we  had  stayed  there  upon  the  land 
in  great  trouble  and  misery,  in  hope  that  our  ship  would 
be  freed  from  the  ice  and  that  we  should  sail  away  with 
it  again,  and  how  it  fell  out  to  the  contrary,  and  that 
the  ship  lay  fast  in  the  ice ;  so  that  in  the  end,  the  time 
passing  away  and  our  victuals  beginning  to  fail  us,  we 
were  forced,  for  the  saving  of  our  own  lives,  to  leave 
the  ship  and  to  sail  away  in  our  open  boats,  and  so  to 
commit  ourselves  into  the  hands  of  God.  Of  which 
letters  each  boat  had  one,  that  if  we  chanced  to  lose 
one  another,  or  that  by  storms  or  any  other  misadven- 
ture we  happened  to  be  cast  away,  that  then  by  the 
scute  that  escaped  men  might  know  how  we  left  each 
other.  And  so,  having  finished  all  things  as  we  de- 
termined, we  drew  the  boat  to  the  water  side  and  left  a 
man  in  it,  and  went  and  fetched  the  scute,  and  after 
that  eleven  sleds  with  goods,  as  victuals  and  some  wine 
that  yet  remained,  and  the  merchants'  goods,  of  which 
we  took  every  care  to  preserve  as  much  as  was  possible, 
viz.,  six  packs  with  fine  woollen  cloth,  a  chest  with  linen, 
two  packets  with  velvet,  two  small  chests  with  money, 
two  dry  fats  with  the  men's  clothes  and  other  things, 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     161 

13  barrels  of  bread,  a  barrel  of  cheese,  a  flitch  of  bacon, 
two  runlets  of  oil,  six  small  runlets  of  wine,  two  runlets 
of  vinegar,  with  other  packs  belonging  to  the  sailors; 
so  that  when  they  lay  all  together  upon  a  heap,  a  man 
would  have  judged  that  they  would  not  have  gone  into 
the  scutes.  Which  being  all  put  into  them,  we  went 
to  the  house,  and  first  drew  William  Barents  upon  a 
sled  to  the  place  where  our  scutes  lay,  and  after  that 
we  fetched  Nicholas  Andrewson,  both  of  them  having 
been  long  sick.  And  so  we  entered  into  the  scutes  and 
divided  ourselves  into  each  of  them  alike,  and  put  into 
either  of  them  a  sick  man.  Then  the  master  caused 
both  the  scutes  to  lie  close  one  by  the  other,  and  there  we 
subscribed  to  the  letters  which  he  had  written.  And 
so  committing  ourselves  to  the  will  and  mercy  of  God, 
with  a  west -north- west  wind  and  an  indifferent  open 
water,  we  set  sail  and  put  to  sea. 

The  14  of  June,  in  the  morning,  the  sun  easterly, 
we  put  off  from  the  land  of  Nova  Zembla  and  the  fast 
ice  thereunto  adjoining,  with  our  boat  and  our  scute, 
having  a  west  wind,  and  sailed  east-north-east  all  that 
day  to  Island  Point,  which  was  20  miles;  but  our 
first  beginning  was  not  very  good,  for  we  entered  fast 
into  the  ice  again,  which  there  lay  very  hard  and  fast; 
which  put  us  into  no  small  fear  and  trouble.  And  being 
there,  four  of  us  went  on  land,  to  know  the  situation 
thereof,  and  there  we  took  four  birds,  which  we  killed 
with  stones  upon  the  cliffs. 

The  15  of  June  the  ice  began  to  go  away;  then  we 
put  to  sail  again  with  a  south  wind,  and  passed  along 
by  the  Head  Point  and  Flushing  Point,  stretching  most 
north-east,  and  after  that  north,  to  Cape  Desire,  which 
is  about  52  miles,  and  there  we  lay  till  the  16  of  June. 

A.  P.  11 


162     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

The  16  of  June  we  set  sail  again,  and  got  to  the 
Islands  of  Orange  with  a  south  wind,  which  is  32  miles 
distant  from  Cape  Desire.  There  we  went  on  land 
with  two  small  barrels  and  a  kettle,  to  melt  snow 
and  to  put  the  water  into  the  barrels,  as  also  to  seek 
for  birds  and  eggs  to  make  meat  for  our  sick  men. 
And  being  there,  we  made  fire  with  such  wood  as  we 
found  there,  and  melted  the  snow,  but  found  no  birds ; 
but  three  of  our  men  went  over  the  ice  to  the  other 
island,  and  got  three  birds,  and  as  we  came  back  again 
our  master  (which  was  one  of  the  three)  fell  into  the 
ice,  where  he  was  in  great  danger  of  his  life,  for  in  that 
place  there  ran  a  great  stream;  but  by  God's  help  he 
got  out  again  and  came  to  us,  and  there  dried  himself 
by  the  fire  that  we  had  made ;  at  which  fire  we  drest  the 
birds,  and  carried  them  to  the  scute  to  our  sick  men, 
and  filled  our  two  runlets  with  water,  that  held  about 
eight  quarts  apiece.  Which  done,  we  put  to  the  sea  again 
with  a  south-east  wind  and  drowsy  mizzling  weather, 
whereby  we  were  all  dankish  and  wet,  for  we  had  no 
shelter  in  our  open  scutes,  and  sailed  west  and  west 
and  by  south  to  the  Ice  Point.  And  being  there,  both 
our  scutes  lying  hard  by  each  other,  the  master  called 
to  William  Barents  to  know  how  he  did,  and  William 
Barents  made  answer  and  said,  "Well,  God  be  thanked, 
and  I  hope,  before  we  get  to  Warehouse,  to  be  able  to 
go."  Then  he  spake  to  me  and  said,  "  Gerrit,  are  we 
about  the  Ice  Point?  If  we  be,  then  I  pray  you  lift 
me  up,  for  I  must  view  it  once  again."  At  which  time 
we  had  sailed  from  the  Islands  of  Orange  to  the  Ice 
Point,  about  20  miles ;  an<i  then  the  wind  went  round 
to  the  west,  and  we  made  our  scutes  fast  to  a  great 
piece  of  ice,  and  there  ate  somewhat.  But  the  weather 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     163 

was  still  fouler  and  fouler,  so  that  we  were  once  again 
enclosed  with  ice  and  forced  to  stay  there. 

The  17  of  June,  in  the  morning,  when  we  had 
broken  our  fasts,  the  ice  came  so  fast  upon  us,  that  it 
made  our  hairs  stand  upright  upon  our  heads,  it  was 
so  fearful  to  behold.  By  which  means  we  could  not 
save  our  scutes,  so  that  we  thought  verily  that  it  was 
a  foreshowing  of  our  last  end ;  for  we  drave  away 
so  hard  with  the  ice,  and  were  so  sore  pressed  between 
a  flake  of  ice,  that  we  thought  verily  the  scutes  would 
burst  in  a  hundred  pieces,  which  made  us  look  pitifully 
one  upon  the  other,  for  no  counsel  nor  advice  was  to 
be  found,  but  every  minute  of  an  hour  we  saw  death 
before  our  eyes.  At  last,  being  in  this  discomfort 
and  extreme  necessity,  the  master  said,  if  we  could  take 
hold  with  a  rope  upon  the  fast  ice,  we  might  therewith 
draw  the  scute  up,  and  so  get  it  out  of  the  great  drift 
•of  ice.  But  as  this  counsel  was  good,  yet  it  was  so  full 
of  danger,  that  it  was  the  hazard  of  his  life,  that  should 
take  upon  him  to  do  it;  and  without  doing  it,  was  it 
most  certain  that  it  would  cost  us  all  our  lives.  This 
counsel  (as  I  said)  was  good,  but  no  man  (like  to  the 
tale  of  the  mice)  durst  hang  the  bell  about  the  cat's 
neck,  fearing  to  be  drowned;  yet  necessity  required 
to  have  it  done,  and  the  most  danger  made  us  choose 
the  least.  So  that  being  in  that  perplexity,  1  being 
the  lightest  of  all  our  company,  took  on  me  to  fasten 
a  rope  upon  the  fast  ice;  and  so  creeping  from  one 
piece  of  driving  ice  to  another,  by  God's  help  got  to 
the  fast  ice,  where  I  made  a  rope  fast  to  a  high  ho  well, 
and  they  that  were  in  the  scute  drew  it  thereby  unto 
the  said  fast  ice,  and  then  one  man  alone  could  draw 
more  than  all  of  them  could  have  done  before.  And 

11—2 


164     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

when  we  had  gotten  thither,  in  all  haste  we  took  our 
sick  men  out  and  laid  them  upon  the  ice,  laying  clothes 
and  other  things  under  them,  and  then  took  all  our 
goods  out  of  the  scutes,  and  so  drew  them  upon  the 
ice.  whereby  for  that  time  we  were  delivered  from  that 
great  danger,  making  account  that  we  had  escaped 
out  of  death's  claws,  as  it  was  most  true. 

The  18  of  June  we  repaired  and  amended  our 
scutes  again,  being  much  bruised  and  crushed  with  the 
racking  of  the  ice,  and  were  forced  to  drive  all  the  nails 
fast  again,  and  to  piece  many  things  about  them, 
God  sending  us  wood  wherewith  we  molt  our  pitch, 
and  did  all  other  things  that  belonged  thereunto. 
That  done,  some  of  us  went  upon  the  land  to  seek  for 
eggs,  which  the  sick  men  longed  for,  but  we  could  find 
none;  but  we  found  four  birds,  not  without  great 
danger  of  our  lives  between  the  ice  and  the  firm  land, 
wherein  we  often  fell,  and  were  in  no  small  danger. 

The  19  of  June  it  was  indifferent  weather,  the 
wind  north-west  and  west-south-west,  but  we  were  still 
shut  up  in  the  ice  and  saw  no  opening,  which  made  us 
think  that  there  would  be  our  last  abode,  and  that  we 
should  never  get  from  thence;  but  on  the  other  side 
we  comforted  ourselves  again,  that  seeing  God  had 
helped  us  oftentimes  unexpectedly  in  many  perils,  and 
that  His  arm  as  yet  was  not  shortened,  but  that  He 
could  help  us  at  His  goodwill  and  pleasure,  it  made  us 
somewhat  comfortable,  and  caused  us  to  speak  cheer- 
fully one  unto  the  other. 

The  20  of  June  it  was  indifferent  weather,  the 
wind  west,  and  when  the  sun  was  south-east,  Nicholas 
Andre wson  began  to  be  extreme  sick,  whereby  we 
perceived  that  he  would  not  live  long,  and  the  boatswain 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     165 

came  into  our  scute  and  told  us  in  what  case  he  was, 
and  that  he  could  not  long  continue  alive.  Whereupon 
William  Barents  spake  and  said,  "I  think  I  shall  not 
live  long  after  him  " ;  and  yet  we  did  not  judge  William 
Barents  to  be  so  sick,  for  we  sat  talking  one  with  the 
other,  and  spake  of  many  things,  and  William  Barents 
looked  at  my  card  which  I  had  made  touching  our 
voyage.  At  last  he  laid  away  the  card  and  spake  unto 
me,  saying,  "  Gerrit,  give  me  some  drink;  "  and  he  had 
no  sooner  drunk,  but  he  was  taken  with  so  sudden  a 
qualm,  that  he  turned  his  eyes  in  his  head,  and  died 
presently,  and  we  had  no  time  to  call  the  master  out 
of  the  other  scute  to  speak  unto  him ;  and  so  he  died 
before  Nicholas  Andre wson.  The  death  of  William 
Barents  put  us  in  no  small  discomfort,  as  being  the 
chief  guide  and  only  pilot  on  whom  we  reposed  our- 
selves next  under  God ;  but  we  could  not  strive  against 
God,  and  therefore  we  must  of  force  be  content. 

The  21  of  June  the  ice  began  to  drive  away  again, 
and  God  made  us  some  opening  with  a  south-south-west 
wind;  and  when  the  sun  was  north-west,  the  wind 
began  to  blow  south-east  with  a  good  gale,  and  we 
began  to  make  preparations  to  go  from  thence. 

The  22  of  June,  in  the  morning,  it  blew  a  good 
gale  out  of  the  south-east,  and  then  the  sea  was  reason- 
able open ;  but  we  were  forced  to  draw  our  scutes  over 
the  ice  to  get  unto  it,  which  was  great  pain  and  labour 
unto  us.  For  first  we  were  forced  to  draw  our  scutes 
over  a  piece  of  ice  of  50  paces  long,  and  there  put 
them  into  the  water,  and  then  again  to  draw  them  up 
upon  other  ice,  and  after  draw  them  at  the  least  300 
paces  more  over  the  ice,  before  we  could  bring  them 
to  a  good  place,  where  we  might  easily  get  out.  And 


166      William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

being  gotten  unto  the  open  water,  we  committed 
ourselves  to  God  and  set  sail,  the  sun  being  about 
east-north-east,  with  an  indifferent  gale  of  wind  out  of 
the  south  and  south-south-east,  and  sailed  west  and  west 
and  by  south,  till  the  sun  was  south ;  and  then  we  were 
round  about  enclosed  with  ice  again,  and  could  not 
get  out,  but  were  forced  to  lie  still.  But  not  long  after, 
the  ice  opened  again  like  to  a  sluice,  and  we  passed 
through  it  and  set  sail  again,  and  so  sailed  along  by 
the  land,  but  were  presently  enclosed  with  ice;  but 
being  in  hope  of  opening  again,  meantime  we  ate 
somewhat,  for  the  ice  went  not  away  as  it  did  before. 
After  that,  we  used  all  the  means  we  could  to  break 
it,  but  all  in  vain ;  and  yet,  a  good  while  after,  the  ice 
opened  again,  and  we  got  out  and  sailed  along  by  the 
land,  west  and  by  south,  with  a  south  wind. 

The  23  of  June  we  sailed  still  forward  west  and 
by  south  till  the  sun  was  south-east,  and  got  to  Cape 
Comfort. 

The  25  of  June  it  blew  a  great  south  wind,  and 
the  ice  whereunto  we  made  ourselves  fast  was  not 
very  strong,  whereby  we  were  in  great  fear,  that  we 
should  break  off  from  it  and  drive  into  the  sea;  for 
when  the  sun  was  in  the  west,  a  piece  of  that  ice  brake 
off,  whereby  we  were  forced  to  dislodge  and  make  our- 
selves fast  to  another  piece  of  ice. 

The  26  of  June  it  still  blew  hard  out  of  the  south, 
and  broke  the  ice,  whereunto  we  were  fast,  in  pieces; 
and  we  thereby  drave  into  the  sea,  and  could  get  no 
more  to  the  fast  ice,  whereby  we  were  in  a  thousand 
dangers  to  be  all  cast  away.  And  driving  in  that  sort 
in  the  sea,  we  rowed  as  much  as  we  could,  but  we  could 
not  get  near  unto  the  land :  therefore  we  hoised  up 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     167 

our  foresail,  and  tried  to  do  it  with  our  sails.  But  our 
foremast  brake  twice  in  pieces,  and  then  it  was  worse 
for  us  than  before ;  and  notwithstanding  that  there 
blew  a  great  gale  of  wind,  yet  we  were  forced  to  hoise 
up  our  main-sail.  But  the  wind  blew  so  hard  into  it, 
that,  if  we  had  not  presently  taken  it  in  again,  we  had 
been  capsized,  or  else  our  boat  would  have  been  filled 
with  water.  For  the  water  began  to  leap  over  board, 
and  we  were  a  good  way  in  the  sea,  at  which  time  the 
waves  went  so  hollow  that  it  was  most  fearful,  and 
we  thereby  saw  nothing  but  death  before  our  eyes, 
and  every  twinkling  of  an  eye  looked  when  we  should 
sink.  But  God,  that  had  delivered  us  out  of  so  many 
dangers  of  death,  holp  us  once  again,  and  contrary 
to  our  expectations  sent  us  a  north-west  wind,  and  so 
with  great  danger  we  got  to  the  fast  ice  again.  When 
we  were  delivered  out  of  that  danger,  and  knew  not 
where  our  other  scute  was,  we  sailed  four  miles  along 
by  the  fast  ice,  but  found  it  not.  Whereby  we  were 
wholly  out  of  heart  and  in  great  fear  that  they  were 
drowned;  at  which  time  it  was  misty  weather.  And 
so  sailing  along,  and  hearing  no  news  of  our  other 
scute,  we  shot  off  a  musket,  which  they  hearing  shot 
off  another,  but  yet  we  could  not  see  each  other.  Mean- 
time, approaching  nearer  to  each  other,  and  the  weather 
waxing  somewhat  clearer,  as  we  and  they  shot  once 
again,  we  saw  the  smoke  of  their  pieces ;  and  at  last 
we  met  together  again,  and  saw  them  lie  fast  between 
driving  and  fast  ice.  And  when  we  got  near  unto  them, 
we  went  over  the  ice  and  holp  them  to  unlade  the 
goods  out  of  their  scute,  and  drew  it  over  the  ice,  and 
with  much  pain  and  trouble  brought  it  into  the  open 
water  again ;  and  while  they  were  fast  in  the  ice,  they 


168     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

had  found  some  wood  upon  the  land  by  the  sea  side; 
and  when  we  lay  by  each  other,  we  sod  some  bread 
and  water  together  and  ate  it  up  warm,  which  did  us 
much  good. 

The  28  of  June,  when  the  sun  was  in  the  east, 
we  laid  all  our  goods  upon  the  ice,  and  then  drew  the 
scutes  upon  the  ice  also,  because  we  were  so  hardly 
pressed  on  all  sides  with  the  ice,  and  the  wind  came 
out  of  the  sea  upon  the  land,  and  therefore  we  were  in 
fear  to  be  wholly  enclosed  with  the  ice,  and  should  not 
-be  able  to  get  out  thereof  again.  And  being  upon  the 
ice,  we  made  a  tent  of  our  sails,  and  lay  down  to  rest, 
appointing  one  of  our  men  to  keep  watch.  And  when 
the  sun  was  north  there  came  three  bears  towards 
our  scutes,  wherewith  he  that  kept  the  watch  cried, 
"  Three  bears  !  three  bears !  "  At  which  noise  we  leapt 
out  of  our  boats  with  our  muskets,  that  were  laden  with 
hail-shot  to  shoot  at  birds,  and  had  no  time  to  discharge 
them,  and  therefore  shot  at  them  therewith.  And 
although  that  kind  of  shot  could  not  hurt  them  much, 
yet  they  ran  away ;  and  in  the  meantime  they  gave  us 
leisure  to  load  our  muskets  with  bullets,  and  by  that 
means  we  shot  one  of  the  three  dead.  Which  the  other 
two  perceiving,  ran  away,  but  within  two  hours  after 
they  came  again;  but  when  they  were  almost  at  us 
and  heard  us  make  a  noise,  they  ran  away.  At  which 
time  the  wind  was  west  and  west  and  by  north,  which 
made  the  ice  drive  with  great  force  into  the  east. 

The  29  of  June,  the  sun  being  south -south -west, 
the  two  bears  came  again  to  the  place  where  the  dead 
bear  lay,  where  one  of  them  took  the  dead  bear  in  his 
mouth,  and  went  a  great  way  with  it  over  the  rugged 
ice,  and  then  began  to  eat  it.  Which  we  perceiving, 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     169 

shot  a  musket  at  her,  but  she  hearing  the  noise  thereof, 
ran  away,  and  let  the  dead  bear  lie.  Then  four  of  us 
went  thither,  and  saw  that  in  so  short  a  time  she  had 
eaten  almost  the  half  of  her;  and  we  took  the  dead 
bear  and  laid  it  upon  a  high  heap  of  ice,  so  that  we 
might  see  it  out  of  our  scute,  that  if  the  bear  came 
again  we  might  shoot  at  her.  At  which  time  we  found 
out  the  great  strength  of  the  bear,  that  carried  the 
dead  bear  as  lightly  in  her  mouth,  as  if  it  had  been 
nothing;  whereas  we  four  had  enough  to  do,  to  carry 
away  the  half  dead  bear  between  us.  Then  the  wind 
still  held  west,  which  drave  the  ice  into  the  east. 

The  1  of  July  it  was  indifferent  fair  weather,  with 
a  west-north-west  wind;  and  in  the  morning,  the  sun 
being  east,  there  came  a  bear  from  the  driving  ice,  and 
swam  over  the  water  to  the  fast  ice,  whereon  we  lay ; 
but  when  she  heard  us,  she  came  no  nearer,  but  ran 
away.  And  when  the  sun  was  south-east,  the  ice 
came  so  fast  in  towards  us,  that  all  the  ice,  whereon 
we  lay  with  our  scutes  and  our  goods,  brake  and  ran 
one  piece  upon  another ;  whereby  we  were  in  no  small 
difficulty,  for  at  that  time  most  of  our  goods  fell  into 
the  water.  But  we  with  great  diligence  drew  our  scute 
further  upon  the  ice  towards  the  land,  where  we  thought 
to  be  better  defended  from  the  driving  of  the  ice.  And 
as  we  went  to  fetch  our  goods,  we  f$ll  into  the  greatest 
trouble  that  ever  we  had  before ;  for  that  we  endured 
so  great  danger  in  the  saving  thereof,  that  as  we  laid 
hold  upon  one  piece  thereof,  the  rest  sunk  down  with  the 
ice,  and  many  times  the  ice  brake  under  our  own  feet. 
Whereby  we  were  wholly  discomforted  and  in  a  manner 
clean  out  of  all  hope,  expecting  no  issue  thereof;  in 
such  sort  that  our  trouble  at  that  time  surmounted  all 


170     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

our  former  cares  and  impeachments.  And  when  we 
thought  to  draw  up  our  boat  upon  the  ice,  the  ice 
brake  under  us,  and  we  were  carried  away  with  the 
scute  and  all  by  the  driving  ice ;  and  when  we  thought 
to  save  the  goods,  the  ice  brake  under  our  feet,  and 
with  that  the  scute  brake  in  many  places,  especially 
that  which  we  had  mended,  as  the  mast,  the  mast 
plank,  and  almost  all  the  scute,  wherein  one  of  our 
men  that  was  sick  and  a  chest  of  money  lay,  which 
we  with  great  danger  of  our  lives  got  out  from  it.  For 
as  we  were  doing  it,  the  ice  that  was  under  our  feet 
drave  from  us  and  slid  away  under  the  other  ice; 
whereby  we  were  in  danger  to  burst  both  our  arms 
and  our  legs.  At  which  time,  thinking  that  we  had 
been  clean  quit  of  our  scute,  we  beheld  each  other 
in  pitiful  manner,  knowing  not  what  we  should  do, 
our  lives  depending  thereon.  But  God  made  so  good 
provision  for  us,  that  the  pieces  of  ice  drave  from  each 
other ;  wherewith  we  ran  in  great  haste  unto  the  scute 
and  drew  it  to  us  again  in  such  case  as  it  was,  and 
laid  it  upon  the  fast  ice  by  the  boat,  where  it  was  in 
more  security;  which  put  us  unto  an  exceeding  and 
great  and  dangerous  labour,  from  the  time  tha,t  the 
sun  was  south-east  until  it  was  west-south-west.  And 
in  all  that  time  we  rested  not,  which  made  us  extreme 
weary  and  wholly  out  of  comfort ;  for  that  it  troubled 
us  sore,  and  it  was  much  more  fearful  unto  us,  than  at 
that  time  when  William  Barents  died:  for  there  we 
were  almost  drowned,  and  that  day  we  lost  (which  was 
sunk  in  the  sea)  two  barrels  of  bread,  a  chest  with  linen 
cloth,  a  dryfat  with  the  sailors'  clothes,  our  astrono- 
mical ring,  a  pack  of  scarlet  cloth,  a  runlet  of  oil,  and 
some  cheeses,  and  a  runlet  of  wine,  which  bunged 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     171 

with  the  ice,  so  that  there  was  not  anything  thereof 
saved. 

The  2  of  July,  the  sun  east,  there  came  another 
bear  unto  us,  but  we  making  a  noise,  she  ran  away; 
and  when  the  sun  was  west-south-west  it  began  to  be 
fair  weather.  Then  we  began  to  mend  our  scute  with 
the  planks  wherewith  we  had  made  the  bottom  boards ; 
and  while  six  of  us  were  busied  about  mending  of  our 
scute,  the  other  six  went  further  into  the  land,  to  seek 
for  some  wood,  and  to  fetch  some  stones  to  lay  upon 
the  ice,  that  we  might  make  a  fire  thereon,  therewith  to 
melt  our  pitch,  which  we  should  need  about  the  scute, 
as  also  to  see  if  they  could  fetch  any  wood  for  a  mast ; 
which  they  found  with  certain  stones,  and  brought 
them  where  the  scutes  lay.  And  when  they  came  to 
us  again,  they  shewed  us  that  they  had  found  certain 
wood,  which  had  been  cloven,  and  brought  some  wedges 
with  them,  wherewith  the  said  wood  had  been  cloven ; 
whereby  it  appeared  that  men  had  been  there.  Then 
we  made  all  the  haste  we  could  to  make  a  fire,  and  to 
melt  our  pitch,  and  to  do  all  other  things  that  were 
necessary  to  be  done  for  the  repairing  of  our  scute, 
so  that  we  got  it  ready  again  by  that  the  sun  was  north- 
east ;  at  which  time  also  we  roasted  our  birds  and  made 
a  good  meal  with  them. 

The  3  of  July,  in  the  morning,  the  sun  being  east, 
two  of  our  men  went  to  the  water,  and  there  they  found 
two  of  our  oars,  our  helm  stick,  the  pack  of  scarlet 
cloth,  the  chest  with  linen  cloth,  and  a  hat  that  fell 
out  of  the  dryf at ;  whereby  we  guessed  that  it  was 
broken  in  pieces.  Which  they  perceiving,  took  as  much 
with  them  as  they  could  carry,  and  came  unto  us, 
showing  us  that  they  had  left  more  goods  behind  them. 


172     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

Whereupon  the  master  with  five  more  of  us  went 
thither,  and  drew  all  the  goods  upon  the  firm  ice,  that 
when  we  went  away  we  might  take  it  with  us;  but 
they  could  not  carry  the  chest  nor  the  pack  of  cloth 
(that  were  full  of  water),  because  of  their  weight ;  but 
were  forced  to  let  them  stand  till  we  went  away,  that 
the  water  might  drop  out  of  them,  and  we  might  after- 
wards fetch  them,  as  we  did.  The  sun  being  south-west, 
there  came  another  great  bear  unto  us,  which  the  man 
that  kept  watch  saw  not,  and  had  been  devoured  by 
her,  if  one  of  our  other  men  from  out  of  the  boat  had 
not  espied  her,  and  called  to  him  that  kept  watch  to 
look  to  himself,  who  therewith  ran  away.  Meantime 
the  bear  was  shot  into  the  body,  but  she  escaped ;  and 
that  time  the  wind  was  east-north-east. 

The  10  of  July,  from  the  time  that  the  sun  was 
east-north-east  till  it  was  east,  we  took  great  pains  and 
labour  to  get  through  the  ice ;  and  at  last  we  got  through 
and  rowed  forth,  until  we  happened  to  fall  between  two 
great  fields  of  ice,  that  closed  one  with  the  other,  so  that 
we  could  not  get  through,  but  were  forced  to  draw  the 
scutes  upon  them,  and  to  unlade  the  goods,  and  then  to 
draw  them  over  to  the  open  water  on  the  other  side ;  and 
then  we  must  go  fetch  the  goods  also  to  the  same  place, 
being  at  least  110  paces  long,  which  was  very  hard  for 
us .;  but  there  was  no  remedy,  for  it  was  but  a  folly  for 
us  to  think  of  any  weariness.  And  when  we  were  in 
the  open  water  again,  we  rowed  forward  as  well  as  we 
could,  but  we  had  not  rowed  long  before  we  fell  between 
two  great  fields  of  ice,  that  came  driving  one  against 
the  other;  but  by  God's  help  and  our  speedy  rowing 
we  got  from  between  them,  before  they  closed  up ;  and 
being  through,  we  had  a  hard  west  wind  right  in  our 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     173 

teeth,  so  that  of  force  we  were  constrained  to  make 
towards  the  fast  ice  that  lay  by  the  shore,  and  at  last 
with  much  trouble  we  got  unto  it.  And  being  there, 
we  thought  to  row  along  by  the  fast  ice  unto  an  island 
that  we  saw  before  us;  but  by  reason  of  the  hard 
contrary  wind  we  could  not  go  far,  so  that  we  were 
compelled  to  draw  the  scutes  and  the  goods  upon  the 
ice,  to  see  what  issue  God  would  send  us.  But  our 
courages  were  cooled  to  see  ourselves  so  often  enclosed 
in  the  ice.  being  in  great  fear  that  by  means  of  the  long 
and  continual  pains  (which  we  were  forced  to  take)  we 
should  lose  all  our  strength,  and  by  that  means  should 
not  long  be  able  to  continue  or  hold  out. 

The  1 1  of  July,  in  the  morning,  as  we  sat  fast  upon 
the  ice,  the  sun  being  north-east,  there  came  a  great 
bear  out  of  the  water  running  towards  us;  but  we 
watched  for  her  with  three  muskets,  and  when  she 
came  within  30  paces  of  us,  we  shot  all  the  three  muskets 
at  her  and  killed  her  outright,  so  that  she  stirred  not 
a  foot,  and  we  might  see  the  fat  run  out  at  the  holes 
of  her  skin,  that  was  shot  in  with  the  muskets,  swim 
upon  the  water  like  oil.  And  so  driving  dead  upon 
the  water,  we  went  upon  a  field  of  ice  to  her,  and  putting 
a  rope  about  her  neck,  drew  her  up  upon  the  ice  and 
smit  out  her  teeth;  at  which  time  we  measured  her 
body,  and  found  it  to  be  eight  foot  thick.  Then  ye 
had  a  west  wind  with  dirty  weather;  but  when  the 
sun  was  south,  it  began  to  clear  up.  Then  three  of  our 
men  went  to  the  island  that  lay  before  us,  and  being 
there,  they  saw  the  Cross  Island  lying  westward  from 
them,  and  went  thither,  to  see  if  that  summer  there 
had  been  any  Russian  there,  and  went  thither  upon 
the  fast  ice  that  lay  between  the  two  islands;  and 


174     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

being  in  the  island,  they  could  not  perceive  that  any 
man  had  been  in  it,  since  we  were  there.  There  they 
got  70  burrow-ducks'  eggs,  but  when  they  had  them, 
they  knew  not  wherein  to  carry  them.  At  last  one  of 
them  put  off  his  breeches,  and  tying  them  fast  below, 
they  carried  them  between  two  of  them,  and  the  third 
bare  the  musket;  and  so  they  came  to  us  again,  after 
they  had  been  twelve  hours  out,  which  put  us  in  no 
small  fear  to  think  what  was  become  of  them.  They 
told  us  that  they  had  many  times  gone  up  to  the  knees 
in  water  upon  the  ice  between  both  the  islands,  and 
it  was  at  least  24  miles  to  and  fro  that  they  had  gone ; 
which  made  us  wonder  how  they  could  endure  it,  seeing 
we  were  all  so  weak.  With  the  eggs  that  they  had 
brought,  we  were  all  well  comforted,  and  fared  like 
lords,  so  that  we  found  some  relief  in  our  great  misery ; 
and  then  we  shared  our  last  wine  amongst  us,  whereof 
everyone  had  three  glasses. 

The  18  of  July,  about  the  east  sun,  three  of  our 
men  went  up  upon  the  highest  part  of  the  land,  to  see 
if  there  was  any  open  water  in  the  sea.  At  which  time 
they  saw  much  open  water,  but  it  was  so  far  from  the 
land,  that  they  were  almost  out  of  comfort,  because 
it  lay  so  far  from  the  land  and  the  fast  ice,  being  of 
opinion  that  we  should  not  be  able  to  draw  the  scutes 
and  the  goods  so  far  thither,  because  our  strength 
failed  us  more  and  more,  and  the  sore  labour  and  pain, 
that  we  were  forced  to  endure,  more  and  more  increased. 
And  coming  to  our  scutes,  they  brought  us  that  news; 
but  we,  being  compelled  thereunto  by  necessity, 
abandoned  all  weariness  and  faint-heartedness,  and 
determined  with  ourselves  to  bring  the  boats  and  the 
goods  to  the  water  side,  and  to  row  unto  that  ice,  where 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     175 

we  must  pass  over,  to  get  to  the  open  water.  And  when 
we  got  to  it,  we  unladed  our  scutes,  and  drew  them 
first  over  the  ice  to  the  open  water,  and  after  that  the 
goods,  it  being  at  the  least  1000  paces.  Which  was  so 
sore  a  labour  for  us,  that,  as  we  were  in  hand  therewith, 
we  were  in  a  manner  ready  to  leave  off  in  the  middle 
thereof,  and  feared  that  we  should  not  go  through 
withal.  But  for  that  we  had  gone  through  so  many 
dangers,  we  hoped  that  we  should  n'ot  be  faint  therein, 
wishing  that  it  might  be  the  last  trouble,  that  we  should 
as  then  endure;  and  so  with  great  difficulty  got  into 
the  open  water  about  the  south-west  sun.  Then  we 
set  sail  till  the  sun  was  west  and  by  south,  and  presently 
fell  amongst  the  ice  again,  where  we  were  forced  to 
draw  up  the  scutes  again  upon  the  ice ;  and  being  upon 
it,  we  could  see  the  Cross  Island,  which  we  guessed 
to  be  about  four  miles  from  us,  the  wind  then  being 
east  and  east-north-east. 

The  19  of  July,  lying  in  that  manner  upon  the 
ice,  about  the  east  sun  seven  of  our  men  went  to  the 
Cross  Island,  and  being  there,  they  saw  great  store  of 
open  water  in  the  west ;  wherewith  they  much  rejoiced, 
and  made  as  great  haste  as  they  could  to  get  to  the 
scutes  again ;  but  before  they  came  away,  they  got  a 
hundred  eggs,  and  brought  them  away  with  them. 
And  coming  to  the  scutes,  they  showed  us  that  they 
had  seen  as  much  open  water  in  the  sea  as  they  could 
discern;  being  in  good  hope  that  that  would  be  the 
last  time,  that  they  should  draw  the  scutes  over  the 
ice,  and  that  it  should  be  no  more  measured  by  us,  and 
in  that  sort  put  us  in  good  comfort.  Whereupon  we 
made  speed  to  dress  our  eggs,  and  shared  them  amongst 
us;  and  presently,  the  sun  being  south-south-west, 


176     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

we  fell  to  work,  to  make  all  things  ready  to  bring  the 
scutes  to  the  water,  which  were  to  be  drawn  at  least 
270  paces  over  the  ice ;  which  we  did  with  a  good 
courage,  because  we  were  in  good  hope,  that  it  would 
be  the  last  time.  And  getting  to  the  water,  we  put  to 
sea,  with  God's  help,  with  an  east  and  east-north-east 
wind  and  a  good  gale,  so  that  with  the  west  sun  we 
passed  by  the  Cross  Island,  which  is  distant  from  Cape 
Nassau  40  miles.  »  And  presently,  after  that,  the  ice 
left  us,  and  we  got  clear  out  of  it;  yet  we  saw  some 
in  the  sea,  but  it  troubled  us  not.  And  so  we  held  our 
course  west  and  by  south,  with  a  good  gale  of  wind 
out  of  the  east  and  east-north-east,  so  that  we  guessed 
that  between  every  meal-tide  we  sailed  72  miles ; 
wherewith  we  were  exceedingly  comforted,  giving  God 
thanks,  that  He  had  delivered  us  out  of  so  great  and 
many  difficulties  (wherein  it  seemed  that  we  should 
have  been  overwhelmed),  hoping  in  His  mercy,  that 
from  thenceforth  He  would  aid  us. 

The  20  of  July,  having  still  a  good  gale,  about 
the  south-east  sun  we  passed  along  by  the  Black 
Point,  which  is  48  miles  distant  from  the  Cross  Island, 
and  sailed  west-south-west;  and  about  the  evening, 
with  the  west  sun,  we  saw  the  Admiralty  Island,  and 
about  the  north  sun  passed  along  by  it,  which  is  distant 
from  the  Black  Point  32  miles.  And  passing  along 
by  it,  we  saw  about  two  hundred  sea-horses  lying  upon 
a  field  of  ice,  and  we  sailed  close  by  them  and  drave 
them  from  thence,  which  had  almost  cost  us  dear; 
for  they,  being  mighty  strong  and  of  great  force, 
swam  towards  us  (as  if  they  would  be  revenged  on  us 
for  the  despite  that  we  had  done  them)  round  about 
our  scutes  with  a  great  noise,  as  if  they  would  have 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     177 

devoured  us;  but  we  escaped  from  them  by  reason 
that  we  had  a  good  gale  of  wind,  yet  it  was  not  wisely 
done  of  us  to  wake  sleeping  wolves. 

The  28  of  July  it  was  fair  weather,  with  a  north- 
east wind.  Then  we  sailed  along  by  the  land,  and  with 
the  south-west  sun  got  before  St  Laurence  Bay,  or 
Sconce  Point,  and  sailed  south-east  24  miles;  and 


True  portraiture  of  our  boats,  and  how  we  nearly  got  into 
trouble  with  the  sea-horses 

being  there,  we  found  two  Russians'  lodgies  or  ships 
beyond  the  Point,  wherewith  we  were  not  a  little 
comforted  to  think  that  we  were  come  to  the  place 
where  we  found  men,  but  were  in  some  doubt  of  them 
because  they  were  so  many,  for  at  that  time  we  saw 
at  least  30  men,  and  knew  not  what  sort  of  persons 
they  were.  There  with  much  pain  and  labour  we  got 

A.  p.  12 


178     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

to  the  land,  which  they  perceiving,  left  off  their  work 
and  came  towards  us,  but  without  any  arms;  and 
we  also  went  on  shore,  as  many  as  were  well,  for 
divers  of  us  were  very  ill  at  ease  and  weak  by  reason 
of  the  scurvy.  And  when  we  met  together  we  saluted 
each  other  in  friendly  wise,  they  after  theirs,  and  we 
after  our  manner.  And  when  we  were  met,  both 
they  and  we  looked  each  other  stedfastly  in  the  face, 
for  that  some  of  them  knew  us,  and  we  them  to  be 
the  same  men,  which  the  year  before,  when  we  passed 
through  the  Weygats,  had  been  in  our  ship.  At  which 
time  we  perceived  that  they  were  abashed  and  wondered 
at  us,  to  remember  that  at  that  time  we  were  so  well 
furnished  with  a  great  ship,  that  was  exceedingly 
provided  of  all  things  necessary,  and  then  to  see  us  so 
lean  and  bare,  and  with  so  small  scutes  into  that  country. 
And  amongst  them  there  were  two,  that  in  friendly 
manner  clapt  the  master  and  me  upon  the  shoulder, 
as  knowing  us  since  the  former  voyage;  for  there  was 
none  of  all  our  men  that  was  as  then  in  the  Weygats, 
but  we  two  only;  and  they  asked  us  for  our  crable, 
meaning  our  ship,  and  we  shewed  them  by  signs,  as  well 
as  we  could  (for  we  had  no  interpreter),  that  we  had  lost 
our  ship  in  the  ice.  Wherewith  they  said,  "Crable  pro 
pal  ? "  which  we  understood  to  be,  "  Have  you  lost  your 
ship  ? "  And  we  made  answer,  "  Crable  pro  pal"  which 
was  as  much  as  to  say  that  we  had  lost  our  ship.  And 
many  more  words  we  could  not  use,  because  we  under- 
stood not  each  other.  Then  they  made  show  to  be 
sorry  for  .our  loss,  and  to  be  grieved  that  we  the  year 
before  had  been  there  with  so  many  ships,  and  then 
to  see  us  in  so  simple  manner,  and  made  us  signs  that 
then  they  had  drunk  wine  in  our  ship,  and  asked  us 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     179 

what  drink  we  had  now.  Wherewith  one  of  our  men 
went  into  the  scute  and  drew  some  water,  and  let  them 
taste  thereof;  but  they  shaked  their  heads,  and  said, 
"No  dobbre"  that  is,  "It  is  not  good."  Then  our 
master  went  nearer  unto  them,  and  shewed  them  his 
mouth,  to  give  them  to  understand  that  we  were 
troubled  with  the  scurvy,  and  to  know  if  they  could 
give  us  any  counsel  to  help  it.  But  they  thought  we 
made  show  that  we  had  great  hunger,  wherewith  one  of 
them  went  unto  their  lodging  and  fetched  a  round  rye 
loaf  weighing  about  eight  pounds,  with  some  smoked 
fowls,  which  we  accepted  thankfully,  and  gave  them  in 
exchange  half  a  dozen  of  biscuits.  Then  our  master  led 
two  of  the  chief  of  them  with  him  into  his  scute,  and 
gave  them  some  of  the  wine  that  we  had,  being  about 
a  quart,  for  it  was  so  near  out.  And  while  we  stayed 
there,  we  were  very  familiar  with  them,  and  went  to 
the  place  where  they  lay,  and  sod  some  of  our  biscuit 
with  water  by  their  fire,  that  we  might  eat  some  warm 
thing  down  into  our  bodies.  And  we  were  much 
comforted  to  see  the  Russians,  for  that  in  thirteen 
months'  time  since  that  we  departed  from  John  Cor- 
nelison,  we  had  not  seen  any  man,  but  only  monstrous 
and  cruel  wild  bears ;  so  that  as  then  we  were  in  some 
comfort,  to  see  that  we  had  lived  so  long,  to  come  in 
company  of  men  again.  And  therewith  we  said  unto 
each  other,  "  Now  we  hope  that  it  will  fall  out  better 
with  us,  seeing  we  have  found  men  again,"  thanking 
God  with  all  our  hearts,  that  He  had  been  so  gracious 
and  merciful  unto  us,  to  give  us  life  until  that  time. 

The  29  of  July  it  was  reasonable  fair  weather, 
and  that  morning  the  Russians  began  to  make  prepara- 
tion to  be  gone  and  to  set  sail;  at  which  time  they 

12—2 


180     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

digged  certain  barrels  with  train  oil  out  of  the  shingle, 
which  they  had  buried  there,  and  put  it  into  their 
ships.  And  we  not  knowing  whither  they  would  go, 
saw  them  sail  towards  the  Weygats :  at  which  time  also 
we  set  sail  and  followed  after  them.  But  they  sailing 
before  us,  and  we  following  them  along  by  the  land, 
the  weather  being  close  and  misty,  we  lost  the  sight 
of  them. 

The  31  of  July  we  rowed  to  an  island,  and  there, 
to  our  great  good,  we  went  on  land,  for  in  that  island 
we  found  great  store  of  leple  leaves,  which  served  us 
exceeding  well ;  and  it  seemed  that  God  had  purposely 
sent  us  thither,  for  as  then  we  had  many  sick  men, 
and  most  of  us  were  so  troubled  with  the  scurvy, 
and  were  thereby  become  so  weak,  that  we  could 
hardly  row,  but  by  means  of  those  leaves  we  were 
healed  thereof :  for  that  as  soon  as  we  had  eaten  them, 
we  were  presently  eased  and  healed ;  whereat  we  could 
not  choose  but  wonder,  and  therefore  we  gave  God 
great  thanks  for  that  and  for  many  other  His  mercies 
showed  unto  us,  lay  His  great  and  unexpected  aid,  lent 
us  in  that  our  dangerous  voyage.  And  so,  as  I  said 
before,  we  ate  them  by  whole  handfuls  together, 
because  in  Holland  we  had  heard  much  spoken  of  their 
great  force,  and  as  then  found  it  to  be  much  more 
than  we  expected. 

The  1  of  August  the  wind  blew  hard  north-west, 
and  the  ice,  that  for  a  while  had  driven  towards  the 
entry  of  the  Weygats,  stayed  and  drave  no  more,  but 
the  sea  ran  very  high,  whereby  we  were  forced  to 
remove  our  scutes  on  the  other  side  of  the  island,  to 
defend  them  from  the  waves  of  the  sea.  And  lying 
there,  we  went  on  land  again  to  fetch  more  leple  leaves, 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     181 

whereby  we  had  been  so  well  holpen,  and  still  more  and 
more  recovered  our  healths,  and  in  so  short  time  that 
we  could  not  choose  but  wonder  thereat;  so  that  as 
then  some  of  us  could  eat  biscuit  again,  which  not  long 
before  they  could  not  do. 

The  2  of  August  it  was  dark  misty  weather,  the 
wind  still  blowing  stiff  north-west;  at  which  time  our 
victuals  began  to  decrease,  for  as  then  we  had  nothing 
but  a  little  bread  and  water,  and  some  of  us  a  little 
cheese ;  which  made  us  long  sore  to  be  gone  from  thence, 
specially  in  regard  of  our  hunger,  whereby  our  weak 
members  began  to  be  much  weaker ;  and  yet  we  were 
forced  to  labour  sore,  which  were  two  great  contraries ; 
for  it  behoved  us  rather  to  have  our  bellies  full,  that 
so  we  might  be  the  stronger  to  endure  our  labour ;  but 
patience  was  our  point  of  trust. 

The  3  of  August,  about  the  north  sun,  the  weather 
being  somewhat  better,  we  agreed  amongst  ourselves 
to  leave  Nova  Zembla  and  to  cross  over  to  Russia. 

The  4  of  August  we  saw  the  coast  of  Russia 
lying  before  us,  whereat  we  were  exceeding  glad. 

The  5  of  August,  lying  there,  one  of  our  men  went 
on  shore,  and  found  the  land  further  in  to  be  green  and 
full  of  trees,  and  from  thence  called  to  us  to  bid  us 
bring  our  pieces  on  shore,  saying  that  there  was  wild 
deer  to  be  killed,  which  made  us  exceeding  glad,  for  then 
our  victuals  were  almost  spent,  and  we  had  nothing  but 
some  broken  bread,  whereby  we  were  wholly  out  of 
comfort,  and  some  of  us  were  of  opinion  that  we  should 
leave  the  scutes  and  go  further  into  the  land,  or  else 
(they  said)  we  should  all  die  with  hunger,  for  that  many 
days  before  we  were  forced  to  fast,  and  hunger  was  a 
sharp  sword  which  we  could  hardly  endure  any  longer. 


182     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

The  6  of  August  the  weather  began  to  be  somewhat 
better;  at  which  time  we  determined  to  row  forward, 
because  the  wind  was  against  us,  so  that  we  might 
get  out  of  the  creek,  the  wind  being  east-south-east, 
which  was  our  course  as  then.  And  so,  having  rowed 
about  twelve  miles,  we  could  get  no  further,  because 
it  was  so  full  in  the  wind,  and  we  altogether  heartless 
and  faint,  the  land  stretching  further  north-east  than 
we  made  account  it  had  done.  Whereupon  we  beheld 
each  other  in  pitiful  manner,  for  we  had  great  want 
of  victuals,  and  knew  not  how  far  we  had  to  sail,  before 
we  should  get  any  relief;  for  all  our  victuals  was  almost 
consumed. 

The  7  of  August,  the  wind  being  west-north-west, 
it  served  us  well  to  get  out  of  that  creek,  and  so  we 
sailed  forward  east  and  by  north  till  we  got  out  of  the 
creek,  to  the  place  and  the  point  of  land,  where  we  first 
had  been,  and  there  made  our  scutes  fast  again;  for 
the  north-west  wind  was  right  against  us,  whereby 
our  men's  hearts  and  courages  were  wholly  abated,  to 
see  no  issue  how  we  should  get  from  thence ;  for  as 
then  sicknesses,  hunger,  and  no  means  to  be  found 
how  to  get  from  thence,  consumed  both  our  flesh  and 
our  blood;  but  if  we  had  found  any  relief,  it  would 
have  been  better  with  us. 

The  8  of  August  there  was  no  better  weather, 
but  still  the  wind  was  against  us,  and  we  lay  a  good 
way  one  from  the  other,  as  we  found  best  place  for  us; 
at  which  time  there  was  most  sorrow  in  our  boat,  in 
regard  that  some  of  us  were  exceeding  hungry,  and 
could  not  endure  it  any  longer,  but  were  wholly  out 
of  heart,  and  wishing  to  die. 

The  9  of  August  it  was  all  one  weather,  so  that, 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     183 

the  wind  blowing  contrary,  we  were  forced  to  lie  still 
and  could  go  no  further,  our  grief  still  increasing  more 
and  more.  At  last  two  of  our  men  went  out  of  the 
scute,  wherein  the  master  was ;  which  we  perceiving,  two 
of  our  men  also  landed,  and  went  all  together  about 
four  miles  into  the  country,  and  at  last  saw  a  beacon, 
by  the  which  there  issued  a  great  stream  of  water, 
which  we  thought  to  be  the  way,  from  whence  the 
Russians  came  between  Candinaes  and  the  firm  land 
of  Russia.  And  as  our  men  came  back  again,  in  the 
way,  as  they  went  along,  they  found  a  dead  seal, 
that  stank  exceedingly,  which  they  drew  with  them 
to  our  boats,  thinking  that  they  should  have  a  dainty 
morsel  out  of  it,  because  they  endured  so  great  hunger ; 
but  we  told  them  that  without  doubt  it  would  kill  us, 
and  that  it  were  better  for  us  to  endure  poverty  and 
hunger  for  a  time,  than  to  venture  upon  it ;  saying 
that,  seeing  God,  who  in  so  many  great  extremities 
had  sent  us  a  happy  issue,  still  lived  and  was  exceeding 
powerful,  we  hoped  and  nothing  doubting  that  He  would 
not  altogether  forsake  us,  but  rather  help  us  when  we 
were  most  in  despair. 

The  10  of  August  it  was  still  a  north-west  wind, 
with  misty  and  dark  weather,  so  that  we  were  driven 
to  lie  still;  at  which  time  it  was  no  need  for  us  to  ask 
one  another  how  we  fared,  for  we  could  well  guess  it 
by  our  countenances. 

The  11  of  August,  in  the  morning,  it  was  fair 
calm  weather,  «so  that,  the  sun  being  about  north-east, 
the  master  sent  one  of  his  men  to  us,  to  bid  us  prepare 
ourselves  to  set  sail,  but  we  had  made  ourselves  ready 
thereunto  before  he  came,  and  began  to  row  towards 
him.  At  which  time,  for  that  I  was  very  weak  and  no 


184     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

longer  able  to  row,  as  also  for  that  our  boat  was  harder 
to  row  than  the  scute,  I  was  set  in  the  scute  to  guide 
the  helm,  and  one  that  was  stronger  was  sent  out  of 
the  scute  into  the  boat  to  row  in  my  place,  that  we 
might  keep  company  together ;  and  so  we  rowed  till 
the  sun  was  south,  and  then  we  had  a  good  gale  of 
wind  out  of  the  south,  which  made  us  take  in  our  oars ; 
and  then  we  hoised  up  our  sails,  wherewith  we  made 
good  way.  But  in  the  evening  the  wind  began  to  blow 
hard,  whereby  we  were  forced  to  take  in  our  sails  and 
to  row  towards  the  land,  where  we  laid  our  scutes  close 
to  the  strand,  and  went  on  land  to  seek  for  fresh  water, 
but  found  none.  And  because  we  could  go  no  further, 
we  laid  our  sails  over  the  boats  to  cover  us  from  the 
weather;  at  which  time  it  began  to  rain  very  hard, 
and  at  midnight  it  thundered  and  lightened,  with  more 
store  of  rain,  wherewith  our  company  were  much 
disquieted,  to  see  that  they  found  no  means  of  relief, 
but  still  entered  into  further  trouble  and  danger. 

The  12  of  August  it  was  fair  weather;  at  which 
time,  the  sun  being  east,  we  saw  a  Russian  lodgie  come 
towards  us  with  all  his  sails  up,  wherewith  we  were 
not  a  little  comforted,  which  we  perceiving  from  the 
strand,  where  we  lay  with  our  scutes,  we  desired  the 
master  that  we  might  go  unto  him  to  speak  with  him, 
and  to  get  some  victuals  of  them  ;  and  to  that  end 
we  made  as  much  haste  as  we  could  to  get  the  boats 
into  deep  water,  and  sailed  towards  them.  And  when 
we  got  to  them,  the  master  went  into  the  lodgie  to  ask 
them  how  far  we  had  to  Candinaes,  which  we  could 
not  well  learn  of  them,  because  we  understood  them 
not.  They  held  up  their  five  fingers  unto  us,  but  we 
knew  not  what  they  meant  thereby;  but  after,  we 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     185 

perceived  that  thereby  they  would  show  us,  that  there 
stood  five  crosses  upon  it;  and  they  brought  their 
compass  out,  and  showed  us,  that  it  lay  north-west  from 
us,  which  our  compass  also  showed  us,  which  reckoning 
also  we  had  made.  But  when  we  saw  we  could  have 
no  better  intelligence  from  them,  the  master  went 
further  into  their  ship,  and  pointed  to  a  barrel  of 
fish  that  he  saw  therein,  making  signs  to  know  whether 
they  would  sell  it  unto  us,  showing  them  a  piece  of 
eight  reals.  Which  they  understanding,  gave  us  102 
fishes,  with  some  cakes,  which  they  had  made  of  meal, 
when  they  sod  their  fish.  And  about  the  south  sun 
we  left  them,  being  glad  that  we  had  gotten  some 
victuals ;  for  long  before  we  had  had  but  four  ounces 
of  bread  a  day  with  a  little  water,  and  nothing  else, 
and  with  that  we  were  forced  to  comfort  ourselves 
as  well  as  we  could.  The  fishes  we  shared  amongst 
us  equally,  to  one  as  much  as  another,  without  any 
difference. 

The  13  of  August,  sailing  with  a  good  wind,  about 
midnight  there  rose  a  great  storm  out  of  the  north, 
wherewith  we  stroke  sail  and  made  it  shorter;  but 
our  other  boat,  that  was  harder  under  sail  (knowing 
not  that  we  had  lessened  our  sails),  sailed  forward, 
whereby  we  strayed  one  from  the  other,  for  then  it 
was  very  dark. 

The  14  of  August,  in  the  morning,  it  being  in- 
different good  weather  with  a  south-west  wind,  we 
sailed  west-north-west,  and  then  it  began  to  clear  up, 
so  that  we  saw  our  other  boat,  and  did  what  we  could 
to  get  unto  her.  but  we  could  not,  because  it  began  to 
be  misty  weather  again;  and  therefore  we  said  unto 
each  other,  "Let  us  hold  on  our  course:  we  shall  find 


186     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

them  well  enough  on  the  north  coast,  when  we  are 
past  the  White  Sea." 

The  15  of  August  we  saw  the  sun  rise  east-north- 
east, whereupon  we  thought  that  our  compass  varied 
somewhat;  and  when  the  sun  was  east,  it  was  calm 
weather  again,  wherewith  we  were  forced  to  take  in 
our  sails  and  to  row  again,  but  it  was  not  long  before 
we  had  a  gale  of  wind  out  of  the  south-east,  and  then 
we  hoised  up  our  sails  again,  and  went  forward  west 
and  by  south.  And  sailing  in  that  manner  with  a 
good  forewind,  when  the  sun  was  south  we  saw  land, 
thinking  that  as  then  we  had  been  on  the  west  side 
of  the  White  Sea  beyond  Candinaes;  and  being  close 
under  the  land,  we  saw  six  Russian  lodgies  lying  there, 
to  whom  we  sailed  and  spake  with  them,  asking  them 
how  far  we  were  from  Kilduin.  But  although  they 
understood  us  not  well,  yet  they  made  us  such  signs, 
that  we  understood  by  them  that  we  were  still  far  from 
thence,  and  that  we  were  yet  on  the  east  side  of  Can- 
dinaes. And  with  that  they  stroke  their  hands  together, 
thereby  signifying  that  we  must  first  pass  over  the 
White  Sea,  and  that  our  scutes  were  too  little  to  do  it, 
and  that  it  would  be  over  great  danger  for  us  to  pass 
over  it  with  so  small  scutes,  and  that  Candinaes  was 
still  north-west  from  us.  Then  we  asked  them  for 
some  bread,  and  they  gave  us  a  loaf,  which  we  ate 
hungerly  up,  as  we  were  rowing;  but  we  would  not 
believe  them  that  we  were  still  on  the  east  side  of 
Candinaes,  for  we  thought  verily  that  we  had  passed 
over  the  White  Sea.  And  when  we  left  them,  we  rowed 
along  by  the  land,  the  wind  being  north;  and  about 
the  north-west  sun  we  had  a  good  wind  again  from 
the  south-east,  and  therewith  we  sailed  along  by  the 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     187 

shore,  and  saw  a  great  Russian  lodgie  lying  on  the 
starboard  from  us,  which  we  thought  came  out  of  the 
White  Sea. 

The  16  of  August,  in  the  morning,  sailing  forward 
north-west,  we  perceived  that  we  were  in  a  creek,  and 
so  made  towards  the  Russian  lodgie,  which  we  had 
seen  on  our  starboard,  which  at  last  with  great  labour 
and  much  pain  we  got  unto ;  and  coming  to  them  about 
the  south-east  sun,  with  a  hard  wind,  we  asked  them 
how  far  we  were  from  Zembla  de  Cool  or  Kilduin ;  but 
they  shook  their  heads,  and  showed  us  that  we  were 
on  the  east  side  of  Zembla  de  Candinaes,  but  we  would 
riot  believe  them.  And  then  we  asked  them  for  some 
victuals,  wherewith  they  gave  us  certain  plaice,  for 
the  which  the  master  gave  them  a  piece  of  money; 
and  we  sailed  from  them  again,  to  get  out  of  that  hole 
where  we  were,  as  it  reached  into  the  sea.  But  they 
perceiving  that  we  took  a  wrong  course,  and  that  the 
flood  was  almost  past,  sent  two  men  unto  us,  in  a 
small  boat,  with  a  great  loaf  of  bread,  which  they 
gave  us,  and  made  signs  unto  us  to  come  back  to 
their  ship  again,  for  that  they  intended  to  have  further 
speech  with  us  and  to  instruct  us.  Which  we  seemed  not 
to  refuse,  and  desiring  not  to  be  unthankful,  gave  them 
a  piece  of  money  and  a  piece  of  linen  cloth;  but  they 
stayed  still  by  us,  and  they  that  were  in  the  great 
lodgie  held  up  bacon  and  butter  unto  us,  to  move  us 
to  come  aboard  of  them  again,  and  so  we  did.  And 
being  with  them,  they  showed  us  that  we  were  still 
on  the  east  side  of  the  point  of  Candinaes.  Then  we 
fetched  our  card  and  let  them  see  it,  by  the  which  they 
showed  us  that  we  were  still  on  the  east  side  of  the 
White  Sea  and  of  Candinaes ;  which  we  understanding, 


188    William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

were  in  some  doubt  with  ourselves,  because  we  had  so 
great  a  voyage  to  make  over  the  White  Sea,  and  were 
in  more  fear  for  our  companions  that  were  in  the 
boat,  as  also  that  having  sailed  88  miles  right  across 
the  sea,  we  had  gotten  no  further,  but  were  then 
to  sail  over  the  mouth  of  the  White  Sea  with  so 
small  provision.  For  which  cause  the  master  bought  of 
the  Russians  three  sacks  with  meal,  two  flitches  and 
a  half  of  bacon,  a  pot  of  Russia  butter,  and  a  runlet  of 
honey,  for  provision  for  us  and  our  boat,  when  we  should 
meet  with  it  again.  And  for  that  in  the  meantime 
the  flood  was  past,  we  sailed  with  the  ebb  out  of  the 
aforesaid  creek,  where  the  Russians'  boat  came  to  us, 
and  entered  into  the  sea  with  a  good  south-east  wind, 
holding  our  course  nort h- north- west ;  and  there  we 
saw  a  point  that  reached  out  into  the  sea,  which  we 
thought  to  be  Candinaes,  but  we  sailed  still  forward, 
and  the  land  reached  north-west.  In  the  evening,  the 
sun  being  north-west,  when  we  saw  that  we  did  not 
much  good  with  rowing,  and  that  the  stream  was 
almost  past,  we  lay  still,  and  sod  a  pot  full  of  water 
and  meal,  which  tasted  exceeding  well,  because  we 
had  put  some  bacon  fat  and  honey  into  it,  so  that  we 
thought  it  to  be  a  festival  day  with  us ;  but  still  our 
minds  ran  upon  our  boat,  because  we  knew  not  where 
it  was. 

The  17  of  August,  lying  at  anchor,  in  the  morning 
at  break  of  day  we  saw  a  Russian  lodgie,  that  came 
sailing  out  of  the  White  Sea,  to  whom  we  rowed,  that 
we  might  have  some  instruction  from  him;  and  when 
we  boarded  him.  without  asking  or  speaking  unto  him, 
he  gave  us  a  loaf  of  bread,  and  by  signs  showed  us,  as 
well  as  he  could,  that  he  had  seen  our  companions,  and 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     189 

that  there  was  seven  men  in  the  boat.  But  we  not 
knowing  well  what  they  said,  neither  yet  believing 
them,  they  made  other  signs  unto  us,  and  held  up  their 
seven  fingers  and  pointed  to  our  scute,  thereby  showing 
that  there  were  so  many  men  in  the  boat,  and  that 
they  had  sold  them  bread,  flesh,  fish,  and  other  victuals. 
And  while  we  stayed  in  their  lodgie,  we  saw  a  small 
compass  therein,  which  we  knew  that  they  had  bought 
of  our  chief  boatswain,  which  they  likewise  acknow- 
ledged. Then  we  understanding  them  well,  asked  them 
how  long  it  was  since  they  saw  our  boat,  and  where- 
abouts it  was,  and  they  made  signs  unto  us,  that  it  was 
the  day  before.  And  to  conclude,  they  showed  us 
great  friendship,  for  the  which  we  thanked  them ;  and 
so,  being  glad  of  the  good  news  we  had  heard,  we  took 
our  leaves  of  them,  much  rejoicing  that  we  heard  of 
our  companions'  welfare,  and  specially  because  they 
had  gotten  victuals  from  the  Russians,  which  was  the 
thing  that  we  most  doubted  of,  in  regard  that  we  knew 
what  small  provision  they  had  with  them.  Which 
done,  we  rowed  as  hard  as  we  could,  to  try  if  we  might 
overtake  them,  as  being  still  in  doubt  that  they  had 
not  provision  enough,  wishing  that  they  had  had  part 
of  ours :  and  having  rowed  all  that  day  with  great 
labour  along  by  the  land,  about  midnight  we  found  a 
fall  of  fresh  water,  and  then  we  went  on  land  to  fetch 
some,  and  there  also  we  got  some  leple  leaves.  And 
as  we  thought  to  row  forward,  we  were  forced  to  sail,  • 
because  the  flood  was  past,  and  still  we  looked  earnestly 
out  for  the  point  of  Candinaes,  and  the  five  crosses, 
whereof  we  had  been  instructed  by  the  Russians,  but 
we  could  not  see  it. 

The  18  of  August,  in  the  morning,  the  sun  being 


190     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

east,  we  pulled  up  our  stone  (which  we  used  instead 
of  an  anchor),  and  rowed  along  by  the  land  till  the 
sun  was  south.  Then  we  saw  a  point  of  land  reaching 
into  the  sea,  and  on  it  certain  signs  of  crosses,  which, 
as  we  went  nearer  unto,  we  saw  perfectly ;  and  when  the 
sun  was  west,  we  perceived  that  the  land  reached  west 
and  south-west,  so  that  thereby  we  knew  it  certainly 
to  be  the  point  of  Candinaes,  lying  at  the  mouth  of 
the  White  Sea,  which  we  were  to  cross,  and  had  long 
desired  to  see  it. 

And  so,  having  a  good  north-east  wind  (which  it 
would  not  do  for  us  to  neglect),  we  set  forward  in  the 
name  of  God,  and  we  took  our  departure  when  the  sun 
was  north-west,  and  all  that  night  and  the  next  day 
sailed  with  a  good  wind,  and  in  all  that  time  rowed  but 
while  three  glasses  were  run  out;  and  the  next  night 
after  ensuing,  having  still  a  good  wind,  in  the  morning 
about  the  east-north-east  sun  we  saw  land  on  the  west 
side  of  the  White  Sea,  which  we  found  by  the  rushing  of 
the  sea  upon  the  land  before  we  saw  it.  And  perceiving 
it  to  be  full  of  cliffs,  and  not  low  sandy  ground  with 
some  hills,  as  it  is  on  the  east  side  of  the  White  Sea,  we 
assured  ourselves  that  we  were  on  the  west  side  of  the 
White  Sea,  upon  the  coast  of  Lapland;  for  the  which 
we  thanked  God,  that  He  had  helped  us  to  sail  over 
the  White  Sea  in  thirty  hours,  it  being  160  miles  at 
the  least,  our  course  being  west  with  a  north-east 
wind. 

The  20  of  August,  being  not  far  from  the  land, 
the  north-east  wind  left  us,  and  then  it  began  to  blow 
stiff  north-west;  at  which  time,  seeing  we  could  not 
make  much  way  by  sailing  forward,  we  determined 
to  put  in  between  certain  cliffs,  and  when  we  got  close 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     191 

to  the  land  we  espied  certain  crosses  with  directions 
upon  them,  whereby  we  understood  that  it  was  a  good 
roadstead,  and  so  put  into  it.  And  being  entered  a  little 
way  within  it,  we  saw  a  great  Russian  lodgie  lying  at 
an  anchor,  whereunto  we  rowed  as  fast  as  we  could, 
and  there  also  we  saw  certain  houses  wherein  men 
dwelt.  And  when  we  got  to  the  lodgie,  we  anchored 
there,  and  cast  our  tent  over  the  scute,  for  as  then 
it  began  to  rain.  Then  we  went  on  land  into  the 
houses  that  stood  upon  the  shore,  where  they  showed 
us  great  friendship,  leading  us  into  their  stoves,  and 
there  dried  our  wet  clothes,  and  then,  seething  some 
fish,  bade  us  sit  down  and  eat  somewhat  with  them. 
In  those  little  houses  we  found  thirteen  Russians,  who 
every  morning  went  out  to  fish  in  the  sea;  whereof 
two  of  them  had  charge  over  the  rest.  They  lived 
very  poorly,  and  ordinarily  ate  nothing  but  fish.  At 
evening,  when  we  prepared  ourselves  to  go  to  our 
scute  again,  they  prayed  the  master  and  me  to  stay 
with  them  in  their  houses,  which  the  master  thanked 
them  for,  would  not  do,  but  I  stayed  with  them  all  that 
night. 

The  21  of  August,  after  noon,  we  saw  two  men  upon 
the  hills,  whereupon  we  said  one  to  the  other,  "  Here- 
abouts there  must  more  people  dwell,  for  there  come 
two  men  towards  us  " ;  but  we,  regarding  them  not,  went 
back  again  to  our  scute  and  towards  the  houses.  The 
two  men  that  were  upon  the  hills  (being  some  of  our 
men  that  were  in  the  other  boat),  perceiving  also  the 
Russian  lodgie,  came  down  the  hill  towards  her  to  buy 
some  victuals  of  them.  Who  being  come  thither  unpre- 
pared and  having  no  money  about  them,  they  agreed 
between  them  to  put  off  one  of  their  pair  of  breeches 


192      William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

(for  that  as  then  we  wore  two  or  three  pair,  one  over 
the  other),  to  sell  them  for  some  victuals.  But  when 
they  came  down  the  hill  and  were  somewhat  nearer 
unto  us,  they  espied  our  scute  lying  by  the  lodgie, 
and  we  as  then  beheld  them  better  and  knew  them; 
wherewith  we  rejoiced,  and  showed  each  other  of  our 
proceedings,  and  how  we  had  sailed  to  and  fro  in  great 
necessity  and  hunger,  and  yet  they  had  been  in  greater 
necessity  and  danger,  than  we,  and  gave  God  thanks  that 
He  had  preserved  us  alive,  and  brought  us  together 
again.  And  then  we  ate  something  together,  and 
drank  of  the  clear  water,  such  as  runneth  along  by 
Cologne  through  the  Rhine,  and  then  we  agreed  that 
they  should  come  unto  us,  that  we  might  sail  to- 
gether. 

The  22  of  August  the  rest  of  our  men  with  the 
boat  came  unto  us  about  the  east- south-east  sun, 
whereat  we  much  rejoiced,  and  then  we  prayed  the 
Russians'  cook  to  bake  a  sack  of  meal  for  us,  and  to 
make  it  bread,  paying  him  for  it,  which  he  did.  And 
in  the  meantime,  when  the  fishermen  came  with  their 
fish  out  of  the  sea,  our  master  bought  four  cods  of 
them,  which  we  sod  and  ate.  And  while  we  were  at 
meat,  the  chief  of  the  Russians  came  unto  us,  and 
perceiving  that  we  had  not  much  bread,  he  fetched  a 
loaf  and  gave  it  us,  and  although  we  desired  them  to 
sit  down  and  eat  some  meat  with  us,  yet  we  could 
by  no  means  get  them  to  grant  thereunto,  because  it 
was  their  fasting  day,  and  for  that  we  had  poured 
butter  and  fat  into  our  fish ;  nor  we  could  not  get  them 
once  to  drink  with  us,  because  our  cup  was  somewhat 
greasy,  they  were  so  superstitious  touching  their  fasting 
and  religion.  Neither  would  they  lend  us  any  of  their 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     193 

cups  to  drink  in,  lest  they  should  likewise  be  greased. 
At  that  time  the  wind  was  constantly  north-west. 

The  23  of  August  the  cook  began  to  knead  our 
meal,  and  made  us  bread  thereof.  Which  being  done, 
and  the  wind  and  the  weather  beginning  to  be  some- 
what better,  we  made  ourselves  ready  to  depart  from 
thence;  at  which  time,  when  the  Russians  came  from 
fishing,  our  master  gave  their  chief  commander  a  good 
piece  of  money,  in  regard  of  the  friendship  that  he  had 
showed  us,  and  gave  somewhat  also  to  the  cook,  for 
the  which  they  yielded  us  great  thanks.  At  which 
time,  the  chief  of  the  Russians  desired  our  master  to 
give  him  some  gunpowder,  which  he  did.  And  when 
we  were  ready  to  sail  from  thence,  we  put  a  sack  of 
meal  out  of  our  scute  into  the  boat,  lest  we  should 
chance  to  stray  one  from  the  other  again,  that  they 
might  help  themselves  therewith.  And  so  about 
evening,  when  the  sun  was  west,  we  set  sail  and  de- 
parted from  thence,  and  on  the  25  we  got  to  the  west 
end  of  Kilduin. 

And  when  we  came  there,  we  found  a  small  house 
upon  the  shore,  wherein  there  was  three  men  and  a 
great  dog,  which  received  us  very  friendly,  asking  us 
of  our  affairs  and  how  we  got  thither.  Whereunto  we 
made  answer,  and  showed  them  that  we  had  lost  our  ship, 
and  that  we  were  come  thither,  to  see  if  we  could  get 
a  ship,  that  would  bring  us  into  Holland.  Whereunto 
they  made  us  answer,  that  there  was  three  ships  at 
Kola,  whereof  two  were  to  set  sail  from  thence  that 
day.  Then  we  asked  them,  if  they  would  go  with  one 
of  our  men  by  land  to  Kola,  to  look  for  a  ship  where- 
with we  might  get  into  Holland,  and  said  we  would 
reward  them  well  for  their  pains;  but  they  excused 

A.  p.  13 


194     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

themselves,  and  said  that  they  could  not  go  from  thence, 
but  they  said  that  they  would  bring  us  over  the  hill, 
where  we  should  find  certain  Laplanders,  whom  they 
thought  would  go  with  us,  as  they  did ;  for  the  master 
and  one  of  our  men  going  with  them  over  the  hill,  found 
certain  Laplanders  there,  whereof  they  got  one  to  go 
with  our  man,  promising  him  two  reals  of  eight  for 
his  pains. 

The  29  of  August  it  was  indifferent  fair  weather, 
and  we  were  still  in  good  hope  to  hear  some  good 
news  from  Kola,  and  always  looked  up  towards  the 
hill,  to  see  if  our  man  and  the  Laplander  came;  but 
seeing  they  came  not,  we  went  to  the  Russians  again, 
and  there  drest  our  meat,  and  then  meant  to  go  to 
our  scutes  to  lodge  in  them  all  night.  In  the  meantime 
we  spied  the  Laplander  coming  alone  without  our 
man,  whereat  we  wondered  and  were  somewhat  in 
doubt ;  but  when  he  came  unto-  us,  he  showed  us  a 
letter,  that  was  written  unto  our  master,  which  he 
opened  before  us,  the  contents  thereof  being  that  he, 
that  had  written  the  letter,  wondered  much  at  our 
arrival  in  that  place,  and  that  long  since  he  verily 
thought  that  we  had  been  all  cast  away,  being  exceeding 
glad  of  our  happy  fortune,  and  how  that  he  would 
presently  come  unto  us  with  victuals,  and  all.  other 
necessaries  to  succour  us  withal.  We  being  in  no 
small  admiration,  who  it  might  be,  that  showed  us 
so  great  favour  and  friendship,  could  not  imagine 
what  he  was,  for  it  appeared  by  the  letter  that  he  knew 
us  well.  And  although  the  letter  was  subscribed 
"by  me,  John  Cornelison  Rijp,"  yet  we  could  not  be 
persuaded  that  it  was  the  same  John  Cornelison,  who 
the  year  before  had  been  set  out  in  the  other  ship 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward     195 

with  us,  and  left  us  about  the  Bear  Island.  For  those 
good  news  we  paid  the  Laplander  his  hire,  and  beside 
that,  gave  him  hose,  breeches,  and  other  furniture,  so 
that  he  was  apparelled  like  a  Hollander;  for  as  then 
we  thought  ourselves  to  be  wholly  out  of  danger,  and 
so  being  of  good  comfort,  we  laid  us  down  to  rest. 
Here  I  cannot  choose  but  show  you  how  fast  the 
Laplander  went:  for  when  he  went  to  Kola,  as  our 
companion  told  us,  they  were  two  days  and  two 
nights  on  the  way,  and  yet  went  apace;  and  when  he 
came  back  again,  he  was  but  a  day  and  a  night  coming 
to  us,  which  was  wonderful,  it  being  but  half  the  time, 
so  that  we  said,  and  verily  thought,  that  he  was  half 
a  conjurer;  and  he  brought  us  a  partridge,  which  he 
had  killed  by  the  way,  as  he  went. 

The  30  of  August  it  was  indifferent  fair  weather, 
we  still  wondering,  who  that  John  Cornelison  might 
be,  that  had  written  unto  us ;  and  while  we  sat  musing 
thereon,  some  of  us  were  of  opinion,  that  it  might  be 
the  same  John  Cornelison,  that  had  sailed  out  of  Holland 
in  company  with  us ;  which  we  could  not  be  persuaded 
to  believe,  because  we  were  in  as  little  hope  of  his  life, 
as  he  of  ours,  supposing  that  he  had  sped  worse  than 
we,  and  long  before  that  had  been  cast  away.  At 
last  the  master  said,  "I  will  look  amongst  my  letters, 
for  there  I  have  his  handwriting,  and  that  will  put  us 
out  of  doubt."  And  so,  looking  amongst  them,  we 
found  that  it  was  the  same  John  Cornelison ;  wherewith 
we  were  as  glad  of  his  safety  and  welfare,  as  he  was  of 
ours.  And  while  we  were  speaking  thereof,  and  that 
some  of  us  would  not  believe  that  it  was  the  same 
John  Cornelison,  we  saw  a  Russian  joll  come  rowing, 
with  John  Cornelison  and  our  companion,  that  we 

13—2 


196     William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward 

had  sent  to  Kola.  Who  being  landed,  we  received 
and  welcomed  each  other  with  great  joy  and  exceeding 
gladness,  as  if  either  of  us  on  both  sides  had  seen  each 
other  rise  from  death  to  life  again;  for  we  esteemed 
him,  and  he  us,  to  be  dead  long  since.  He  brought 
us  a  barrel  of  Roswick  beer,  wine,  aqua  vitae,  bread, 
flesh,  bacon,  salmon,  sugar,  and  other  things,  which 
comforted  and  relieved  us  much.  And  we  rejoiced 
together  for  our  so  unexpected  meeting,  at  that  time 
giving  God  great  thanks  for  His  mercy  showed  unto  us. 

The  31  of  August  it  was  indifferent  fair  weather, 
the  wind  easterly,  but  in  the  evening  it  began  to  blow 
hard  from  the  land;  and  then  we  made  preparation 
to  sail  from  thence  to  Kola,  first  taking  our  leaves  of 
the  Russians,  and  heartily  thanking  them  for  their 
courtesy  showed  unto  us,  and  gave  them  a  piece  of 
money  for  their  good  wills;  and  at  night,  about  the 
north  sun,  we  sailed  from  thence  at  high  water. 

The  1  of  September,  in  the  morning,  with  the 
east  sun,  we  got  to  the  west  side  of  the  river  of  Kola. 

The  11  of  September,  by  leave  and  consent  of 
the  boyard,  governor  for  the  Great  Prince  of  Muscovia, 
we  brought  our  scute  and  our  boat  into  the  merchants' 
house,  and  there  let  them  stand  for  a  remembrance  of 
our  long,  far,  and  never  before  sailed  way,  and  that 
we  had  sailed  in  those  open  scutes  almost  1600  miles, 
through  and  along  by  the  sea  coasts  to  the  town 
of  Kola,  whereat  the  inhabitants  thereof  could  not 
sufficiently  wonder. 

The  15  of  September  we  went  into  a  lodgie,  and 
sailed  down  the  river  with  all  our  goods  and  our  men 
to  John  Cornelison's  ship,  which  lay  about  two  miles 
from  the  town,  and  that  day  sailed  in  the  ship  down 


William  Barents.     Third  Voyage  Northward      197 

the  river,  till  we  were  beyond  the  narrowest  part 
thereof,  which  was  about  half  the  river,  and  there 
stayed  for  John  Cornelison  and  our  master,  that  said 
they  would  come  to  us  the  next  day. 

The  17  of  September,  John  Cornelison  and  our 
master  being  come  aboard,  the  next  day,  about  the 
east  sun,  we  set  sail  out  of  the  river  of  Kola,  and  with 
God's  grace  put  to  sea  to  sail  homewards;  and  upon 
the  first  of  November,  about  noon,  got  to  Amsterdam, 
in  the  same  clothes  that  we  ware  in  Nova  Zembla, 
with  our  caps  furred  with  white  foxes'  skins,  and  went 
to  the  house  of  Peter  Hasselaer,  that  was  one  of  the 
merchants  that  set  out  the  two  ships,  which  were 
conducted  by  John  Cornelison  and  our  master.  And 
being  there,  where  many  men  wondered  to  see  us,  as 
having  esteemed  us  long  before  that  to  have  been  dead 
and  rotten,  the  news  thereof  being  spread  abroad  in 
the  town,  it  was  also  carried  to  the  Prince's  Court 
in  the  Hague;  at  which  time  the  Lord  Chancellor  of 
Denmark,  ambassador  for  the  said  king,  was  then  at 
dinner  with  Prince  Maurice.  For  the  which  cause  we 
were  presently  fetched  thither  by  the  scout  and  two 
of  the  burghers  of  the  town,  and  there,  in  the  presence 
of  the  said  lord  ambassador  and  the  burgomasters,  we 
made  rehearsal  of  our  journey  both  forwards  and 
backwards.  And  after  that,  every  man  that  dwelt 
thereabouts  went  home,  but  such  as  dwelt  not  near  to 
that  place,  were  placed  in  good  lodgings  for  certain 
days,  until  we  had  received  our  pay,  and  then  every 
one  of  us  departed  and  went  to  the  place  of  his 
abode. 


N  .2 


* 
-  —    o 


s  g 
g  « 

' 


g  a  -| 

*  §  i 

o>   O    Ss 


o 

£   S 

ll 


APPENDIX  TO   THE   THIRD   VOYAGE 
OF   W.   BARENTS 

Although  Dutch  walrus-hunters  and  others  had 
been  near  the  house  where  Barents  and  his  companions 
wintered,  the  spot  was  un visited  for  nearly  300  years. 
In  1871  a  Norwegian  sloop,  The  Solid,  Captain  Carlsen, 
reached  the  coast  of  Novaya  Zemlya.  The  following 
are  extracts  from  his  log  : 

"Saturday,  Sep.  9 6  o'clock  in 

the  afternoon,  we  saw  walrus  on  the  ice,  boats  were 
lowered,  and  we  caught  two  of  them;  we  also  saw  a 
house  on  shore,  which  had  fallen  down.  At  noon  we 
observed  the  latitude  76°  12',  the  distance  from  shore 
guessed.  The  house  on  shore  was  16  metres  long  by 
10  metres  broad,  and  the  fir- wood  planks,  of  which  it 
was  composed,  were  1J  inches  thick  by  from  14  to  16 
inches  broad,  and  as  far  as  we  could  make  out  they 
were  nailed  together.  The  first  things  we  saw  amongst 
the  ruins  of  the  house  were  two  ships'  cooking  pans  of 
copper,  a  crowbar  or  bar  of  iron,  a  gun-barrel,  an  alarum, 
a  clock,  a  chest  in  which  was  found  several  files  and 
other  instruments,  many  engravings,  a  flute,  and  also 
a  few  articles  of  dress.  There  were  also  two  other 
chests,  but  they  were  empty,  only  filled  up  with  ice, 
and  there  was  an  iron  frame  over  the  fireplace  with 
shifting  bar. 

"Tuesday,  12.  Gale  from  the  S.W.  We  are 
obliged  to  return  to  Ledenaji  Bay  (Ice  Harbour),  where 
on  the  evening  of  the  9th  we  had  found  the  ruined 
house.  At  noon  we  anchored  in  the  bay,  and  went 
again  on  shore  and  found  several  things,  viz. :  candle- 
sticks, tankards  with  lid  of  zinc,  a  sword,  a  halberd 


200     Appendix  to  the  Third  Voyage  of  W.  Barents 

head,  two  books,  several  navigation  instruments,  an 
iron  chest  already  quite  rusted. 

"Thursday,  14.  Calm  with  clear  sky.  4  o'clock 
in  the  morning  we  went  ashore  further  to  investigate 
the  wintering  place.  On  digging  we  found  again 
several  objects,  such  as  drumsticks,  a  hilt  of  a  sword, 
and  spears.  Altogether  it  seemed  that  the  people  had 
been  equipped  in  a  warlike  manner,  but  nothing  was 
found  which  could  indicate  the  presence  of  human 
remains.  On  the  beach  we  found  pieces  of  wood 
which  had  formerly  belonged  to  some  part  of  a  ship, 
for  which  reason  I  believe  that  a  vessel  has  been 
wrecked  there,  the  crew  of  which  built  the  house  with 
the  materials  of  the  wreck  and  afterwards  betook 
themselves  to  the  boats.  Five  sailors'  trunks  were 
still  in  the  house,  which  might  also  have  been  used  as 
five  berths,  at  least  as  far  as  we  could  make  out." 

On  his  return,  a  Norwegian  newspaper  published 
an  article  containing  a  few  further  details,  which  were 
supplied  probably  by  Carlsen  himself.  He  had  found 
the  house  "almost  hermetically  enclosed  by  a  thick 
layer  of  ice.  All  the  objects  were  likewise  covered 
by  a  thick  sheet  of  ice,  and  this  explains  the  excellent 
condition,  in  which  many  of  the  articles  were  found." 
Among  them  were  "a  few  books  in  the  Dutch  language, 
which  latter  makes  it  almost  certain  that  the  relics 
belonged  to  Barendsz  and  his  companions  of  the  year 
1596.  In  the  centre  of  the  house,  where  the  fireplace 
had  probably  stood,  a  great  iron  frame  was  found, 
on  which  two  ship's  copper  cooking  pans  still  remained." 

Probably  some  of  these  things  (e.g.  the  engravings) 
were  merchandise — intended  for  China — of  which  the 
ship's  cargo  partly  consisted.  In  1875  another  Nor- 
wegian, Gundersen,  visited  Ice  Harbour  and  found  in 
a  chest  a  manuscript  Dutch  translation  of  Pet  and 
Jackman's  Voyage  of  1580,  two  charts,  etc. 

Lastly  in  1876,  an  Englishman,  Mr  Charles  Gardiner, 
in  the  yacht  Glow-worm,  landed  and  spent  three  days 
in  searching  the  ruined  house,  and  discovered  more 


Appendix  to  the  Third  Voyage  of  W.  Barents    201 

than  a  hundred  articles  under  the  ice.  These  consisted 
largely  of  remains  of  carpenters'  tools,  weapons,  and 
sailors'  materials.  There  were  also  a  seal,  a  lead 
inkstand,  quill  pens,  an  iron  pair  of  compasses,  a 
harpoon,  twenty  wax  candles,  three  Dutch  books, 
two  Dutch  coins,  a  measure,  and  the  ship's  flag  of 
Amsterdam .  In  one  of  the  powder-horns  was  the  manu- 
script which  Barents  left  behind  hung  up  in  the  chimney 
— a  short  record  signed  by  Barents  and  Heemskerck — 
legible  except  for  a  few  words. 

These  relics  are  now  in  the  National  Museum  at 
Amsterdam. 


13—5 


NOTES 

FROBISHER:    FIRST  VOYAGE 

The  black  figures  refer  to  pages  and  the  plain  figures  to  lines. 

1,  \.     General.     The  commander  of  a  fleet.     His  ship  was 
the  Admiral. 

2.  Gataya  (or  Cathay).     Another  name  for  China.     Knowledge 
was  so  vague  that  these  were  sometimes  thought  to  be  distinct 
empires. 

Capo  de  Buona  Speranga.     The  Cape  of  Good  Hope. 

2,  26.     pretended.     Intended. 

29.  He  departed  upon  the  said  voyage  from  Blackwall. 
On  the  way  down  the  Thames  they  passed  the  Court,  then  at 
Greenwich,  "  where  we  shot  off  our  ordnance  and  made  the  best  show 
we  could.  Her  Majesty,  beholding  the  same,  commended  it,  and 
bade  us  farewell,  with  shaking  her  hand  at  us  out  of  the  window." 
(From  the  account  of  the  voyage  by  Hall,  Master  in  the  Gabriel.} 

4,  3.     Frisland.     An  imaginary  land  on  old  charts  near  the 
east   coast   of   Greenland.     Frobisher   had   really   reached   South 
Greenland. 

5,  15.     Frobisher 's   Straits.     The  bay  (Frobisher  Bay)   in 
the  south  of  Baffin  Land,  to  the  north  of  Hudson  Strait. 

24.  mankind.  Masculine,  vicious.  "  A  mankind  witch." 
Shakespeare,  Winter's  Tale,  n.  iii. 

6,  27.     come   within   our   men's   danger.      Get  into  their 
power. 

33.  lowbell.  A  bell  used  in  bird-batting  (a  method  of  taking 
birds  at  night  with  a  net  and  light). 

8,  24.  marquesite.  From  an  Arab  word  meaning  pyrites. 
This  mineral  sometimes  contains  a  trace  of  gold. 

26.     goldfiners.     Gold  refiners  or  assayers. 


Notes  203 


FROBISHER:    SECOND  VOYAGE 

10,  3.     Cataya,  China.     See  note  p.  1,  1.  2. 

11,  36.     Hope.     An  anchorage. 

12,  10.     condemned  men.     Criminals  who  were  to  be  landed 
in  Greenland  with  food  and  weapons. 

19.  [cipher]  leagues.  To  keep  the  course  secret,  distances, 
etc.,  were  in  cipher  in  the  manuscript. 

13,  17.     durance.     Imprisonment. 

14,  9.     account.     Reckoning. 

19.     Frisland.     See  note  p.  4,  1.  3. 

15,1.  Zeni.  The  accounts  of  these  voyages  hi  the  14th  century 
were  probably  a  16th  century  forgery,  with  the  object  of  proving  that 
the  Venetians  had  discovered  America  a  century  before  Columbus. 

4.  sithence.     Since. 

5.  sea-cards.     Charts. 

16,  1.     bearing  yet  the  dominion.     Keeping  still  above  it. 
11.     surcease.     Cease. 

17,  8.     Hall's  Island.     Cape  Enderby  (at  the  northern  entrance 
of  Frobisher  Bay). . 

19,  11.     wafting.     Beckoning. 

"  In  such  a  night 

Stood  Dido  with  a  willow  in  her  hand 
Upon  the  wild  sea  banks,  and  waft  her  love 
To  come  again  to  Carthage." 

Shakespeare,  Merchant  of  Venice,  v.  i. 

24.  point.     A  lace  with  a  tag  used  for  fastening  articles  of 
dress. 

21,  12.     caliver.     A  large  pistol  or  blunderbuss. 

16.     furniture.     Armour. 

23,  16.     marquesite.     See  note  p.  8,  1.  24. 

28.     say.     Assay. 

31.     a  great  dead  fish.     A  narwhal. 

25,  16.     northland.     Supposed  to  be  part  of  Asia.     See  p.  5, 

28,  4.     cony  bury.     A  rabbit's  burrow. 

29,  12.     advisedly.     With  deliberation. 

14.  whether.     Which  of  the  two. 

15.  lively.     Living. 
33,  4.     let.     Hindered. 


204  Notes 

sea  room.     Clear  space  for  allowing  a  ship  to  turn,  etc. 

"  Give  us  but  a  good  ship  and  sea  room,  and  we  think  nothing 
of  such  a  squall  of  wind  as  that." 

Robinson  Crusoe  (Golden  Treasury  Edition,  p.  7). 

35,  9.     Queen's  Cape.     Cape  Resolution  in  Resolution  Island 
off  the  southern  entrance  of  Frobisher  Bay. 

36,  24.     kindness.     Natural  disposition. 
39,  11.     mine.     Mineral  ore. 

42,  1.     for  fashion  sake.     For  the  sake  of  custom,  or  courtesy. 
2.     cater.     Caterer,  one  who  provides  food. 

18.     spoil.     Plunder.     Compare  "to  spoil  the  Egyptians." 

43,  1.     belayed.     Lain  hidden. 

46,  5.     branded.     A  mixture  of  red  and  black. 

9.     board.     Tack. 

31.     Bristow.     Bristol. 

DAVIS:    FIRST  VOYAGE 

49,  20.     harping  iron.     Harpoon. 

50,  12.     breach.     Where  the  waves  break. 

21.     glass.     A  sand-glass  running  out  in  half-an-hour  (used 
until  recently  in  the  Royal  Navy). 
30.     falconet.     A  light  cannon. 

51,  3.     along  the  coast.     The  east  coast  of  Greenland,  north 
of  Cape  Farewell. 

9.     list.     The  torn  edge  of  cloth.     Here  "torn  cloud." 

13.  Land  of  Desolation.  Considered  a  new  discovery, 
distinct  from  the  land  seen  by  Frobisher  (which  he  supposed  to  be 
Frisland).  Longitudes  are  not  given  in  Frobisher's  Voyages,  and 
Davis  made  Frobisher's  Strait  pass  through  Greenland,  with  an 
island  to  the  south.  So  it  appears  on  the  New  Map  of  the  World, 
published  about  1600.  • 

53,  5.  sounds.  Here  was  Gilbert  Sound  (64°  8'  N.),  now  God- 
thaab,  a  Danish  settlement. 

56,  3.     scull.     School  or  shoal. 

7.  Meta  Incognita.    The  Unknown  Bourne.    Queen  Elizabeth 
gave  this  name  to  the  land  bordering  Frobisher  Bay  on  the  south 
(South-east  Baffin  Land). 

8.  Muscovy  glass.     Mica,  which  was  used  in  parts  of  Russia 
instead  of  glass. 

11.  corinth.  Now  altered  to  "currant."  Named  after  the 
town  of  Corinth,  and  given  originally  to  the  small  dried  grapes 
which  came  from  the  Levant. 


Notes  205 

14.     present.     Present  month. 

57,  2.     Cape  Walsingham.     They  had  crossed  the  strait  and 
reached  Baffin  Land,  north  of  Cumberland  Sound. 

58,  6.     bravest.     Brave  commonly  meant  "finely  dressed." 

16.  Newland.     Newfoundland. 

20.     Gape  of  God's  Mercy.     At  the  north  entrance  of  Cumber- 
land Sound. 

25.     entrance  or  passage.     Cumberland  Sound. 

59,  30.     flean.     Flayed. 

61,  10.     snite.     A  snipe,  so  called  from  the  length  of  the  bill 
or  snout. 

24.  tried.     "To  try"  is  to  lie  under  try-sails  (i.e.  with  very 
little  sail  set). 

25.  goose  wing.     A  sail  with  only  its  lower  corners  set. 

DAVIS:    SECOND  VOYAGE 

62,  10.     land.     The  southern  extremity  of  Greenland.     Here 
Davis  divided  his  fleet,  and  sent  the  Sunshine  and  Northstar  to 
seek  a  passage  northward  between  Greenland  and  Iceland.     After 
harbouring  in  Iceland,  they  sailed  north-west,  reached  "  two  firm 
lands  of  ice,"  and  then  turned  back  towards  Greenland  and  reached 
Gilbert  Sound  on  August  3rd.     Failing  to  meet  the  rest  of  the  fleet 
here,   as   arranged,   they  left  for  England  on  August  31st.     On 
September  3rd,  in  a  very  great  storm,  the  Sunshine  lost  sight  of 
the  Northstar  and  reached  England  alone  at  the  end  of  the  month. 

63,  4.     same  place.     Gilbert  Sound.     There  is  an  error  in 
Davis' s  longitude. 

64,  16.     salmon  peel.     Young  salmon  weighing  less  than  2  Ibs. 
29.     train  oil.     An  oil  got  from  the  whale. 

65,  11.     gripe.     (Griffin)  Gerfalcon. 

66,  10.     Iliaout.     "I  mean  no  harm."     So  interpreted  by  the 
explorers. 

14.     elan.     Elk. 

17.  witches.     Used  for  the  masculine  (wizards). 
25.     train.     See  note  p.  64,  1.  29. 

67,  12.     caliver.     See  note  to  Frobisher  2,  p.  21,  1.  12. 

18.  falcon.     A  cannon  larger  than  a  falconet,  about  7  feet  in 
length,  throwing  a  3  Ib.  ball. 

68,  7.     artificially.     Skilfully. 

69,  9.     to  stop  a  flood.     To  wait  for  the  flood  tide  (which  was 
against  them)  to  ebb. 


206  Notes 

10.     miscreants.     Unbelievers. 

26.  tolled.     Drew,  enticed. 

71,  30.     stickle.     Rapid. 

72,  25.     contentation.     Content. 

73,  7.     the  land  in  latitude  66  degrees,  etc.     The  American 
shore  of  the  strait. 

13.     graved  the  Moonshine.     "To  grave"  is  to  clean  a  ship's 
bottom  of  weeds,  etc.,  and  tar  it. 
22.     Hood.     The  flood  tide. 

74,  19.     a  very  fair  promontory.     The  Cape  of  God's  Mercy, 
which  he  had  discovered  and  named  on  his  first  voyage. 

75,  3.     to  lie  at  hull.     To  lie-to,  i.e.  to  come  almost  to  a  stop 
with  head  near  wind.     " To  hull"  also  means  to  drive  without  sails 
or  rudder. 

9.     a  very  high  hill.     Probably  on  Resolution  Island,  at  the 
entrance  of  Hudson  Strait. 

21.     lay  upon  the  lee.     Heaved-to. 

76,  1.     pheasant,  partridge.     Ptarmigans. 
8.     coasted  the  shore.     Labrador. 

16.  suavle.     Possibly  a  corruption  of  swej>el,  close  packed. 

17.  scull.     See  note  p.  56,  1.  3. 

24.     two    lands    west.      Hamilton    Inlet    (Labrador),    or   the 
strait  between  Newfoundland  and  the  mainland. 

77,  13.     presently.     At  the  present,  at  once. 

27.  junk.     An  old,  worn  out  rope. 


DAVIS:    THIRD  VOYAGE 

78,  9.      clincher.     A   clinker-built   pinnace    (made   with   the 
outside  planks  overlapping  one  another).     Two  of  the  ships  were 
to  go  fishing,  to  help  pay  expenses. 

79,  28.     we  discovered  land.     The  west  coast  of  Greenland. 
The  south  coast  had  been  rounded  without  being  seen. 

80,  8.     kerned.     Corned,  granulated. 

20.     saker.     An  old  kind  of  cannon,  eight  to  ten  feet  long, 
throwing  a  4  Ib.  to  7  Ib.  shot. 

81,  17.     had  three  hundred  strokes.     To  keep  the  water  out 
of  the  ship,  three  hundred  strokes  of  the  pump  were  necessary 
during  one  watch  (four  hours). 

82,  12.     unicorn.     See  Frobisher  2,  p.  24,  1.  5. 
28.     chichsanege.     Probably  sealskins. 


Notes  207 

83,  4.     London  Coast.     Greenland. 

8.  Hope  Sanderson.  After  the  London  merchant  to  whom 
the  enterprise  owed  so  much  (see  p.  48, 1.  20) .  This  was  the  extreme 
northern  point  reached. 

shaped  our  course  west.  Crossing  the  gulf  now  called  Baffin 
Bay. 

84,  14.     we  were  thwart  the  straits.      The  ice  had  forced 
them  southwards,  so  that  land  was  not  seen  until  they  were  about 
the  narrow  part  of  Davis  Strait. 

27.  hot.  "  This  25  we  were  becalmed  almost  in  the  bottom 
of  the  straits,  and  had  the  weather  marvellous  extreme  hot " — 
Davis's  Log-book. 

85,  7.     ruts.     The  dashing  of  waves. 
20.     a  very  great  gulf.     Hudson  Strait. 

26.  Ghidley's  Cape.    Named  after  John  Chudleigh  or  Chidley, 
an  intimate  friend  of  Davis. 

87,  1.  Biscayan.  The  Biscayans  were  expert  whale  fishers, 
and  from  them  the  English  learnt  the  art.  In  early  times  a  species 
of  large  whale  frequented  the  Bay  of  Biscay  and  the  Atlantic,  and 
was  the  most  important  source  of  wealth  to  the  ports  from  St  Jean 
de  Luz  to  Santander.  This  gradually  disappeared,  and  the  Basque 
fishermen  sailed  north  for  whales  to  Newfoundland  and  Spitzbergen. 
When  the  English  began  to  fish  for  whales  round  Spitzbergen,  they 
used  to  enter  a  number  of  these  men  in  each  fleet. 

HUDSON:    LAST  VOYAGE 

89,  6.  the  capes  where  the  fowl  bred.  Cape  Wolstenholme 
and  one  opposite  on  Digges  Islands.  They  were  named  by  Hudson 
after  two  of  the  principal  merchants  responsible  for  the  voyage — 
Sir  Dudley  Digges  and  Sir  John  Wolstenholme. 

91,  18.     piece.     A  gun. 

94,  19.     seine.     A  fishing  net. 

97,3.  they  would  have  me  stay  in  the  ship.  The  mutineers 
had  saved  Prickett,  "as  is  thought,  in  hope  by  Sir  Dudley  Digges, 
his  master,  to  procure  their  pardon  at  their  return." 

100,  12.     He  rose  and  went  into  the  hold.     i.e.  John  King. 

101,  8.     horn.     A  thin  plate  of  horn,  serving  as  a  window. 
12.     the  carpenter.     Philip  Staffe,  an  Ipswich  man. 

27.  the  capes.     See  p.  89,  1.  6,  and  note. 

102,  16.     John  Hudson.     Henry  Hudson's  son,  according  to 
Purchas. 

103,  23.     card.     Chart. 


208  Notes 

28.     tale.     Number. 

105,  17.  the  capes.  They  had  lost  their  way,  and  were 
longing  to  reach  the  Capes  (Wolstenholme  and  Digges),  where  they 
had  entered  Hudson  Bay,  and  where  they  had  found  a  plentiful 
supply  of  birds. 

107,  29.     a  snare.     A  slip-knot. 

108,  5.     morses.     Walruses. 

109,  16.     Jews'  trumps.     Jew's-harps. 

111,  29.     it  feared.     Frightened. 
our  master.     Bylot. 

112,  12.     lay  a-try.     See  note  p.  61,  1.  24. 

28.  the  Desolations.     South  Greenland. 

113,  13.     reasty.     Generally  of  bacon:   rancid. 

29.  steep-tub.     A  large  tub  for  soaking  salt  provisions  before 
cooking. 

114,  6.     the  Durseys.     Dursey  Island,  off  the  west  coast  of 
Ireland,  to  the  north  of  the  entrance  to  Bantry  Bay. 

12.     Bere  Haven.     In  Bantry  Bay. 

20.  Sir  Thomas  Smith.  One  of  the  principal  merchants 
responsible  for  the  voyage. 


BARENTS :    THIRD   VOYAGE 

116,  10.     Barents.     Barentsz,   a  contraction  of  Barentszoon 
(which  was  his  proper  name),  meaning  son  of  Barent  or  Bernard. 

26.  cross  through  the  great  roundel.     Right  through  the 
great  circle  (of  the  former  rainbow). 

117,  11.     island.     Bear     Island,     sometimes    called    Cherry 
Island. 

118,  9.     four  glasses.     Two  hours. 

18.     brooked  it  not  well.     It  did  not  agree  with  us. 
22.     we  saw  land  again.     Spitzbergen  (though  they  suppdsed 
it  to  be  part  of  Greenland). 

120,  2.     scute.     Any  small  boat.     The  smaller  boat  (the  yawl) 
is  sometimes  referred  to  by  the  translator  as  "  the  boat "  :  sometimes 
both  are  called  "  scutes." 

121,  12.     brent  geese.     Called  also  "barnacle"  geese.     They 
are  smaller  than  a  goose,  with  black  and  white  feathers. 

27.  burst   in   sunder    and    are   lost.     A   fable   which   was 
commonly  believed  in  the   16th  century  until  this  account  was 
published. 


Notes  209 

123,  8.  Ice  Point.  The  northernmost  point  of  Novaya 
Zemlya. 

127,  33.     vice.     A  screw  or  jack. 

128,  29.     harts  and  hinds.     "Deer  and  elks." 

129,  4.     wound.     Tacked. 

130,30.  with  more  ease.  "  Three  remained  behind  with  the 
wood,  to  hew  it,  so  that  it  might  be  the  lighter  to  draw." 

131,  1.     the  principals.     The  beams  or  principal  timbers. 

6.  to  make  up  our  house.  "  To  close  up  (the  sides)  of  the 
house." 

132,  22.     overhead.     "  Somewhat  higher  in  the  middle." 

133,  10.     cabins.     Cots. 

17.  shot  at  her  with  pieces  of  wood.  "  Threw  pieces  of  fire- 
wood at  her." 

29.  spruce-beer.  Originally  a  decoction  in  beer  or  water  of 
the  leaf-buds  of  the  spruce  fir,  used  for  rheumatism,  etc.  After- 
wards applied  to  beer  brewed  at  Dantzic,  without  these  leaf-buds. 

135,  13.     no  means  to  shoot.     Their  firearms  had  matchlocks. 
31.     strike.      "We  set  up   our  clock,  so   that  it   (went  and) 

struck  (the  hour)." 

136,  10.     chirurgeon.     Surgeon  (who  was  also  the  barber). 
15,  16.     at  the  setting  of  the  sun. . .  .it  rose.     When  the  sun 

disappeared  and  when  it  came  back  again. 

23.  in  the  highest  degree.  At  76°  the  moon  continues 
above  the  horizon  for  7  or  8  days  every  month. 

139,  23.  sea-coals.  "Stone  or  mineral  coal":  so  called  to 
distinguish  it  from  charcoal,  the  usual  fuel  on  the  continent.  Sea- 
coal  was  applied  originally  to  coal  brought  by  sea  from  Newcastle. 

142,  26.     disease.     Discomfort. 

143,  8.     Twelfth    Even.     "Three   Kings'    Even."     Twelfth- 
night  is  really  on  January  5th — the  eve  of  the  festival  of  Epiphany 
— but  since  the  Reformation  it  has  been  kept  on  January  6th. 

145,  11.     broke  our  fasts.     "Ate  the  funeral  meal." 
149,  27.     the  stairs.     The  steps  cut  in  the  snow. 
151,    13.     in    the    highest.     A    mistake    for    "lowest."     He 
meant  that  the  sun  was  on  the  meridian  in  the  north. 

154,  10.     arquebus.     An  early  kind  of  portable  gun,  supported 
on  a  rest,  or  by  a  hook  on  a  tripod. 

155,  14.     a  piece  of  a  buck,  etc.     "Pieces  of  seals  with  the 
skin  and  hair." 

25.  to  amend  our  boat  withal.  "  Wherewith  to  raise  the 
gunwale  of  our  yawl." 


210  Notes 

160,   1.     into  a  musket's  charge.     "And  William  Barents 
had  previously  written  a  small  scroll  and  placed  it  in  a  bandoleer" 
33.     dryfats.     trunks. 

162,  22.     Ice  Point.     See  note  p.  123,  1.  8. 

163,  30.     ho  well.     Hummock. 

168,  18.     to  discharge.     To  empty  and  re-load. 

170,  1.     impeachments.     Hindrances. 

7.     mended.     "  Where  we  had  added  to  it." 

31.     dryfat.     See  note  p.  160,  1.  33. 

33.     bunged  with  the  ice.     Was  stove  in  by  the  ice. 

171,  28.     helm  stick.     The  tiller  of  the  rudder. 
173,  26.     eight  foot  thick.     Eight  feet  in  girth. 

176,  14.     between  every  meal-tide.     In  every  24  hours. 
26.     the  Black  Point.     Cape  Negro. 

178,  11.      had    been    in    our    ship.      During    the    previous 
voyage. 

179,  10.     lodging.     Like  lodgie  (p.  177,  1.  8),  intended  for  a 
Russian  word  for  boat. 

22.     departed  from  John  Cornelison.     At  Bear  Island,  on 
July  1st,  1596.     See  p.  122. 

180,  33.     leple  leaves.     Scurvy  grass. 

181,  16.     point    of   trust.     "Patience   was    our   fore-land," 
namely,  always  before  them. 

182,  4.     get   out   of   the   creek.     The   mouth   of   the  river 
Petchora. 

24.     if  we   had   found   any  relief.     "  If  looking   deplorable 
could  have  helped  us." 

183,  9.     Gandinaes.     Cape  Kanin  Nos,  at  the  entrance  to  the 
White  Sea. 

21.     when  we  were  most  in  despair.     "  But  help  us  when 
least  foreseen." 

184,  21.     Russian  lodgie.     See  note  p.  179,  1.  10. 

185,  9.     a  piece  of  eight  reals.     A  Spanish  dollar.     A  real 
was  a  silver  coin  worth  about  sixpence. 

186,  1.     the  north  coast.     "The  coast  of  Norway." 
11.     we  saw  land.     The  west  side  of  Tcheskaia  Bay. 
16.     Kilduin.     Kildin  Island,  off  the  coast  of  Lapland. 

187,  10.     Zembla  de  Cool.     Zemlya  is  the  Russian  word  for 
land.     Cool  is  Kola  in  Lapland. 

188,  20.     Stream.     Tide. 

189,  9.     chief  boatswain.     The  first  mate. 


Notes  211 

28.  And  as  we  thought  to  row  forward,  we  were  forced 
to  sail,   because  the  flood  was  past.     "When  we  intended  to 
proceed  on  our  voyage,  we  were  forced  to  remain  lying  there, 
because  the  tide  had  run  out." 

190,  16.     three  glasses  were  run  out.     An  hour  and  a  half. 

191,  11.     stoves.     Rooms  heated  by  a  stove. 

192,  12.     drank  of  the  clear  water.     "Drank  of  the  pure 
article."    There  is  a  play  on  the  Dutch  word  for  "  clear  "  or  "  pure," 
which  is  applied  to  spirits  as  well  as  to  water. 

194,  7.  two  reals  of  eight.  Two  Spanish  dollars  of  eight 
reals.  See  note  p.  185,  1.  9. 

195 ;  1.     about  the  Bear  Island.     See  p.  122. 

3.  furniture.  Anything  that  furnishes.  Often  "armour"; 
here  "clothes." 

32.     joll.     A  yawl. 

196,  6.     Roswick.     A  town  in  West  Bothnia  (Sweden). 
aqua  vitae.     Here  used  for  gin. 

20.  the  river  of  Kola.  The  entrance  to  Kola  is  a  bay,  not 
a  river. 

22.     boyard.     A  Russian  title  for  a  nobleman,  or  great  man. 

197,  21.     Prince     Maurice.     A     mistranslation.     There     is 
nothing  about  the  Hague  or  Prince  Maurice  in  the  original,  which 
runs :   "  where  the  noble  lords,  the  Chancellor  and  the  Ambassador 
from  the  most  illustrious  King  of  Denmark,  Norway,  Goths  and 
Vandals,  were  then  at  table." 

22.  the  scout  and  two  of  the  burghers  of  the  town.  The 
sheriff  and  two  town-councillors. 

29.  every  one  of  us  departed,  etc.     Twelve  men  (out  of  the 
original  ship's  company  of  seventeen)  returned. 


CAMBRIDGE  :    PRINTED    BY   JOHN    CLAY,   M.A.   AT    THE    UNIVERSITY   PRESS 


CAMBRIDGE   TRAVEL   BOOKS 

Edited  by  P.  F.  ALEXANDER,  M.A. 

The  aim  of  the  series  is  briefly  explained  in  the  Preface  to 
the  present  volume.     The  following  volume  is  in  the  press: 

The  Earliest  Voyages  round  the  World. 


SELECTION   FROM  THE  GENERAL  CATALOGUE 

OF  BOOKS   PUBLISHED   BY 
THE   CAMBRIDGE    UNIVERSITY   PRESS 

Stories  of  Exploration  and  Discovery.  By  A.  B.  ARCHER,  M.A. 

With  maps  and  illustrations.  [In  the  press 

A  History  of   Geographical  Discovery  in  the  Seventeenth 

and  Eighteenth  Centuries.  By  E.  HEAWOOD,  M.A.,  Librarian 
to  the  Royal  Geographical  Society.  Crown  8vo.  With  59  illus- 
trations, las  6d  net. 

The  Land  of  the  Blue  Poppy.  Travels  of  a  Naturalist  in 
Eastern  Tibet.  By  F.  KINGDON  WARD,  B.A.,  F.R.G.S.  Royal 
8vo.  With  5  maps  and  40  plates.  125  net. 

The  Duab  of  Turkestan.  A  Physiographic  sketch  and 
account  of  some  travels.  By  W.  RICKMER  RICKMERS.  Large 
Royal  8vo.  With  207  illustrations.  303  net. 

Yun-Nan,  the  Link  between  India  and  the  Yangtze.     By 

Major  H.  R.  DAVIES,  52nd  Oxfordshire  Light  Infantry.  With 
map  and  73  plates.  Royal  8vo.  i6s  net. 

Desert   and  Water   Gardens   of  the   Red   Sea.     Being   an 

account  of  the  Natives  and  the  Shore  Formations  of  the  Coast. 
By  CYRIL  CROSSLAND,  M.A.  Cantab.,  B.Sc.  Lond.,  F.L.S.,  F.Z.S., 
Marine  Biologist  to  the  Sudan  Government.  Royal  8vo.  With 
40  plates,  ii  text-figures  and  12  diagrams.  los  6d  net. 

No    Man's    Land.      A    History   of    Spitsbergen    from    its 

Discovery  in  1596  to  the  Beginning  of  the  Scientific  Exploration 
of  the  Country.  By  Sir  MARTIN  CONWAY.  Royal  8vo.  With 
ii  full  page  plates  and  13  maps.  los  6d  net. 

Map  Projections.      By  ARTHUR    R.   HINKS,   M.A.,   F.R.S. 

Demy  8vo.     With  frontispiece  and  19  text  figures.     53  net. 

Maps  and  Survey.  By  the  same  author.  Demy  8vo.  With 
24  plates.  6s  net. 

I  [P.T.O. 


The  Teaching  of  Geography.  By  B.  C.  WALLIS,  B.Sc., 
F.C.P.,  F.R.G.S.  Crown  8vo.  With  12  illustrations.  33  6d  net 

An  Introduction  to  General  Geography.  By  ALEC  A. 
GOLDING,  B.Sc.  Crown  8vo.  With  100  illustrations.  43. 

The  British  Isles.  By  FREDERICK  MORT,  D.Sc.,  M.A.,  F.G.S., 
F.R.S.G.S.  Large  Crown  8vo.  With  79  illustrations.  33. 

Cambridge  Geographical  Text-Books.  Intermediate.  By 
A.  J.  DICKS,  B.A.,  B.Sc.  Crown  8vo.  With  62  illustrations  and 
20  maps  and  diagrams.  33. 

A  Short  Geography  of  Europe.    By  A.  J.  DICKS,  B.A.,  B.Sc. 

Reprinted  from  The  Cambridge  Intermediate  Geography.  With  19 
illustrations.  Limp  cloth.  lod. 

A  Geography  of  the  British  Empire.  By  W.  L.  BUNTING, 
M.A.,  and  H.  L.  COLLEN,  M.A.  Royal  8vo.  With  maps,  diagrams 
and  29  illustrations.  33  6d. 

Cambridge  County  Geographies.     General  Editor,  F.  H.  H. 

GUILLEMARD,  M.D.  Each  volume  gives  an  account  of  the  history, 
antiquities,  architecture,  natural  history,  industries,  and  physical, 
geological,  and  general  characteristics  of  the  county,  and  contains 
two  coloured  maps  and  numerous  illustrations.  Crown  8vo. 
is  6d  each. 

The   Madras    Presidency,   with    Mysore,    Coorg    and    the 

Associated  States.  By  EDGAR  THURSTON,  C.I.E.  Crown  8vo. 
With  100  illustrations,  maps,  and  diagrams.  33  net. 

Elementary  Commercial  Geography.  By  HUGH  ROBERT 
MILL,  D.Sc.,  LL.D.  Revised  by  FAWCETT  ALLEN.  Extra  fcap.  8vo. 
is  6d  net. 

An  Atlas  of  Commercial  Geography.  Compiled  by  FAWCETT 
ALLEN.  With  an  introduction  by  D.  A.  JONES.  Demy  4to,  con- 
taining 48  maps  and  an  index.  33  6d  net. 

Physical  Geography.  By  PHILIP  LAKE,  M.A.  Demy  8vo. 
With  20  plates,  162  text-figures,  and  7  maps.  73  6d  net. 

The    Surface    of    the    Earth.      Elementary    Physical    and 

Economic  Geography.  By  H.  PICKLES,  B.A.,  B.Sc.  Crown  8vo. 
With  64  illustrations  and  34  maps  and  diagrams.  2s. 


Cambridge   University  Press 

C.  F.  Clay,  Manager:   Fetter  Lane,  London 


JAN  31  1917